Yaskawa MC5 Spindle Drive Manual
Reklama
Reklama
How to Change the Digital Operator Display from Japanese to English
Preface
The VARISPEED-626MC5 Series of general-purpose Inverters provides V/f control and vector control as standard features along with user-friendly operation.
This manual is designed to ensure correct and suitable application of VARISPEED-626MC5-series
Inverters. Read this manual before attempting to install, operate, maintain, or inspect an Inverter and keep it in a safe, convenient location for future reference. Before you understand all precautions and safety information before attempting application.
i
Safety Information
The following conventions are used to indicate precautions in this manual. Failure to heed precautions provided in this manual can result in serious or possibly even fatal injury or damage to the products or to related equipment and systems.
!
WARNING
Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury.
!
CAUTION Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or minor
injury, damage to the product, or faulty operation.
The warning symbols for ISO and JIS standards are different, as shown below.
ISO JIS
The ISO symbol is used in this manual.
Both of these symbols appear on warning labels on Yaskawa products. Please abide by these warning labels regardless of which symbol is used.
Yaskawa, 2000
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Yaskawa. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because Yaskawa is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, Yaskawa assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
ii
How to Change the Digital Operator Display from Japanese to English
Visual Aids
The following aids are used to indicate certain types of information for easier reference.
A EXAMPLE "
Indicates application examples.
INFO
Indicates supplemental information.
IMPORTANT Indicates important information that should be memorized.
iii
General Precautions
D
The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to restore covers or shields before operating the Units and run the Units according to the instructions described in this manual.
D
Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only and may not apply to all products to which this manual is applicable.
D
The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the manual may be changed without notice to improve the product and/or the manual.
D
When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office and provide the manual number shown on the front cover.
D
If nameplates become warn or damaged, order new ones from your Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
iv
How to Change the Digital Operator Display from Japanese to English
Safety Precautions
J Confirmations upon Delivery
CAUTION
D Never install an Inverter that is damaged or missing components.
Doing so can result in injury.
Page
NO TAG
J Installation
CAUTION
D Always hold the case when carrying the Inverter.
If the Inverter is held by the front cover, the main body of the Inverter may fall, possibly resulting in injury.
D Attach the Inverter to a metal or other noncombustible material.
Fire can result if the Inverter is attached to a combustible material.
D Install a cooling fan or other cooling device when installing more than one Inverter in the same enclosure so that the temperature of the air entering the Inverters is below
45 _ C.
Overheating can result in fires or other accidents.
Page
NO TAG
NO TAG
NO TAG
J Wiring
WARNING
D Always turn OFF the input power supply before wiring terminals.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
D Wiring must be performed by an authorized person qualified in electrical work.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
D Be sure to ground the ground terminal.
(200 V class: Ground to 100
: or less, 400 V class: Ground to 10
: or less)
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
D Always check the operation of any emergency stop circuits after they are wired.
Otherwise, there is the possibility of injury. (Wiring is the responsibility of the user.)
D Never touch the output terminals directly with your hands or allow the output lines to come into contact with the Inverter case. Never short the output circuits.
Otherwise, electrical shock or grounding can occur.
Page
NO TAG
NO TAG
NO TAG
NO TAG
NO TAG
CAUTION
D Check to be sure that the voltage of the main AC power supply satisfies the rated voltage of the Inverter.
Injury or fire can occur if the voltage is not correct.
D Do not perform voltage withstand tests on the Inverter.
Otherwise, semiconductor elements and other devices can be damaged.
D Connect braking resistors, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units as shown in the
I/O wiring examples.
Otherwise, a fire can occur.
D Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Otherwise, a fire may occur.
D Do not connect AC power to output terminals U, V, and W.
The interior parts of the Inverter will be damaged if voltage is applied to the output terminals.
Page
NO TAG
NO TAG
NO TAG
NO TAG
NO TAG v
CAUTION
D Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits.
The Inverter can be damaged or internal parts burnt if these devices are connected.
D Do not connect electromagnetic switches or contactors to the output circuits.
If a load is connected while the Inverter is operating, surge current will cause the overcurrent protection circuit inside the Inverter to operate.
NO TAG
NO TAG
J Setting User Constants
CAUTION
D Disconnect the load (machine, device) from the motor before autotuning.
The motor may turn, possibly resulting in injury or damage to equipment. Also, motor constants cannot be correctly set with the motor attached to a load.
Page
NO TAG
J Trial Operation
WARNING
D Check to be sure that the front cover is attached before turning ON the power supply.
Do not remove the front cover during operation.
An electric shock may occur.
D Do not come close to the machine when the fault reset function is used. If the alarmed is cleared, the machine may start moving suddenly.
Also, design the machine so that human safety is ensured even when it is restarted.
Injury may occur.
D Provide a separate emergency stop switch; the Digital Operator STOP Key is valid only when its function is set.
Injury may occur.
D Reset alarms only after confirming that the RUN signal is OFF. If an alarm is reset with the RUN signal turned ON, the machine may suddenly start.
Injury may occur.
Page
NO TAG
NO TAG
NO TAG
NO TAG
CAUTION
D Don’t touch the radiation fins (heat sink), braking resistor, or Braking Resistor Unit.
These can become very hot.
Otherwise, a burn injury may occur.
D Be sure that the motor and machine is within the applicable ranges before starting operation.
Otherwise, an injury may occur.
D Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
Otherwise, an injury may occur.
D Don’t check signals while the Inverter is running.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
D Be careful when changing Inverter settings. The Inverter is factory set to suitable settings.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged. You must, however, you must set the power supply voltage jumper for 400 V class Inverters of 18.5 kW or higher (see NO TAG).
Page
NO TAG
NO TAG
NO TAG
NO TAG
NO TAG vi
How to Change the Digital Operator Display from Japanese to English
J Maintenance and Inspection
WARNING
D Do not touch the Inverter terminals. Some of the terminals carry high voltages and are extremely dangerous.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
D Always have the protective cover in place when power is being supplied to the Inverter. When attaching the cover, always turn OFF power to the Inverter through the
MCCB.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
D After turning OFF the main circuit power supply, wait until the CHARGE indicator light goes out before performance maintenance or inspections.
The capacitor will remain charged and is dangerous.
D Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel.
Remove all metal objects, such as watches and rings, before starting work. Always use grounded tools.
Failure to heed these warning can result in electric shock.
Page
NO TAG
NO TAG
NO TAG
NO TAG
CAUTION
D A CMOS IC is used in the control board. Handle the control board and CMOS IC carefully. The CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly.
The CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly .
D Do not change the wiring, or remove connectors or the Digital Operator, during operation.
Doing so can result in personal injury.
Page
NO TAG
NO TAG
J Other
WARNING
D Do not attempt to modify or alter the Inverter.
Doing so can result in electrical shock or injury.
vii
Warning Label Contents and Position
There is a warning label on the Inverter in the position shown in the following illustration. Always heed the warnings given on this label.
626MC5
Warning label position
Illustration shows the CIMR -MC 5A23P7
Warning Label Contents
WARNING
S
S
1
S
May cause injury or electric shock.
S Please follow the instructions in the manual before installation or operation.
S Disconnect all power before opening front cover of unit. Wait 1 minute until DC Bus capacitors discharge.
S Use proper grounding techniques.
viii
How to Change the Digital Operator Display from Japanese to English
How to Change the Digital Operator Display from Japanese to English
Power ON
If the Digital Operator displays messages in Japanese, change to the English mode using the following steps.
(This manual provides descriptions for the English mode.)
MC5
U1--01=0.00 HZ
MENU
MC5
DATA
ENTER
Main Menu
Operation
(Language)
(Japanese)
MENU
DATA
ENTER
A1--00=1
(Japanese)
A1--00=0
English
DATA
ENTER
Entry Accepted
Select language
English ix
Before Reading This Manual
This manual explains both the conventional VS--626MC5 Inverters and the MC5--series Inverters for SPEC: F.
The shaded sections or those specified as being for SPEC: F apply only to MC5--series Inverters for
SPEC: F (Inverters with revised version letters of F or later.)
Be certain to check the specification on the Inverter nameplate.
Example of Inverter Nameplate
Version code
MODEL : CIMR--MC5A20P
4
INPUT : AC 3P
H
OUTPUT : AC 3
PH
SPEC
200-220 V
:
20P41F
50Hz
200-230 V 60Hz
0-230 V
1.2kVA
3.2 A
LOT NO : MASS : 3.0kg
SER NO :
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
JAPAN x
CONTENTS
xi
1
1 Introduction
1
1
2 Handling Inverters
2
1
3 Wiring
3
1
4 Setting User Constants
4
1
5 Trial Operation
5
1
6 Basic Operation
12 Appendix
6
1
7 Advanced Operation
11 Specifications
7
1
8 User Constants
8
1
9 Troubleshooting
9
10 Maintenance and Inspection
10
11
12
Table of Contents
1
2
3
4
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
Outline and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1 VS-626MC5 Inverter Models
1.1.2 Outline of Control Methods
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.3 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1 VS-626MC5 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2 Digital Operator Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling Inverters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1
Confirmations upon Delivery
2.1.1 Nameplate Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1 Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2 Controlling the Ambient Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3 Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4
Installation Orientation and Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and
Front Cover 2 8
2.5.1 Inverters of 15 kW or Less . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.2 Inverters of 18.5 kW or Higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1
Connections to Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2
Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3
Terminal Block Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
3.4.2 Main Circuit Terminal Functions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Main Circuit Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.4 Standard Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5 Wiring the Main Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
3.5.2 Control Circuit Terminal Functions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3 Control Circuit Terminal Connections (All Models)
3.5.4 Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6
Wiring Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7
Installing and Wiring PG Speed Control Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1 Installing a PG Speed Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.2 PG Speed Control Card Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.3 Wiring a PG Speed Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.4 Wiring PG Speed Control Card Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.5 Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting User Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1
Using the Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 8
2 9
3 1
3 3
3 4
3 5
3 6
3 6
3 9
3 10
3 12
3 13
3 20
3 20
3 21
3 22
3 23
3 23
3 24
3 24
3 25
3 26
3 28
3 30
4 1
4 2
2 1
2 2
2 2
2 4
2 6
2 6
2 6
2 6
2 7
1 1
1 2
1 2
1 4
1 4
1 7
1 7
1 8 xii
Table of Contents
5
6
7
4.2
Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1 Inverter Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2 Switching Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3 User Constant Access Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.4 Operation Mode
4.2.5 Initialize Mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.6 Programming Mode
4.2.7 Autotuning Mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.8 Modified Constants Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2
Trial Operation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2 Checking the Display Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.3 Initializing Constants
5.2.4 Setting Input Voltage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.5 Autotuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.6 No-load Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.7 Loaded Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1
Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1 Setting the Access Level and Control Method: A1-01, A1-02
6.1.2 Frequency Reference Settings: b1-01, H3-01, H3-08, H3-09
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.3 Frequency Reference from Digital Operator: b1-01, o1-03, d1-01 to d1-09 . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.4 Run Source and Sequence Input Responsiveness: b1-02, b1-06, b1-07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.5 Acceleration/Deceleration Times: C1-01 through C1-08, C1-09, C1-10, C1-11
6.1.6 Prohibiting Reverse Operation: b1-04
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.7 Selecting the Stopping Method: b1-03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.8 Multi-function Input Settings: H1-01 through H1-06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2
Open-loop Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1 Autotuning for general-purpose motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2 Autotuning for machine tool spindle motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.3 Autotuning Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3
Flux Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.1 PG Speed Control Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.2 Setting the Zero-speed Operation Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.3 Autotuning for general-purpose motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.4 Autotuning for machine tool spindle motors
6.3.5 Autotuning Faults
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.6 Speed Control (ASR) Structure
6.3.7 Speed Control (ASR) Gain
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1
Open-loop Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 Torque Limit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2 Adjusting Speed Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3 Setting/Adjusting Motor Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4 Operation Selection when Output Voltage Saturated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5 Starting Torque Compensation Function (for SPEC: F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2
Flux Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1 Torque Limit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2 Setting/Adjusting Motor Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.3 Operation Selection when Output Voltage Saturated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3
Common Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1 Application Constants: b
7.3.2 Tuning Constants: C
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.3 Reference Constants: d
7.3.4 Option Constants: F
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 1
7 2
7 3
7 5
7 5
7 8
7 9
7 10
7 11
7 12
7 16
7 17
7 18
7 21
7 24
7 26
6 1
6 2
6 2
6 4
6 7
6 9
6 10
6 11
6 12
6 12
6 17
6 17
6 18
6 21
6 22
6 22
6 25
6 27
6 29
6 31
6 32
6 34
4 4
4 4
4 5
4 6
4 11
4 18
4 26
4 29
4 31
5 1
5 3
5 4
5 4
5 4
5 4
5 5
5 6
5 8
5 9 xiii
7.3.5 External Terminal Functions: H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.6 Protective Functions: L
7.3.7 Operator Constants: o
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4
Optional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1 Winding Change Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.2 Wiring for Winding Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.3 Setting/Adjusting the Winding Change Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
User Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1
Initialize Mode Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2
Programming Mode Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1 Application Constants: b
8.2.2 Autotuning Constants: C
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.3 Reference Constants: d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.4 Motor Constant Constants: E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.5 Options Constants: F
8.2.6 Terminal Constants: H
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.7 Protection Constants: L
8.2.8 Operator Constants: o
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.9 Winding Change Constants: P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.10 Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.11 Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1
Protective and Diagnostic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.1 Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.2 Minor Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.3 Operation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.1 If Constant Constants Cannot Be Set
9.2.2 If the Motor Does Not Operate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.3 If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.4 If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.5 If the Motor Does Not Operate According to Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.6 If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.7 If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in Open-loop
Vector Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.8 If Motor Deceleration is Slow
9.2.9 If the Motor Overheats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.10 If There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio
9.2.11 If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.12 If There is Mechanical Oscillation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.13 If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.14 If 0 V is Detected When the Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.15 If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.16 Winding change error has occurred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
Maintenance and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1 Maintenance and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.1 Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.2 Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.3 Periodic Maintenance of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1 Standard Inverter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2 Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1 Inverter Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 1
12 2
7 31
7 48
7 60
7 64
7 64
7 66
7 69
8 1
8 3
8 4
8 4
8 7
8 12
8 14
8 18
8 21
8 26
8 32
8 34
8 35
8 36
9 1
9 2
9 2
9 6
9 8
9 9
9 9
9 9
9 11
9 11
9 11
9 11
9 11
9 12
9 12
9 12
9 13
9 13
9 13
9 13
9 14
9 14
10 1
10 3
10 3
10 3
10 3
11 1
11 2
11 6 xiv
Table of Contents
12.1.1
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.2
Installation
12.1.3
Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.4
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2 Motor Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.1
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor
12.2.2
Using the Inverter for Special Motors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.3
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers,
Belts, and Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3 Peripheral Device Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 2
12 2
12 3
12 3
12 4
12 4
12 5
12 5
12 6
12.4 Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.1 Using a Braking Resistor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.2 Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.
3 Using Two Braking Units in Parallel
12.4.
7 Using Open-collector, Contact Outputs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.
4 Using Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel
12.4.
5 Using a JVOP-95j , -96j VS Operator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.
6 Using an Open-collector Transistor for Operation
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5 User Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 8
12 8
12 8
12 - 11
12 1 2
12 1 3
12 1 4
12 1 4
12 1 5 xv
1
Introduction
1
This chapter provides an overview of the VS-626MC5 Inverter and describes its functions and components.
1.1 Outline and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1 VS626MC 5 Inverter Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.2 Outline of Control Methods
1.1.3 Functions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1 VS626MC 5 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2 Digital Operator Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 2
1 2
1 4
1 4
1 7
1 7
1 8
- 1
1
Introduction
1.1.1 VS-626MC5 Inverter Models
1.1
Outline and Functions
The VS-626 MC5 Inverter is a compact spindle drive specially designed for machine tool application. MC5
Inverter has features such as winding change during operation, and autotuning function for dual winding motors.
The VS-626MC5 Inverters provides full-current vector control based on advanced control logic. An autotuning function is included for easy vector control.
The Digital Operator provides a liquid crystal display that is 2 lines by 16 characters in size. User constant settings and monitor items are easily read in interactive operations in either Japanese or English. (The display language can be changed by setting a user constant.)
Voltage
Class
1.1.1 VS-626MC5 Inverter Models
15
18.5
22
30
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
37
45
55
75
37
45
55
75
15
18.5
22
30
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
Applicable
Motor Output [kW]
VS-626MC5 Inverters are available in 200 and 400 V class models. These are listed in the following table.
A total of 32 models is available for motor capacities of 0.4 to 75 kW.
Table
1.1
VS-626MC5 Inverter Models
Output Capacity [kVA]
VS-626MC5
Model Number
Inverter Specifications
(Specify all required standards when ordering.)
Open Chassis Type
(IEC IP 00)
CIMR-MC5A
Enclosed Wall-mounted
Type
(IEC IP 20, NEMA 1)
CIMR-MC5A
CIMR-MC5A20P4
CIMR-MC5A20P7
CIMR-MC5A21P5
CIMR-MC5A22P2
CIMR-MC5A23P7
CIMR-MC5A25P5
CIMR-MC5A27P5
CIMR-MC5A2011
CIMR-MC5A2015
CIMR-MC5A2018
CIMR-MC5A2022
CIMR-MC5A2030
CIMR-MC5A2037
CIMR-MC5A2045
CIMR-MC5A2055
CIMR-MC5A2075
CIMR-MC5A40P4
CIMR-MC5A40P7
CIMR-MC5A41P5
CIMR-MC5A42P2
CIMR-MC5A43P7
CIMR-MC5A45P5
CIMR-MC5A47P5
CIMR-MC5A4011
CIMR-MC5A4015
CIMR-MC5A4018
CIMR-MC5A4022
CIMR-MC5A4030
CIMR-MC5A4037
CIMR-MC5A4045
CIMR-MC5A4055
CIMR-MC5A4075
37
50
61
73
14
21
26
31
98
130
3.7
4.7
6.1
11
85
110
1.4
2.6
24
30
37
50
61
70
6.7
9.5
13
19
1.2
2.3
3.0
4.2
*
20180 *
20220 *
20300 †
20370 †
20450 †
20550 †
20750 ‡ covers from the models listed at the right.
*
40180 *
40220 *
40300 *
40370 *
40450 *
40550 †
40750 †
20551 ‡
20751 ‡
40P41 *
40P71 *
41P51 *
42P21 *
43P71 *
45P51 *
47P51 *
40111 *
40151 *
40181 ‡
40221 ‡
40301 ‡
40371 ‡
40451 ‡
40551 ‡
40751 ‡
20P41 *
20P71 *
21P51 *
22P21 *
23P71 *
25P51 *
27P51 *
20111 *
20151 *
20181 ‡
20221 ‡
20301 ‡
20371 ‡
20451 ‡
*: Immediate delivery †: Available from factory ‡: Manufactured upon order
- 2
1.1.2 Outline of Control Methods
The VS-626MC5 uses two control methods.
D Open-loop vector control (factory setting)
D Flux vector control
PG stands for pulse generator (encoder).
Vector control is a method for removing interference with magnetic flux and torque, and controlling torque according to references.
Current vector control independently controls magnetic flux current and torque current by simultaneously controlling the motor primary current and phases. This ensures smooth rotation, high torque, and accurate speed/torque control at low speeds.
If the motor constants required for vector control are not known, the motor constants can be automatically set with autotuning.
The control methods are effective for the following applications:
D Open-loop vector control: General variable-speed drive.
D Flux vector control: Simple servodrive, high-precision speed control/torque control.
The control characteristics for each mode are shown in Table 1.2.
Table
1.2
Characteristic
Speed Control
Range
Control Method Characteristics
Vector Control
Open-loop Flux Vector
1:100 1:1000
0.2 % 0.02 % Speed Control
Precision
Initial Drive 150% at 1 Hz 150% at 0 r/min
1.1.3
Functions
J
J
J
Autotuning
Autotuning is effective for vector control. It solves problems in applicable motor restrictions and difficult constant settings. The motor constants are automatically set by entering a value from the motor’s rating nameplate.
Autotuning allows flux vector control to operate accurately with virtually any normal AC induction motor, regardless of the supplier.
Always perform autotuning for motor unit separately before vector control operation.
Frequency References
The following five types of frequency references can be used to control the output frequency of the Inverter.
D
D
D
D
Numeric input from the Digital Operator
Voltage input within a range from 0 to 10 V
Voltage input within a range from 0 to r 10 V (with negative voltages, rotation is in the opposite direction from the run command.)
Current input within a range from 4 to 20 mA
D Input from Option Card
Any of the above frequency references can be used by setting a constant.
A maximum of nine frequency references can be registered with the Inverter. With remote multi-step speed reference inputs, the Inverter can operate in multi-step speed operation with a maximum of nine speed steps.
Low Noise
The output transistor of the Inverter is an IGBT (insulated gate bipolar transistor). Using sine-wave PWM with a high-frequency carrier, the motor does not generate metallic noise.
1
- 3
1
Introduction
1.1.3 Functions
J
J
J
J
Monitor Function
The following items can be monitored with the Digital Operator: Frequency reference, output frequency, output current, motor speed, output voltage reference, main-circuit DC voltage, output power, torque reference, status of input terminals, status of output terminals, operating status, total operating time, software number, speed deviation value, PID feedback value, fault status, fault history, etc.
All types of data can be monitored even with multi-function analog output.
Bilingual Digital Operator
The Digital Operator can display either English or Japanese. The Digital Operator’s liquid crystal display provides a 16-character x 2-line display area.
Easy-to-read displays allow the advanced functions of the Inverter to be set in interactive operations to input constants, monitoring items, etc. Change the constant setting to select the English display.
Harmonic Countermeasures (0.4 to 160 kW Models)
The VS-626MC5 Inverters support DC reactors to easily handle high-frequency control guidelines.
D
D
DC reactors (optional) can be connected to 0.4 to 15 kW models.
Models from 18.5 to 75 kW have a built-in DC reactor.
User Constant Structure and Three Access Levels
The VS-626MC5 has a number of user constants for setting various functions. These user constants are classified into a hierarchy to make them easier to use.
The levels are as follows from top to bottom: Modes, Groups, Functions, and Constants. The access levels for the user constants are shown in Table 1.3.
Table
1.3
Access Levels for User Constants
Level Contents
Mode
Groups
Functions
Constants
Classified according to operation
Operation:
Initialize:
Programming:
Autotuning:
For operating the Inverter. (All kinds of monitoring are possible.)
For selecting the language displayed at the Digital Operator, setting access levels, initialization, and the control modes.
For setting user constants for operation.
Modified constants:
For automatic calculation or setting motor constants. (Only under the vector control mode.)
For referencing or changing user constants after shipping.
Classified by application.
Classified by function. See user constants.
Individual user constant settings.
The VS-626MC5 allows the following three access levels to be set in order to further simplify setting user constants. (An access level is a range of user constants that can be referenced or set.)
Quick-Start
Basic
Advanced
Reads/sets user constants required for trial operation. [Factory setting]
Reads/sets user constants that are commonly used.
Reads/sets all the user constants that can be used.
- 4
MENU
In general, press the DATA/ENTER Key to move from an upper to a lower level. This varies somewhat, however, according to the access level, as shown in Fig. 1.1. For the Quick-Start access level, which has few user constants that can be set, pressing the DATA/ENTER Key jumps directly to the user constant level; whereas for the Advanced access level, which has many user constants, pressing the DATA/ENTER
Key first leads to the Group level.
Operation mode
Initialize mode
Programming mode
DAT
Advanced
Displays group level.
Basic
Displays function level.
Quick-Start
Displays constant level.
1
Application
Tuning
Mode
Reference
Groups
Fig
1.1
Access Level Structure b1 Sequence b1-01 Reference source b1-02 Run source b1-03 Stopping method
Constant to be changed
C1 Accel/Decel
C2 S-curve Acc/Dec
Functions
C1-01 Accel Time 1
C1-02 Decel Time 1
Constants
- 5
1
Introduction
1.2.1 VS-626MC5 Components
1.2
Nomenclature
This section provides the names of VS-626MC5 components, and the components and functions of the Digital
Operator.
1.2.1 VS-626MC5 Components
The appearance of Inverter and the names of its components are shown in Figure 1.2.
Protective cover (top)
Mounting hole
Front cover
626 MC5 Digital Operator
JVOP-130
Die-cast case
Protective cover (bottom)
Fig
1.2
Appearance of VS-626MC5, Model CIMR-MC5A20P4 (200 V, 0.4 kW)
A 200 V Class Inverter with 0.4 kW Output is shown below with the front cover removed.
Control circuit terminals
11 12 ( G ) 13
1 2 3
14
4
15
5
16
6
17
7
25
8
26
21
27
22
33
23
18 19 20
9 10
R
L1
S
L2
Power input
T
L3
© ¨ 1 ¨ 2 B1 B2
Braking Resistor
U
T1
V
T2
Motor output
W/T3
CHARGE
Fig
1.3
Terminal Arrangement
Main circuit terminals
- 6
1.2Nomenclature
1.2.2 Digital Operator Components
This section describes the component names and functions of the Digital Operator. The component names and functions are shown in Figure 1.4 and key functions are described in Table 1.4.
DRIVE FWD REV
SEQ
REMOTE
REF
Frequency Ref
U1--01 = 00.00 H Z
Operation Mode Indicators
DRIVE: Lit when in operation mode.
FWD: Lit when there is a forward reference input.
REV:
SEQ:
Lit when there is a reverse reference input.
Lit when an operation reference from the control circuit terminal is enabled.
REF: Lit when the frequency reference from control circuit terminals 13 and 14 is enabled.
DIGITAL OPERATOR
JVOP-130
Data Display
Two-line LCD that displays data for monitoring, user constants, and set values with 16 characters per line.
1
LOCAL
REMOTE
JOG
FWD
REV
RUN
MENU ESC
DATA
ENTER
RESET
STOP
Keys
Execute operations such as setting user constants, monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.
Fig
1.4
Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
- 7
1
Introduction
1.2.2 Digital Operator Components
FWD
REV
RUN
Table
1.4
Key
LOCAL
REMOTE
MENU
Key Functions
Name
LOCAL/REMOTE Key
MENU Key
Function
Switches between (LOCAL) operation via the Digital Operator and control circuit terminal (REMOTE) operation.
This key can be enabled or disabled by setting a user constant
(o2-01).
Displays menus.
ESC
JOG
FWD
REV
RESET
DAT
ESC Key
JOG Key
FWD/REV Key
RESET Key
Increment Key
Decrement Key
DATA/ENTER Key
Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER Key was pressed.
Enables jog operation when the VS-626MC5 is being operated from the Digital Operator.
Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the
VS-626MC5 is being operated from the Digital Operator.
Sets the number of digits for user constant settings.
Also acts as the reset key when a fault has occurred.
Selects menu items, groups, functions, and user constant names, and increments set values.
Selects menu items, groups, functions, and user constant names, and decrements set values.
Enters menu items, functions, constants, and set values after they are set.
RUN
STOP
RUN Key
STOP Key
Starts the VS-626MC5 operation when the VS-626MC5 is in operation with the Digital Operator.
Stops VS-626MC5 operation.
This key can be enabled or disabled by setting a user constant
(o2-02) when operating from the control circuit terminal.
Note Except in diagrams, keys are referred to using the key names listed in the above table.
RESET
STOP
Inverter output frequency
STOP
Frequency setting
RUN
STOP
RUN
STOP
Lit Blinking Not lit
The RUN and STOP indicators light and blink to indicate operating status.
Fig
1.5
RUN and STOP Indicators
- 8
2
Handling Inverters
2
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving a VS-626MC5
Inverter and describes installation methods.
2.1 Confirmations upon Delivery
2.1.1 Nameplate Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Checking and Controlling the Installation
Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1 Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2 Controlling the Ambient Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3 Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Installation Orientation and Space . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and
Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.1 Inverters of 15 kW or Less . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.2 Inverters of 18.5 kW or Higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 2
2 2
2 4
2 6
2 6
2 6
2 6
2 7
2 8
2 8
2 9
- 1
2
Handling Inverters
2.1.1 Nameplate Information
2.1
Confirmations upon Delivery
CAUTION
D Never install an Inverter that is damaged or missing components.
Doing so can result in injury.
Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered.
Table
2.1
Item
Checks
Has the correct model of Inverter been delivered?
Method
Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter (See
2.1.1).
Is the Inverter damaged in any way?
Are any screws or other components loose?
Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or other damage resulting from shipping.
Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.
If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or your Yaskawa representative immediately.
2.1.1 Nameplate Information
J
Example Nameplate
Standard domestic (Japan) Inverter: 3-phase, 200 VAC, 0.4 kW, IEC IP20 and NEMA 1 standards
Model number
Input specifications
Output specifications
Lot number
Serial number
MODEL : CIMR-MC5A20P
4
INPUT : AC 3P
H
OUTPUT : AC 3
PH
SPEC
200-220 V
:
20P41F
50Hz
200-230 V 60Hz
0-230 V
1.2kVA
3.2 A
LOT NO : MASS : 3.0kg
SER NO :
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
JAPAN
Inverter specifications
Mass
J
Inverter Model Numbers
CIMR - MC5 A 2 0P4
Inverter
VS-626MC5
No.
A
Specification
Standard domestic model
No.
2
4
Voltage Class
AC input, 3-phase, 200 V
AC input, 3-phase, 400 V
No.
0
P4
0
P7 to
0
75
Max. Motor Capacity
0.4 kW
0.75 kW
7 to
5 kW
“P” indicates the decimal point.
- 2
J
Inverter Specifications
No.
2
4
Voltage Class
AC input, 3-phase, 200 V
AC input, 3-phase, 400 V
2 0P4 1 F
Version (Enter the specifications form number when special specifications are required.)
No.
0
P4
0
P7 to
0
75
Max. Motor Capacity
0.4 kW
0.75 kW to
7
5 kW
“P” indicates the decimal point.
No.
0
1
Protective Structure
Open chassis (IEC IP00)
Enclosed wall-mounted (IEC IP20, NEMA 1)
D
D
Open Chassis Type (IEC IP00)
Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the Inverter is mounted in a control panel.
Enclosed Wall-mounted Type (IEC IP20, NEMA 1)
The Inverter is structured so that the Inverter is shielded from the exterior, and can thus be mounted to the interior wall of a standard building (not necessarily enclosed in a control panel). The protective structure conforms to the standards of NEMA 1 in the USA.
2
- 3
2
Handling Inverters
2.2
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
J
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 15 kW and Lower
The following diagram shows a 200 V class, 1.5 kW Inverter.
Remove the top and bottom covers when mounting 200 V/400 V class Inverters of 15 kW or lower in a control panel.
H
H 1
W1
W D
H2
4 d
J
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW and Higher
The following diagram shows a 200 V class, 18.5 kW Inverter.
H H
1
W1
W H2
4 d
D
- 4
age class class
400 V class
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
45
55
75
0.4
18.5
22
30
37
5.5
7.5
11
15
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
Max. Applicable
Motor Output
[kW]
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
30
37
45
55
75
W
140
140
200
250
325
425
475
575
140
140
200
250
325
325
H
280
280
300
380
450
675
800
925
280
280
300
380
450
625
Open Chassis (IP00)
D
160
180
205
225
285
350
350
400
160
180
205
225
285
285
Table
W1
126
126
186
236
275
320
370
445
126
126
186
236
275
275
2.2
H1
266
266
285
365
435
650
775
895
266
266
285
365
435
610
VS-626MC5 External Dimensions (mm) and Approx. Masses (kg)
Enclosed Wall-mounted (NEMA1)
H2
7.0
12 5
12 5
15.0
7.0
7.5
Approx.
Mass
3
5.5
6
61
62
135
4
29
31
44
W
140
140
200
430
480
580
140
140
200
250
330
330
H
280
280
300
380
400
610
675
985
1110
1290
280
280
300
380
610
850
D
160
180
205
225
285
350
350
400
160
180
205
225
285
285
W1 H1
126
126
186
236
275
320
370
445
126
126
186
236
275
275
266
266
285
365
435
650
775
895
266
266
285
365
435
610
H2
7.0
7.5
27.5
87.5
152.5
212 5
212 5
270
7.0
87 5
152.5
Approx.
Mass
Mounting
Holes d *1
Reactor *1
3
5.5
6
67
68
145
4
32
34
48
455 820 350 350 795 12 5
81
82
460 1130 350 350 795 212 5
87
88
* 1. Same for open chsassis and enclosed wall-mounted types.
* 2. See page - 4 for mounting dimensions.
Note An attachment is required to mount the cooling fins (fin section) on the outside of the control panel for 200 V/400 V class
Inverters of 15 kW or less. Please ask your Yaskawa representative for details. Dimensional drawings for models with externally mounted cooling fins and other special requirements are also available from your Yaskawa representative.
M5
M12
M5
M6
Option
Builtin
2
- 5
2
Handling Inverters
2.3.1 Installation Site
2.3
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
CAUTION
D Always hold the case when carrying the Inverter.
If the Inverter is held by the front cover, the main body of the Inverter may fall, possibly resulting in injury.
D Attach the Inverter to a metal or other noncombustible material.
Fire can result if the Inverter is attached to a combustible material.
D Install a cooling fan or other cooling device when installing more than one Inverter in the same enclosure so that the temperature of the air entering the Inverters is below 45 _ C.
Overheating can result in fires or other accidents.
Install the VS-626MC5 in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.
2.3.1 Installation Site
Install the Inverter under the following conditions.
Type
Enclosed wallmounted
Open chassis
Ambient Operating Temperature
--10 to 40 _ C
--10 to 45 _ C
Humidity
90% RH or less (no condensation)
90% RH or less (no condensation)
Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 15 kW or less in a panel.
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Install the Inverter in a clean location free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally enclosed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.
When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.
Do not install the Inverter on combustible material, such as wood.
Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials.
Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.
Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides.
Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight.
2.3.2 Controlling the Ambient Temperature
To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature increases. If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a box, use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45 q
C.
2.3.3 Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter
Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling.
Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation. Otherwise, ventilation will be reduced, causing the Inverter to overheat.
- 6
2.4
Installation Orientation and Space
Install the Inverter on a vertical surface so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Inverter, always provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.
50 mm min.
120 mm min.
Air
2
30 mm min. 30 mm min.
50 mm min.
120 mm min.
Air
( a ) Horizontal Space
Fig
( b ) Vertical Space
2.1
VS-626MC5 Installation Orientation and Space
IMPORTANT S The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both open chassis (IP00) and enclosed wall-mounted (IP20, NEMA 1) Inverters.
S Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 15 kW or less in a panel.
S Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a
200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 30 kW or more in a panel.
- 7
2
Handling Inverters
2.5.1 Inverters of 15 kW or Less
2.5
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and
Front Cover
Remove the front cover to wire the terminals.
For models of 15 kW or less (both 200 V and 400 V class), do not remove or mount the front cover without first removing the Digital Operator; otherwise, the Digital Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
Use the following procedures to remove or attach the front cover.
2.5.1 Inverters of 15 kW or Less
J
Removing the Digital Operator
Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator and lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator as shown in the following illustration.
2
Front cover
Digital
Operator
1
Fig
2.2
Removing the Digital Operator
J
Removing the Front Cover
Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.
Front cover
1
2
1
Fig
2.3
Removing the Front Cover
- 8
J
J
Mounting the Front Cover
After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing in reverse order to the steps to remove the front cover.
1.
Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover; otherwise, Digital
Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2.
Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.
Mounting the Digital Operator
1.
Hook the Digital Operator at A (two locations) on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration.
2.
Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).
Digital
Operator
2
2
1
Front cover
A
2
B
Fig
2.4
Mounting the Digital Operator
NOTE
1.
Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2.
Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover. Imperfect contact can result.
Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator to the front cover.
2.5.2 Inverters of 18.5 kW or Higher
The front cover can be removed without removing the Digital Operator from the Inverter provided that the Inverter has an output of 18.5 kW or higher.
Loosen the four screws of the front cover and move the front cover slightly upwards to remove the front cover.
- 9
3
Wiring
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit terminal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.
3.1 Connections to Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Terminal Block Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed L oop
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 Main Circuit Terminal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Main Circuit Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.4 Standard Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5 Wiring the Main Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2 Control Circuit Terminal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3 Control Circuit Terminal Connections (All Models) . . .
3.5.4 Control Circuit Wiring Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 Wiring Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 Installing and Wiring PG Speed Control
Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1 Installing a PG Speed Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.2 PG Speed Control Card Terminal Blocks
3.7.3 Wiring a PG Speed Control Card
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.4 Wiring PG Speed Control Card Terminal Blocks . . . . .
3.7.5 Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses . . . . . . .
3 3
3 4
3 5
3 6
3 6
3 9
3 10
3 12
3 13
3 - 20
3 - 20
3 2 1
3 2 2
3 2 3
3 2 3
3 2 4
3 2 4
3 2 5
3 26
3 - 28
3 3 0
3
- 1
3
Wiring
WARNING
D Always turn OFF the input power supply before wiring terminals.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
D Wiring must be performed by an authorized person qualified in electrical work.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
D Be sure to ground the ground terminal.
(200 V class: Ground to 100 : or less, 400 V class: Ground to 10 : or less)
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
D Always check the operation of any emergency stop circuits after they are wired.
Otherwise, there is the possibility of injury. (Wiring is the responsibility of the user.)
D Never touch the output terminals directly with your hands or allow the output lines to come into contact with the Inverter case. Never short the output circuits.
Otherwise, electrical shock or grounding can occur.
CAUTION
D Check to be sure that the voltage of the main AC power supply satisfies the rated voltage of the
Inverter.
Injury or fire can occur if the voltage is not correct.
D Do not perform voltage withstand tests on the Inverter.
Otherwise, semiconductor elements and other devices can be damaged.
D Connect braking resistors, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units as shown in the I/O wiring examples.
Otherwise, a fire can occur.
D Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Otherwise, a fire may occur.
D Do not connect AC power to output terminals U, V, and W.
The interior parts of the Inverter will be damaged if voltage is applied to the output terminals.
D Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits.
The Inverter can be damaged or internal parts burnt if these devices are connected.
D Do not connect electromagnetic switches or contactors to the output circuits.
If a load is connected while the Inverter is operating, surge current will cause the overcurrent protection circuit inside the Inverter to operate.
- 2
3.1
Connections to Peripheral Devices
Examples of connections between the VS-626MC5 and typical peripheral devices are shown in Figure 3.1. Use this illustration to gain an understanding of the overall equipment configuration.
Power supply
Molded-case circuit breaker or ground fault interrupter
Magnetic contactor
3
AC reactor for power factor improvement
DC reactor for power factor improvement Input noise filter
VS-626MC5
626 M C5
Magnetic contactor
Ground
Output noise filter
Ground
Fig
3.1
Example Connections to Peripheral Devices
- 3
Motor
3
Wiring
3.2
Connection Diagram
The connection diagram of the VS-626MC5 is shown in Figure 3.2.
When using the Digital Operator, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.
3-phase power
200 to 230 V
50 / 60 Hz
R
S
T
MCCB
DC reactor to improve input power factor (optional)
Short-circuit bar
© ¨ 1 ¨ 2 B1 B2
Braking Resistor Unit (Optional)
R (L1)
S (L2)
T (L3)
VS-626MC5
U ( T1 )
V ( T2 )
W ( T3 )
Motor
I
M
Factorypreset functions
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
External fault
Fault reset
Multi-step speed setting 1
(Master/auxiliary switch)
Multi-step speed setting 2
Jog frequency reference
External baseblock command
External frequency references
2 k
2 k
0 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA P
0 to 10 V
0 V
P
P
Forward run command
(forward when closed)
Reverse run command
(reverse when closed)
3
Analog monitor 2
4
23
Ground to 100 : max.)
5 Multi-function contact inputs
6
21
7 Analog monitor 1
8
11
Sequence common
(Insulated from 0 V terminal)
12 Shield terminal
22
( 12 )
18
15 Frequency setting power
15 V , 20 mA
13 Master speed reference
--10 to 10 V ( 20 k
(Default : 0 to 10 V / 100% )
14 Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA ( 250
16 Multi-function analog input
( --10 to 10 V ( 20 k
17 (Default : Auxiliary frequency reference
0 to 10 V / 100 %)
0 V
33
Frequency setting power :
--15 V , 20 mA
19
20
25
9
10
26
27
--
FM
+ signal)
+
AM
--
Multi-function analog output
--10 to 10 V
Default : Output current
5 V /Inverter rated current)
Default :
Multi-function analog output
--10 to 10 V
Default : Output frequency
0 to
Fault contact output
250 V AC, 1 A max.
30 V DC, 1 A max.
Open collector 1
Open collector 2
Default : Speed agree signal
10 V
Zero speed
/
Multi-function contact output
250 V AC, 1 A max.
30 V DC, 1 A max.
Default : Running signal)
100% frequency
Multi-function open-collector output
48 V , 50 mA max.
Multi-function output common
* Shield
*
P Twisted-pair wires
Fig
3.2
Connection Diagram (Model CIMR -MC5 A27P5 Shown Above)
- 4
NOTE
1.
Control circuit terminals 1 to 33 are not arranged in order of terminal numbers; they are arranged as shown below. Be sure to wire them correctly.
11
1
12(G)
2
13
3
14
4
15
5
16
6
17
7
25
8
26
21
27
22
33
23
18
9
19
10
20
2.
Do not use control circuit terminals 13 and 14 at the same time.
(The two signals will be added inside the Inverter if they are input at the same time.)
3.
The maximum output current capacity of the +15 V/--15 V output from control circuit terminals 15 and
33 is 20 mA.
4.
The multi-function analog output is a dedicated meter output for a frequency meter, ammeter, etc. Do not use this output for feedback control or for any other control purpose.
Use one of the optional Analog Monitor Cards (AO-08 or AO-012) for analog outputs to the control system.
5.
Disable the stall prevention during deceleration (set constant L3-04 to 0) when using a Braking Resistor
Unit. If this user constant is not changed to disable stall prevention, the system may not stop during deceleration.
6.
Set constant L8--01 to 1, 2 or 3 to enable protection for the internal DB resistor (model ERF) when using an internal braking resistor. The braking resistor will not be protected unless this setting is changed to enable protection.
7.
DC reactors to improve the input power factor can be connected as an option only to Inverters for 15 kW or less. Remove the short bar from between ¨ 1 and ¨ 2 when connecting a DC reactor.
8.
There is no DC power supply input terminals for 200 V class Inverters of 30 to 75 kW and 400 V class
Inverters of 55 to 75 kW, and DC power cannot be input to these Inverters.
3.3
Terminal Block Configuration
The terminal block for a 200 V class Inverter with an output of 0.4 kW is shown in Figure 3.3.
3
Control circuit terminals
11 12(G) 13
1 2 3
14
4
15
5
16
6
17
7
25
8
26
21
27
22
33
23
18 19 20
9 10
R
L1
S
L2
Power input
T
L3
© ¨ 1 ¨ 2 B1 B2
Braking resistor
U
T1
V
T2
W/T3
Motor output
CHARGE
Fig
3.3
Terminal Arrangement
Main circuit terminals
- 5
3
Wiring
3.4.1 Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
3.4
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Circuit
3.4.1 Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
VS-626MC5 Model
CIMR-
Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 3.1 to Table 3.3. Refer to instruction manual
TOE-C726-2 j for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units.
Table
3.1
200 V Class Wire Sizes
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
Wire Thickness
(see note) mm 2
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, B1, B2, U, V, W
Wire Type
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, B1, B2, U, V, W
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, B1, B2, U, V, W 2 to 5.5
3.5 to 5.5
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, B1, B2, U, V, W
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, B1, B2, U, V, W
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, B1, B2, U, V, W
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, B1, B2, U, V, W
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, ¨ 3, U, V, W
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, ¨ 3, U, V, W
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, ¨ 3, U, V, W
M8
M6 r ,
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, ¨ 3, U, V, W r ,
R, S, T, U, V, W
© , ¨ 3 r ,
R, S, T, U, V, W
© , ¨ 3 r ,
R, S, T, U, V, W
© , ¨ 3 r ,
R, S, T, U, V, W
© , ¨ 3 r ,
R, S, T, U, V, W
© , ¨ 3
Control
Circuits
All models r ,
1 to 33
Note The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75 q C.
M4
M4
M10
M8
M8
M4
M10
M8
M8
M4
M10
M8
M8
M4
M10
M8
M8
M4
M12
M8
M8
M4
M3.5
22
0.5 to 5.5
100
30
0.5 to 5.5
100 to 200
50
0.5 to 5.5
0.5 to 2
8
5.5 to 8
8
5.5 to 8
22
8
30
8
30
14
0.5 to 5.5
38
14
0.5 to 5.5
38 to 100
22
0.5 to 5.5
38 to 100
22
0.5 to 5.5
60 to 100
Shielded twisted-pair wires
- 6
Circuit
VS-626MC5 Model
CIMR-
Table
3.2
400 V Class Wire Sizes
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, B1, B2, U, V, W
Wire Thickness
(see note) mm
2
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, B1, B2, U, V,W
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, B1, B2, U, V,W
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, B1, B2, U, V,W
2 to 5.5
3.5 to 5.5
Main
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, B1, B2, U, V,W
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, B1, B2, U, V,W
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, B1, B2, U, V, W
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, B1, B2, U, V, W
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, B1, B2, U, V, W
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, ¨ 3, U, V, W r ,
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, ¨ 3, U, V, W r ,
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, ¨ 3, U, V, W
M6
M8
M4
M6
M5
M6
M5
M6
M8
M4 r ,
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, ¨ 3, U, V, W r ,
R, S, T, © , ¨ 1 , ¨ 2, ¨ 3, U, V, W r ,
R, S, T, U, V, W
© , ¨ 3 r , 200, 400
R, S, T, U, V, W
© , ¨ 3 r , 200, 400
Control
Circuits
All models 1 to 33
Note The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75 q C.
M4
M4
M4
M10
M8
M8
M4
M10
M8
M8
M4
M3.5
8 to 14
8
8 to 14
8
14
8
0.5 to 5.5
22
8
0.5 to 5.5
22
8
0.5 to 5.5
30
14
0.5 to 5.5
50
14
0.5 to 5.5
38 to 100
22
0.5 to 5.5
38 to 100
22
0.5 to 5.5
0.5 to 2
Wire Type
Shielded twisted-pair wires
3
- 7
3
Wiring
3.4.1 Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
Table
3.3
Wire Thickness mm 2
Closed-loop Connector Sizes (JIS C 2805) (For 200 V/400 V Classes)
Terminal Screws Size
2
8
30/38
80
100
100
150
200
M5
M6
M8
M5
M5
M6
M8
M4
M6
M8
M3.5
M4
M3.5
M4
M3.5
M4
M3.5
M4
M6
M8
M6
M8
M8
M8
M10
M12
14 to 6
14 to 8
22 to 6
22 to 8
38 to 8
60 to 8
60 to 10
80 to 10
100 to 10
100 to 12
150 to 12
200 to 12
2 to 5
2 to 6
2 to 8
5.5 to 4
5.5 to 5
5.5 to 6
5.5 to 8
8 to 5
8 to 6
8 to 8
1.25 to 3.5
1.25 to 4
1.25 to 3.5
1.25 to 4
1.25 to 3.5
1.25 to 4
2 to 3.5
2 to 4
NOTE
Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage.
Line voltage drop is calculated as follows:
(If there is the possibility of excessive voltage drop, use a larger wire suitable to the required length.)
Line voltage drop (V)
¯
3 x wire resistance ( : /km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10 --3
- 8
3.4.2 Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 3.4 and Table 3.5.
Wire the terminals correctly for the desired purposes.
Table
3.4
Purpose
Main circuit power input
Inverter outputs
DC power input
Braking Resistor Unit connection
DC reactor connection
Braking Unit connection
Cooling fan power input
Cooling fan power input control power input)
200 V Class Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Terminal Symbol
R (L1), S (L2), T (L3)
U (T1), V (T2), W (T3)
¨ 1 -©
Model : CIMR -MC5 A
20P4 to 2075
20P4 to 2075 (all models)
20P4 to 2022
B1, B2
¨ 1 -¨ 2
¨ 3 -© r, r,
20P4 to 27P5
20P4 to 2015
2011 to 2075
2018 to 2022
2030 to 2075
Ground 20P4 to 2075 (all models)
Note Models CIMR-MC5A2030 to 2075 do not support standard DC power input.
Table
3.5
400 V Class Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Purpose Terminal Symbol Model : CIMR -MC5 A
Main circuit power input
Inverter outputs
DC power input
Braking Resistor Unit connection
DC reactor connection
Braking Unit connection
Cooling fan power input
Cooling fan power input
(control power input)
R (L1), S (L2), T (L3)
U (T1), V (T2), W (T3)
¨ 1 -©
B1, B2
¨ 1 -¨ 2
¨ 3 -© r, r -- 200: 200 to 230 VAC input r -- 400: 380 to 460 VAC input
40P4 to 4075
40P4 to 4075 (all models)
40P4 to 4045
40P4 to 4015
40P4 to 4015
4018 to 4075
4018 to 4045
4055 to 4075
Ground 40P4 to 4075 (all models)
Note Models CIMR-MC5A4055 to 4075 do not support standard DC power input.
3
- 9
3
Wiring
3.4.3 Main Circuit Configurations
3.4.3 Main Circuit Configurations
The main circuit configurations are shown in Figure 3.4 and Figure 3.5.
J
200 V Class
CIMR-MC5A20P4 to 21P5 (0.4 to 1.5 kW CIMR-MC5A22P2 to 27P5 (2.2 to 7.5 kW)
B1 B2 B1 B2
(DCL option)
* 2
* 1
¨ 1
¨ 2
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
©
Power supply
(RCC)
Control circuits
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
(DCL option)
* 2
* 1 ¨ 1
¨ 2
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
©
Power supply
(RCC)
Fin cooling fan
Control circuits
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
CIMR-MC5A2011 to 2015 (11, 15 kW)
¨ 3
(DCL option)
* 2
* 1 ¨ 1
¨ 2
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
©
Power supply
(RCC)
Fin cooling fan
Control circuits
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
CIMR-MC5A2018 to 2022 (18.5, 22 kW)
¨ 3
* 1
* 3
¨ 1
¨ 2
R
S
T
© r
Fin cooling fan
Power supply
(RCC)
Internal cooling fan
Control circuits
U
V
W
CIMR-MC5A2030 to 2075 (30 to 75 kW)
¨ 3
* 1
R
S
T
© r
U
V
W
Fin cooling fan
Power supply
(RCC)
Internal cooling fan
Control circuits
*
1 Prewired at the factory.
*
2 Remove the short-circuit bar from between reactor to Inverters of 15 kW or less.
¨ 1 and ¨ 2 when connecting a DC
*
3 Prewired at the factory. When supplying power to the main circuits from the DC power supply, remove the wiring from R-r and S- .
Fig
3.4
200 V Class Inverter Main Circuit Configurations
- 10
J
400 V Class
CIMR-MC5A40P4 to 41P5 0.4 to 1.5 kW
B1 B2
(DCL option)
* 2
* 1 ¨ 1
¨ 2
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
©
Power supply
(RCC)
Control circuits
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
CIMR-MC5A42P2 to 43P7 2.2 3.7 kW
B1 B2
(DCL option)
* 2
* 1
¨ 1
¨ 2
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
©
Power supply
(RCC)
Fin cooling fan
Control circuits
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
CIMR-MC5A45P5 to 4015 5.5 to 15 kW
(DCL option)
* 2
* 1
¨ 1
¨ 2
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
©
Power supply
(RCC)
B1 B2
Fin cooling fan
Control circuits
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
CIMR-MC5A4018 to 4045 18.5 to 45 kW
¨ 3
* 1
* 3
R
S
¨ 1
¨ 2
T
© r
Fin cooling fan Power supply
(RCC)
Control circuits
Internal cooling fan
U
V
W
CIMR-MC5A4055 to 4075 55 75 kW
¨ 3
* 1
R
S
T
© r
200
400
Fin cooling fan
Power supply
(RCC)
Internal cooling fan
Control circuits
U
V
W
*
1 Prewired at the factory.
*
2 Remove the short-circuit bar from between ¨ 1 and ¨ 2 when connecting a DC reactor to Inverters of 15 kW or less.
*
3 Prewired at the factory. When supplying power to the main circuits from the DC power supply, remove the wiring from R-r and S- .
Fig
3.5
400 V Class Inverter Main Circuit Configurations
3
- 11
3
Wiring
3.4.4 Standard Connection Diagrams
3.4.4 Standard Connection Diagrams
CIMR-MC5A20P4 to 27P5, 40P4 to 4015
DC reactor
(optional)
3-phase 200 VAC
(400 VAC)
© ¨ 1 ¨ 2 B1
R
U
B2
V
S
T W
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
IM
CIMR-MC5A2011, 2015
DC reactor
(optional)
¨ 1 ¨ 2 ¨ 3
R
S
T
©
U
V
W
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
IM
3-phase 200 VAC
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting a DC reactor.
CIMR-MC5A2018, 2022, 4018 to 4045
3-phase 200 VAC
(400 VAC)
¨ 1
R
¨ 2 ¨ 3
S
T
©
U
V
W r
*2
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
IM
The DC reactor is built in.
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting a DC reactor.
CIMR-MC5A2030 to 2075
3-phase 200 VAC
R
S
T r *1
*2
¨ 3 ©
U
V
W
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
IM
The DC reactor is built in.
CIMR-MC5A4055 to 4075
3-phase 400 VAC
R
S
T r
200
*1
400 *2
¨ 3 ©
U
V
W
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
IM
The DC reactor is built in.
*
1 Input the control circuit power supply from r-for 200 V class Inverters of 30 to 75 kW (2030 to 2075) and from r- 400 for 400 V class Inverters of 55 to 75 kW (4055 to 4075). (For other models, the control power supply is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply.)
*
2 The r--R, ( 400)-S terminals are short-circuited for shipping.
Remove the short wiring from the 2018, 2022,
4018 to 4045 when supplying power to the main circuits from the DC power supply.
Fig
3.6
Main Circuit Terminal Connections
- 12
3.4.5 Wiring the Main Circuits
This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.
J
Wiring Main Circuit Inputs
Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker
Always connect the power input terminals (R, S, and T) and power supply via a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) suitable for the Inverter.
D
D
D
Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times the Inverter’s rated current.
For the MCCB’s time characteristics, be sure to consider the Inverter’s overload protection (one minute at 150% of the rated output current).
If the same MCCB is to be used for more than one Inverter, or other devices, set up a sequence so that the power supply will be turned OFF by a fault output, as shown in Figure 3.7.
VS-626MC5
200 V class : 3-phase,
200 to 230 VAC,
50/60 Hz
Power supply
400 V class : 3-phase,
380 to 460 VAC,
50/60 Hz
MCCB MC
R
S
T
MC
19
OFF
ON
SA
Fault output
(NC)
20
MC
*
For 400 V class Inverters, connect a 400/200 V transformer.
Fig
3.7
MCCB Installation
Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter
Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. Therefore, at the Inverter primary side, use a ground fault interrupter that detects only the leakage current in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans and excludes high-frequency leakage current.
D
D
For the special-purpose ground fault interrupter for Inverters, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amperage of at least 30 mA per Inverter.
When using a general ground fault interrupter, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amperage of 200 mA or more per Inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.
Installing a Magnetic Contactor
If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off during a sequence, a magnetic contactor can be used instead of a molded-case circuit breaker.
When a magnetic contactor is installed on the primary side of the main circuit to forcibly stop the Inverter, however, the regenerative braking does not work and the Inverter will coast to a stop.
D
D
D
The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side. Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down.
When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after recovery from a power interruption.
If the Braking Resistor Unit is used, program the sequence so that the magnetic contactor is turned OFF by the contact of the Unit’s thermal overload relay.
Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block
Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R, S or T on the terminal block; the phase sequence of input power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence.
Installing an AC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or the phase advancing capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the converter unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reactor connection terminals.
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.
3
- 13
3
Wiring
3.4.5 Wiring the Main Circuits
Installing a Surge Absorber
Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include magnetic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.
Wiring the Power Terminals of Inverters with 18.5 to 75 kW Outputs
D
D
For 200 V class Inverters of 18.5 to 75 kW or 400 V class Inverters of 18.5 to 45 kW, connect the r and terminals to the R and S terminals respectively. (These are shorted by a short-circuit bar for shipping.)
For 400 V class, 55, 75 kW, connect the r and 400 terminals to the R and S terminals respectively.
(These are shorted by a short-circuit bar for shipping.)
Installing a Noise Filter on Power Supply Side
Install a noise filter to eliminate noise transmitted between the power line and the Inverter.
D Wiring Example 1
Power supply
MCCB
Noise filter
VS-626MC 5 IM
MCCB
Other controllers
Use a special-purpose noise filter for Inverters.
Fig
3.8
Correct Power supply Noise Filter Installation
D Wiring Example 2
Power supply
MCCB
VS-626MC 5
MCCB
Generalpurpose noise filter
Other controllers
IM
Power supply
MCCB
Generalpurpose noise filter
VS-626MC 5 IM
MCCB
Other controllers
Do not use general-purpose noise filters. No general-purpose noise filter can effectively suppress noise generated from the Inverter.
Fig
3.9
Incorrect Power supply Noise Filter Installation
- 14
J
Wiring on the Output Side of Main Circuit
Connecting the Inverter and Motor
Connect output terminals U, V, and W to motor lead wires U, V, and W, respectively.
Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward run command. Switch over any two of the output terminals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward run command.
Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals
Never connect a power supply to output terminals U, V, and W. If voltage is applied to the output terminals, the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.
Never Short or Ground Output Terminals
If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter casing, an electric shock or grounding will occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.
Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter
Never to connect a phase advancing capacitor or LC/RC noise filter to an output circuit. Doing so may result in damage to the Inverter or cause other parts to burn.
Do Not Use an Electromagnetic Switch or Magnetic Contactor
Do not connect an electromagnetic switch or magnetic contactor to an output circuit. If a load is connected to the Inverter during operation, a surge current will actuate the overcurrent protective circuit in the Inverter.
Installing a Thermal Overload Relay
This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If, however, more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or a multi-polar motor is used, always install a thermal relay (THR) between the Inverter and the motor and set L1-01 to 0 (no motor protection).
Set the thermal overload relay to the value on the motor nameplate when operating at 50 Hz and to 1.1 times the value on the nameplate when operating at 60 Hz. The sequence should be designed so that the contacts of the thermal overload relay turn OFF the magnetic contactor on the main circuit inputs.
Installing a Noise Filter on Output Side
Connect a noise filter to the output side of the Inverter to reduce radio noise and inductive noise.
Power supply
MCCB
VS-626MC 5
Noise filter
IM
Radio noise
AM radio
Signal line
Inductive noise
Controller
Inductive Noise: Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line, causing the controller to malfunction.
Radio Noise: Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and cables cause the broadcasting radio receiver to make noise.
Fig
3.10
Installing a Noise Filter on the Output Side
Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise
As described previously, a noise filter can be used to prevent inductive noise from being generated on the output side. Alternatively, cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe to prevent inductive noise.
Keeping the metal pipe at least 30 cm away from the signal line considerably reduces inductive noise.
Power supply
MCCB
Metal pipe
VS-626MC 5 IM
Fig
3.11
30 cm min.
Signal line
Controller
Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise
3
- 15
3
Wiring
3.4.5 Wiring the Main Circuits
Countermeasures Against Radio Interference
Radio noise is generated from the Inverter as well as from the input and output lines. To reduce radio noise, install noise filters on both input and output sides, and also install the Inverter in a totally enclosed steel box.
The cable between the Inverter and the motor should be as short as possible.
Steel box
Power supply
MCCB
Metal pipe
Noise filter
VS-626MC 5
Noise filter IM
Fig
3.12
Countermeasures Against Radio Interference
Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
If the cable between the Inverter and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, causing the Inverter output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, adjust the carrier frequency (set in C6-01) as shown in Table 3.6. (For details, refer to the user constant settings.)
Table
3.6
Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
Cable length 50 m max.
100 m max.
More than 100 m
Carrier frequency
(Set value : C6-01)
15 kHz max.
(15.0)
10 kHz max.
(10.0)
5 kHz max.
(5.0)
J
Ground Wiring
D
D
D
D
Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 : and that of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10
:
.
Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.
Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.
When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.
OK
OK
NO!
Fig
3.13
Ground Wiring
- 16
J
Connecting the Braking Resistor (ERF)
Connect the braking resistor as shown in Figure 3.14. When using a Braking Resistor Unit.
L8--01
Protect selection for internal DB resistor
(Type ERF)
0: Disabled (no overheating protection)
1: Enabled (overheating protection)
L3--04
Stall prevention selection during decel
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If deceleration time is too short, a main cir-cuit overvoltage may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is stopped when the main circuit voltage exceeds the overvoltage level. Deceleration restarts when voltage is returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration mode (Deceleration rate is automatically adjusted so that in Inverter can decelerate in the shortest possible time. Set deceleration time is desregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking Resistor Unit)
When a braking option (Braking Resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, Braking
Unit) is used, always set to 0 or 3.
B1
VS-626MC5
B2
Braking resistor
The braking resistor connection terminals are
B1 and B2. Do not connect to any other terminals. Connecting to any terminals other than
B1 or B2 can cause the resistor to overheat, resulting in damage to the equipment.
Connecting the Braking Resistor
Fig
3.14
J
Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit (LKEB) and Braking Unit (CDBR)
Connect the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit to the Inverter as shown in the Figure 3.15. Using the Inverter with the Braking Resistor Unit connected.
L8--01
Protect selection for internal DB resistor
(Type ERF)
0: Disabled (no overheating protection)
1: Enabled (overheating protection)
L3--04
Stall prevention selection during decel
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If deceleration time is too short, a main cir-cuit overvoltage may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is stopped when the main circuit voltage exceeds the overvoltage level. Deceleration restarts when voltage is returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration mode (Deceleration rate is automatically adjusted so that in Inverter can decelerate in the shortest possible time. Set deceleration time is desregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking Resistor Unit)
When a braking option (Braking Resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, Braking
Unit) is used, always set to 0 or 3.
Set L8-01 to “1” before operating the Inverter with the braking resistor without thermal overload relay trip contacts.
The Braking Resistor Unit cannot be used and the deceleration time cannot be shortened by the Inverter if L3-04 is set to “1” (i.e., if stall prevention is enabled for deceleration).
To prevent the Unit from overheating, design the sequence to turn OFF the power supply for the thermal overload relay trip contacts of the Unit as shown in Figure 3.15.
200 V Class Inverters with 3.7 to 7.5 kW Output and
400 V Class Inverters with 3.7 to 15 kW Output
LKEB Braking Resistor Unit
B1 P 1
VS-626MC5
B2 B 2
Thermal overload relay trip contact
3
- 17
3
Wiring
3.4.5 Wiring the Main Circuits
200 V Class Inverters with 11 kW or higher Output and
400 V Class Inverters with 18.5 or higher Output
CDBR Braking
Unit
VS-626MC5
¨ 3
©
¨
©
¨
0
©
0
P
LKEB Braking Resistor Unit
1
B
2
Thermal protector trip contact
Fig
3.15
3 4
Thermal overload relay trip contact
Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit
Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel, use the wiring and connectors shown in Figure
3.16. There are connectors for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a Master or Slave. Select “Master” for the first Braking Unit only, and select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e., from the second
Unit onwards).
¨ 3 ©
VS-626MC5
1
2
© ¨
Braking resistor overheating contacts (Thermal protector contacts)
1 2
Braking
Resistor
P B
¨ 0 © 0
Unit
©
MASTER
¨
Braking resistor overheating contacts (Thermal protector contacts)
1 2
Braking
Resistor
P B
¨ 0 © 0
Unit
©
MASTER
¨
Braking resistor overheating contacts (Thermal protector contacts)
1 2
Braking
Resistor
P B
¨ 0 © 0
Unit
MASTER
SLAVE
Level detector
SLAVE
+15
5
6
1
P
2
Braking Unit #2
SLAVE
5
6
1
P
2
Braking Unit # 3
5
6
Braking Unit #1
3 4
Cooling fin overheating contacts (thermoswitch contacts)
Fig
3.16
3 4
Cooling fin overheating contacts (thermoswitch contacts)
Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
3 4
Cooling fin overheating contacts (thermoswitch contacts)
- 18
Power Supply Sequence
MCCB
Three-phase power :
200 to 230 V, 50/60 Hz or
380 to 460 V, 50/60 Hz
R
S
T
*
400/200 V
MC THRX OFF ON
MC
Overload relay trip contact of Braking Resistor Unit
SA
THRX
1 2
MC
SA
TRX
MC
R (L1)
S (L2)
T (L3)
VS-626MC5
Fig
3.17
SA
TRX
20 18
*
Fault contacts
Use a transformer with 200 and 400 V outputs for the power supply of the
400 V Inverter.
Power Supply Sequence
3
- 19
3
Wiring
3.5.1 Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
3.5
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
A control signal line must not be longer than 50 m and must be separated from power lines.
The frequency reference must be input to the Inverter through twisted-pair wires.
3.5.1 Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 3.7.
Table
3.7
Terminals
Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Models)
Terminal
Screws
Wire Thickness
[mm
2
]
Wire Type
1 to 11 13 to 33
12 (G)
M3.5
M3.5
Stranded wire: 0.5 to
1.25
Single wire: 0.5 to 1.25
0.5 to 2
S Shielded, twisted-pair wire
S Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable
The closed-loop connectors and tightening torques for various wire sizes are shown in Table 3.8.
Table
3.8
Wire Thickness
[mm 2 ]
Closed-loop Connectors for Ground Terminal
Terminal
Screws
Crimp Size Tightening Torque (N m
0.5
0.75
1.25
2
1.25 to 3.5
1.25 to 3.5
1.25 to 3.5
2 to 3.5
- 20
3.5.2 Control Circuit Terminal Functions
Type
Sequence signals input g
16
17
12
8
11
15
3
4
5
No.
1
2
6
7
33
13
14
The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 3.9. Use the appropriate terminals for the correct purposes.
Table
3.9
Signal Name
Forward run/stop command
Reverse run/stop command
External fault input
Fault reset
Multi-step speed reference 1
(Master/auxiliary switch)
Multi-step speed reference 2
Jog frequency reference
External baseblock
Sequence input common
Control Circuit Terminals
Function
Forward run when CLOSED; stopped when OPEN.
Reverse run when CLOSED; stopped when OPEN.
Fault when CLOSED; normal when OPEN.
Reset when CLOSED
Auxiliary frequency reference when CLOSED.
Multi-step setting 2 when
CLOSED.
Jog run when CLOSED.
Inverter output stopped when
CLOSED.
Multi-function contact inputs
Command signals can be selected by setting H1-01 to
Signal Level
24 VDC, 8 mA
15 V power output
--15 V power output
15 V power supply for analog references
--15 V power supply for analog references
15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
--15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
--10 to 10 V (20 k ),
0 to 10 V (20 k ) ence
Multi-function analog input
Control common
Shield wire, optional ground line connection point
--10 to 10 V/--100% to 100%
0 to 10 V/100%
4 to 20 mA/100%, --10 to +10 V/--100% to 100%
0 to +10 V/100%
--10 to 10 V/--100% to 100%
0 to 10 V/100%
Auxiliary analog input
(H3-05)
4 to 20 mA (250 )
--10 to 10 V (20 k ),
0 to 10 V (20 k )
Dry contacts
9
10
1 A max. at 250 VAC
1 A max. at 30 VDC
Seoutput signals
25 Zero speed detection
Speed agree detection
Open-collector output common
Zero level (b2-01) or below when CLOSED
Within r 2 Hz of set frequency when CLOSED.
M lti f ti t t
50 mA max. at 48 V* l
26
27
18
19
20
21
22
23
Fault output signal (SPDT)
Frequency output
Common
Current monitor
)
F lt h CLOSED
0 to 10 V/100% frequency
5 V/Inverter’s rated current
18 d 20
Fault when OPEN across 19 and 20
C t t it
1 A max. at 250 VAC
1 A max. at 30 VDC
Multi-function analog monitor 1
(H4-01, H4-02)
Multi-function analog monitor 2
(H4-04,H4-05)
0 t 10 V 5%
* When driving an L load, such as a relay coil, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Figure 3.18.
Flywheel diode
External power :
48 V max.
Coil
50 mA max.
The rating of the flywheel diode must be at least as high as the circuit voltage.
Fig
3.18
Flywheel Diode Connection
11
1
12(G)
2
13
3
14
Fig
3.19
4
15
5
16
6
17
7
25
8
26
21
27
22
33
23
Control Circuit Terminal Arrangement
18
9
19
10
20
3
- 21
3
Wiring
3.5.3 Control Circuit Terminal Connections (All Models)
3.5.3 Control Circuit Terminal Connections (All Models)
Connections to VS-626MC5 control circuit terminals are shown in Figure 3.20.
Forward run/stop
Reverse run/stop
Multi-function contact input 1
Multi-function contact input 2
Multi-function contact input 3
Multi-function contact input 4
Multi-function contact input 5
Multi-function contact input 6
Sequence input common
Frequency reference power supply +15 V
Frequency reference power supply --15 V
Frequency reference input (voltage)
Frequency reference input (current)
Multi-function analog input
Frequency reference input common
1
2
12 (G)
15
33
13
14
3 (External fault)
4 (Fault reset)
5 (Multi-step speed reference 1)
6 (Multi-step speed reference 2)
7 (Jog frequency reference)
8 (External baseblock)
11
16 (Auxiliary frequency reference)
17
18
Fault output (NO)
19
Fault output (NC)
20
Fault output common
23
22
9
10
Multi-function contact output
(Running signal)
Multi-function contact output common
25
Multi-function output 1
Zero speed signal)
26
27
Multi-function output 2
(Speed agree signal)
Multi-function output common
21
FM
Multi-function analog output 1
Voltmeter
(Output frequency)
Multi-function analog output 2
AM Voltmeter (Output current
Multi-function analog output common
Factory presets are shown in parentheses.
When driving an L load, such as a relay coil, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Figure 3.18.
Fig
3.20
Control Circuit Terminal Connections
- 22
3.6Wiring Check
3.5.4 Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
D
D
D
D
D
Separate control circuit wiring (terminals 1 to 33) from main circuit wiring (terminals R, S, T, B1, B2,
U, V, W, © , ¨ 1, ¨ 2, and ¨ 3) and other high-power lines.
Separate wiring for control circuit terminals 9, 10, 18, 19, and 20 (contact outputs) from wiring for terminals 1 to 8, 21, 22, 23, 25, 26, 27, 33 and 11 to 17.
Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults. Process cable ends as shown in Figure 3.21.
Connect the shield wire to terminal 12(G).
Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.
Shield sheath
Armor
Do not connect here.
Connect to shield sheath terminal at VS-626MC5
(terminal 12 )
Fig
3.21
Insulate with tape
Processing the Ends of Twisted-pair Cables
3.6
Wiring Check
Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform a buzzer check on control circuits.
D
D
D
D
Is all wiring correct?
Have any wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left?
Are all screws tight?
Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?
3
- 23
3
Wiring
3.7.1 Installing a PG Speed Control Card
3.7
Installing and Wiring PG Speed Control Cards
PG Speed Control Cards are used for executing speed control using a pulse generator (PG). There are four types of PG speed control, as shown below. Select the type that fits the application and control method.
PG-B2
PG-X2
A/B-phase pulse input for open collector output or complementary outputs, for vector control
A/B/Z-phase pulse input for line driver input, for vector control
3.7.1 Installing a PG Speed Control Card
Use the following procedure to install a PG Speed Control Card.
1.
Turn off the main-circuit power supply.
2.
Leave it off for at least one minute before removing the front cover of the Inverter (or at least three minutes for Inverters of 30 kW or more). Check to be sure that the CHARGE indicator is OFF.
3.
Insert the spacer (which is provided) into the spacer hole in the Inverter’s mounting base.
For Inverters of 3.7 kW or lower, there are two adjacent holes. Insert the spacer into the 7CN hole. The spacer cannot be easily removed if inserted into the wrong hole. Be very careful to insert the spacer into the correct hole, and in the proper direction.
4.
Referring to the enlarged illustration in the following diagram, align the PG Speed Control Card with the catch position as shown by (a) and (b) and fit it precisely to the Option-A connector. Insert at (a) first.
5.
Pass the spacer through the spacer hole at the Card. (Refer to A in the illustration.) Check to be sure that it is precisely aligned with the 4CN position, and snap it into the proper position. Be sure to press it in firmly until you hear it snap into place.
PG Speed Control Card Spacer mounting hole
Option A Top
Option A mounting spacer
(Accessory : SRNT41028-9)
Inverter mounting base
4CN
Option-A
Connector
7CN
Option C
2CN
Option-C
Connector
Inverter mounting base
Spacer mounting hole
Control board
PG Speed
Control
Card
Mounting base side
Control board
Spacer
3CN
Option-D
Connector
Option D
Option A side
Spacer mounting
( b )
Connection terminals
( a )
Bottom
Ground terminal 12
Fig
3.22
Enlargement
[Front] Side
Installing a PG Speed Control Card
- 24
3.7.2 PG Speed Control Card Terminal Blocks
The terminal specifications for each PG Speed Control Card are given in the following tables.
J
PG-B2 (For Flux Vector Control Mode Only)
Table
3.10
Terminal No.
TA3
1
2
3
4
5
2
3
6
1
4
(E)
PG-B2 Terminal Specifications
Contents
A-phase pulse input terminal
B-phase pulse input terminal
Specifications
12 VDC ( r 5%), 200 mA max.
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
H: +8 to 12 V
L: +1 V max.
(Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
Pulse input common
H: +8 to 12 V
L: +1 V max.
(Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
Pulse input common
Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
A-phase monitor output common
Shield connection terminal
Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
B-phase monitor output common
J
PG-X2 (For Flux Vector Control Mode Only)
Table
3.11
Terminal No.
TA2
TA3
5
6
7
(E)
3
4
1
2
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
PG-X2 Terminal Specifications
Contents Specifications
12 VDC ( r 5%), 200 mA max. (see note)
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
5 VDC ( r 5%), 200 mA max. (see note)
A-phase + input terminal
A-phase -- input terminal
B-phase + input terminal
B-phase -- input terminal
Z-phase + input terminal
Line driver input (RS-422 level input)
Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz
Z-phase -- input terminal
Common terminal
A-phase + output terminal
A-phase -- output terminal
B-phase + output terminal
B-phase -- output terminal
Z-phase + output terminal
Z-phase -- output terminal
Control circuit common
Shield connection terminal
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
Control circuit GND
Note 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.
3
- 25
3
Wiring
3.7.3 Wiring a PG Speed Control Card
3.7.3 Wiring a PG Speed Control Card
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG Speed Control Cards.
J
PG-B2 (For Flux Vector Control Mode Only)
Three-phase 200 VAC
(400 VAC)
VS-626MC5
R
S
T
U
V
W
IM
PG-B2
4CN 4CN
TA1 1
2
3
4
5
6
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
A-phase pulse output (+)
A-phase pulse output (--)
B-phase pulse output (+)
B-phase pulse output (--)
PG
12
E
TA2
TA3 (E)
1
2
3
4
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output
D Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
D Do not use the pulse generator’s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder). Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
D The length of the pulse generator’s wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
D The direction of rotation of the PC can be set in user constant F1-05. The factory preset if for forward rotation, A-phase advancement.
Fig
3.23
PG-B2 Wiring
PG power supply +12 V
I/O Circuit Configuration
TA1
1
+ 12 V
2
3
150
0 V
180
A-phase pulse input
4
5
150
150
180
180
470
B-phase pulse input
6
470
150 180
Division rate circuit
A-phase pulses
B-phase pulses
1
TA2
2
3
4
D When connecting to a voltage-output-type PG (encoder), select a PG that has an output impedance with a current of at least 12 mA to the input circuit photocoupler (diode).
Fig
3.24
I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-B2
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output
A-phase pulses
B-phase pulses
- 26
Three-phase 200 VAC
(400 VAC)
J
PG-X2 (For Flux Vector Control Mode Only)
VS-626MC5
R
S
T
U
V
W
IM
4CN
12
E
4CN
PG-X2
TA1
3
4
1
2
5
9
10
6
7
8
TA2
TA3 (E)
3
4
5
1
2
6
7
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
Power supply +5 V
A-phase pulse input (+)
A-phase pulse input (--)
B-phase pulse input (+)
B-phase pulse input (--)
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output
Z-phase pulse monitor output
D Shielded, twisted-pair wire must be used for signal lines.
D Do not use the pulse generator’s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder). Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
D The length of the pulse generator’s wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
D The direction of rotation of the PC can be set in user constant F1-05. The factory preset if for forward rotation, A-phase advancement.
Fig
3.25
PG-X2 Wiring
PG
3
- 27
3
Wiring
3.7.4 Wiring PG Speed Control Card Terminal Blocks
3.7.4 Wiring PG Speed Control Card Terminal Blocks
Use no more than 100 meters of wiring for PG (encoder) signal lines, and keep them separate from power lines.
Use shielded, twisted-pair wires for pulse inputs and pulse output monitor wires, and connect the shield to the shield connection terminal.
J
Wire Sizes (Same for All Models)
Terminal wire sizes are shown in Table 3.12.
Table
3.12
Wire Sizes
Terminal
Terminal
Screws
Pulse generator power supply
Pulse input terminal
Pulse monitor output terminal
Shield connection terminal M3.5
Wire Thickness mm 2
Stranded wire: 0.5 to
1.25
Single wire: 0.5 to 1.25
0.5 to 2
Wire Type
S Shielded, twisted-pair wire
S Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable
J
Solderless Terminals for Control Circuit Terminals
The use of solderless terminals for the control circuit terminals is recommended because solderless terminals are easy to connect securely.
Table
3.13
Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Model d1 d2 Manufacturer Wire Thickness
0.5 mm 2
0.75mm
2
1 mm 2
1.5 mm 2
A1 0.5-8 WH
A1 0.75-8 GY
A1 1-8 RD
A1 1.5-8 BK
1.00
1.20
1.40
1.70
2.60
2.80
3.00
3.50
d1
8 mm
14 mm
Fig
3.26
d2
Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
NOTE
Do not solder wires with the control circuit terminals if wires are used instead of solderless terminals.
Wires may not contact well with the control circuit terminals or the wires may be disconnected from the control circuit terminals due to oscillation if the wires are soldered.
- 28
J
Closed-loop Connector Sizes and Tightening Torque
The closed-loop connectors and tightening torques for various wire sizes are shown in Table 3.14.
Table
3.14
Closed-loop Connectors and Tightening Torques
Wire Thickness [mm 2 ]
Terminal
Screws
Crimp Terminal Size Tightening Torque (N m)
0.5
0.75
1.25
2
1.25 to 3.5
1.25 to 3.5
1.25 to 3.5
2 to 3.5
J
Wiring Method
Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.
1.
Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.
2.
Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3.
Tighten the terminal screws firmly.
Thin-slot screwdriver Blade of screwdriver
Control circuit terminal block
Strip the end for
5.5 mm if no solderless terminal is used.
Wires
Fig
3.27
Solderless terminal or wire without soldering
Connecting Wires to Terminal Block
3.5 mm max.
Blade thickness : 0.6 mm max.
NOTE
Wiring Precautions
1.
Separate PG Speed Control Card control circuit wiring (terminals TA1 and TA2) from main circuit wiring and other high-power lines.
2.
Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables to connect the PG to prevent operating faults. Process cable ends as shown in Figure 3.28. The maximum cable length is 100 m.
Shield sheath Armor
3
Do not connect here.
Connect to terminal
TA3 on the
VS-626MC5.
Insulate with tape.
Fig
3.28
Processing the Ends of Twisted-pair Cables
3.
5.
Connect the shield to the ground terminal.
4.
Do not solder the wires to the control circuit terminals. The wires may not contact well with the control circuit terminals if the wires are soldered.
The end of each wire connected to the control circuit terminals must be stripped for approximately
5.5 mm.
- 29
3
Wiring
3.7.5 Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses
3.7.5 Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses
J
PG-B2
The maximum response frequency is 32,767 Hz.
Use a PG that outputs a maximum frequency of approximately 20 kHz for the rotational speed of the motor.
Motor speed at maximum frequency output (
r
min
)
60
PG
rating (
p
rev
)
20, 000 Hz
Some examples of PG output frequency (number of pulses) for the maximum frequency output are shown in Table 3.15.
Table
3.15
PG Pulse Selection Examples
Motor’s Maximum Speed r/min
1800
1500
1200
900
PG Rating p/rev
600
800
1000
1200
PG Output Frequency for Maximum
Frequency Output Hz
18,000
20,000
20,000
18,000
Note 1.The motor speed at maximum frequency output is expressed as the sync rotation speed.
2. The PG power supply is 12 V.
3. A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than
200 mA. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a backup capacitor or other method.)
PG power supply
Capacitor for power momentary power loss
Signals
Fig
3.29
PG-B2 Connection Example
J
PG-X2
Both 12V and 15V are available as PG power supply. Verify the PG power supply specifications before connection.
The maximum response frequency is 300 kHz.
Use the following equation to computer the output frequency of the PG (fPG).
f
PG
(
Hz
)
Motor speed at maximum frequency output (
60 r
min
)
PG
rating (
p
rev
)
A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200 mA. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a backup capacitor or other method
.)
PG power
0 V 12V
Capacitor for momentary power loss
Fig
3.30
PG-X2 Connection Example
- 30
4
Setting User Constants
This chapter describes setting user constants using the Digital Operator.
4.1 Using the Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1 Inverter Modes
4.2.2 Switching Modes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3 User Constant Access Levels
4.2.4 Operation Mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.5 Initialize Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.6 Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.7 Autotuning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.8 Modified Constants Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 2
4 4
4 4
4 5
4 6
4 11
4 18
4 2 6
4 29
4 31
4
- 1
4
Setting User Constants
4.1
Using the Digital Operator
This section describes the component names and functions of the Digital Operator. The component names and functions are shown in Figure 4.1 and Key functions are described in Table 4.1.
DRIVE FWD REV
SEQ
REMOTE
REF
Frequency Ref
U1--01 = 00.00 H Z
Operation Mode Indicators
DRIVE: Lit when in operation mode.
FWD: Lit when there is a forward run command input.
REV:
SEQ:
Lit when there is a reverse run command input.
Lit when the run command from the control cir-
REF: cuit terminal is enabled.
Lit when the frequency reference from control circuit terminals 13 and 14 is enabled.
DIGITAL OPERATOR
JVOP-130
Data Display
Two-line LCD that displays data for monitoring, user constants, and set values with 16 characters per line.
LOCAL
REMOTE
JOG
FWD
REV
RUN
MENU ESC
DATA
ENTER
RESET
STOP
Keys
Execute operations such as setting user constants, monitoring, JOG, and autotuning.
Fig
4.1
Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
- 2
FWD
REV
RUN
Table
4.1
Key
LOCAL
REMOTE
MENU
Key Functions
Name
LOCAL/REMOTE Key
MENU Key
Function
Switches between operation (LOCAL) via the Digital Operator and control circuit terminal (REMOTE) operation.
This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting a user constant
(o2-01).
Displays menus.
ESC
JOG
FWD
REV
RESET
DAT
ESC Key
JOG Key
FWD/REV Key
RESET Key
Increment Key
Decrement Key
DATA/ENTER Key
Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER Key was pressed.
Enables jog operation when the VS-626MC5 is being operated from the Digital Operator.
Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the
VS-626MC5 is being operated from the Digital Operator.
Sets the number of digits for user constant settings.
Also acts as the reset Key when a fault has occurred.
Selects menu items, groups, functions, and user constant names, and increments set values.
Selects menu items, groups, functions, and user constant names, and decrements set values.
Enters menu items, functions, constants, and set values after they are set.
RUN
STOP
RUN Key
STOP Key
Starts the VS-626MC5 operation when the VS-626MC5 is in operation with the Digital Operator.
Stops VS-626MC5 operation.
This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting a user constant
(o2-02) when operating from the control circuit terminal.
Note Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to using the Key names listed in the above table.
RESET
STOP
Inverter output frequency
STOP
Frequency setting
RUN
ST OP
RUN
STOP
Lit Blinking Not lit
The RUN and STOP indicators light and blink to indicate operating status.
Fig
4.2
RUN and STOP Indicators
4
- 3
4
Setting User Constants
4.2.1 Inverter Modes
4.2
Modes
This section describes the VS-626MC5’s monitor modes, switching between modes, and accessing/setting user constants.
4.2.1 Inverter Modes
The VS-626MC5 Inverter’s user constants and monitoring functions have been organized in groups called modes that make it easier to read and set user constants.
The VS-626MC5 is equipped with 5 modes, as shown in the Table 4.2.
Table
4.2
Mode
Operation mode
Initialize mode
Programming mode
Autotuning mode
Modified constants mode (See note)
Modes
Primary function(s)
The Inverter can be run in this mode.
Use this mode when monitoring values such as frequency references or output current, displaying fault information, or displaying the fault history.
Use this mode when selecting the language displayed on the Digital Operator, selecting the access level for reading/setting user constants, selecting the control mode, or initializing the user constants.
Use this mode when reading/setting the user constants required for operation.
The program-mode functions are subdivided into the following groups:
S Application: Operation mode selection, DC control, speed search, etc.
S Tuning: Acceleration/deceleration times, S-curve characteristics, carrier frequencies, etc.
Settings related to frequency control S Reference:
S Motor:
S Option:
S Terminal:
S Protection:
S Operator:
S Winding :
V/f characteristics and motor constants
Settings for Optional Cards
Settings for sequential I/O and analog I/O
Settings for the motor and inverter protection functions
Selects the Digital Operator’s display and Key functions
Settings for winding change function (Optional)
(Usable only with in vector control mode)
Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor constants in the vector control mode. The motor constants are calculated and set automatically.
Perform autotuning for motor unit separately before vector control operation.
Use this mode to read/set user constants that have been changed from their factoryset values.
Note Always perform autotuning for motor unit separately bofore vector control operation.
- 4
4.2Modes
4.2.2 Switching Modes
Once the Inverter has been put into operation mode by pressing the Menu Key, the Increment and Decrement Keys can be pressed to switch to other modes. Press the DATA/ENTER Key to read/set the user constants in each mode.
Press the ESC Key to return to the mode display from the user constant display.
Press the DATA/ENTER Key twice to write a constant and then press the ESC Key to return to the mode display. This is the most Basic operation, so you should remember it.
All modes/constant status
Power ON
MENU
Operation mode
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
DAT Monitor (Frequency reference value)
Frequency Ref
U1 -01 = 0 .
00 HZ
ESC
Initialize mode
MC5 Main Menu
Initialize
Programming mode
MC5 Main Menu
Programming
DAT
ESC
DAT
ESC
Operator display language selection
Select Language
English
Frequency reference input method selection
Display contents differ depending on the access level (A1-01)
Reference Source
Terminal
(Access level: Quick-start)
DAT
ESC
DAT
ESC
A1 -00 = 1
English
Function b1
Sequence
Autotuning mode
(Open loop vector control at factory setting.)
MC5 Main Menu
Autotuning
Modified constant mode
MC5 Main Menu
Modified Consts
DAT
ESC
DAT
Autotuning
(Rated voltage setting)
Rated Voltage
200 .
0 VAC
Displays constants changed from factory settings
None Modified
DAT
ESC
Rated Voltage
200 .
0 VAC
ESC
4
(Mode Display) Function
(Constant Reading)
Fig
4.3
Mode Transitions
Constant Display
(Constant Setting)
When running the Inverter after using digital operator, press the MENU Key to enter the operation mode and then press the DATA/ENTER Key from the operation mode display to bring up the monitor display. Run commands cant’t be received from any other display. (Monitor display in the operation mode appears when the power is turned ON.)
- 5
4
Setting User Constants
4.2.3 User Constant Access Levels
4.2.3 User Constant Access Levels
The VS-626MC5 has three access levels which divide the various user constants based on their applications, as shown below. The access level restricts which user constants can be set or displayed.
Quick-start
Basic
Advanced
Allows reading/setting of user constants required for simple operation. (factory preset)
Allows reading/setting of Basic user constants.
Allows reading/setting of all user constants.
Set the access level in initialize mode with user constant A1-01.
J
Changing the Access Level from Quick-start to Basic
The Inverter is set at the factory to start in the Quick-start access level. Use the following procedure to change from the Quick-start level to the Basic level.
Step
1
Key Sequence
MENU
Digital Operator Display
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
Remarks
2
MC5 Main Menu
Initialize
3
DATA
ENTER
Select Language
English
4
Access Level
QUICK--START
5
6
DATA
ENTER
A1 -01 = 2
QUICK--START
A1 -01 = 3
Basic
7
DATA
ENTER Entry Accepted
Access Level
Basic
After approx. 3 seconds, the Operator display is as shown on the left.
As shown above, Quick-start has changed to Basic.
These seven steps can be illustrated as when in Figure 4.4.
MENU
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
DAT
MC5 Main Menu
Initialize
Select Language
English
DAT
Access Level
QUICK--START
Access Level
Basic
Fig
4.4
Changing Quick-start to Basic
A1 -01 = 2
QUICK--START
A1 -01 = 3
Basic
DAT
Entry Accepted
- 6
4.2Modes
MENU
J
Setting User Constants in Each Access Level
The displayed access level will change when programming mode is selected. The display will not change for access levels in operation mode, initialize mode, autotuning mode, and modified constants mode.
This section provides the procedure to change the acceleration time to 20.0 s in each access level. The acceleration time (C1-01) is a user constant in programming mode.
If the new user constant setting is not written to the Unit by pressing the DATA/ENTER Key within one minute after starting the procedure, the display will automatically revert to the original user constant setting. In this case, the procedure must be started again.
Operation mode
Initialize mode
Programming mode
DAT
Advanced
Displays group level.
Basic
Displays function level.
Quick-start
Displays constant level.
Application
Tuning
Mode
Reference
Group
Fig
4.5
Constant Access Levels b1 Sequence b1-01 Reference Source b1-02 Run Source b1-03 Stopping Method
Constant to be changed
C1 Accel/Decel
C2 S-curve Acc/Dec
Function
C1-01 Accel Time 1
C1-02 Decel Time 1
Constant
4
- 7
4
Setting User Constants
4.2.3 User Constant Access Levels
A EXAMPLE " Setting a User Constant in the Quick-start Access Level
The user constant level will be displayed when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed at the programming mode display.
Use the following display to set the acceleration time to 20.0 s.
Step Key Sequence Digital Operator Display Remarks
1
MENU
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
2
MC5 Main Menu
Programming
3
Press twice.
DATA
ENTER
Reference source
Terminals
Changed to constant setting level.
4
Run Source
Terminals
5
Stopping Method
Ramp to Stop
6
Accel Time 1
C1 -01 = 10 .
0 Sec
7
8
DATA
ENTER
Accel Time 1
0010 .
0 Sec
Accel Time 1
0010 .
0 Sec
Selects the user constant so that the leading 0 blinks. The digit that is blinking can be changed.
Blinking digit moves 2 places to the right.
RESET
Press twice.
9 Accel Time 1
0020 .
0 Sec
Changes 1 to 2.
10
DATA
ENTER Entry Accepted
Accel Time 1
C1 -01 = 20 .
0 Sec
After approx. 3 seconds, the Operator display is as shown on the left.
The acceleration time has been set to 20.0 seconds.
Step Key Sequence Digital Operator Display
11
ESC
MC5 Main Menu
Programming
Returns to programming mode display.
Remarks
- 8
4.2Modes
A EXAMPLE " Setting a User Constant in the Basic Access Level
The function level will be displayed when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed at the programming mode display.
Use the following display to set the acceleration time to 20.0 s.
Step Key Sequence Digital Operator Display Remarks
1
MENU
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
2
MC5 Main Menu
Programming
3
Press twice.
DATA
ENTER
Function b1
Sequence
Changed to constant reading (function) level.
4
Function b2
DC Braking
5
Function C1
Accel/Decel
6
7
8
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
RESET
Press twice.
Accel Time 1
C1 -01 = 10 .
0 Sec
Accel Time 1
0010 .
0 Sec
Accel Time 1
0010 .
0 Sec
Changed to constant setting level,.
Selects the user constant so that the leading 0 blinks. The blinking digit can be changed.
Blinking digit moves 2 places to the right and the “1” blinks.
9
Accel Time 1
0020 .
0 Sec
Changes 1 to 2.
10
DATA
ENTER
Writes-in the new setting.
Entry Accepted
Accel Time 1
C1 -01 = 20 .
0 Sec
The Operator display is as shown on the left.
11
ESC
Function C1
Accel/Decel
Returns to “Function C1 Accel/Decel” display.
4
- 9
4
Setting User Constants
4.2.3 User Constant Access Levels
A EXAMPLE " Setting a User Constant in the Advanced Access Level
The group level will be displayed when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed at the programming mode display.
Use the following procedure to set a constant.
Step Key Sequence Digital Operator Display Remarks
1
MENU
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
2
MC5 Main Menu
Programming
3
Press twice.
DATA
ENTER
Group b
Application
4
Group C
Tuning
5
DATA
ENTER
Function C1
Accel/Decel
Changed to constant reading (function) level.
6
7
8
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
RESET
Press twice.
Accel Time 1
C1 -01 = 10 .
0 Sec
Accel Time 1
0010 .
0 Sec
Accel Time 1
0010 .
0 Sec
Selects the user constant so that the leading 0 blinks. The blinking digit can be changed.
Blinking digit moves 2 places to the right and the “1” blinks.
9
Accel Time 1
0020 .
0 Sec
Changes 1 to 2.
10
DATA
ENTER Entry Accepted
Writes-in the new setting, 20.0 s.
Accel Time 1
C1 -01 = 20 .
0 Sec
After a few seconds, the Operator display is as shown on the left.
11
ESC
Function C1
Accel/Decel
The constant setting in Advanced level (acceleration time change from 10.0 to 20.0 s) has been completed.
- 10
4.2Modes
4.2.4 Operation Mode
Operation mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated.
Many user constants can’t be changed when the Inverter is operating. Refer to User Constant List for details.
The following monitor displays are possible in operation mode: The frequency reference, output frequency, output current, and output voltage, as well as fault information and the fault history.
IMPORTANT When running the Inverter, press the MENU Key first to enter the operation mode and then press the DATA/
ENTER Key from the operation mode display to bring up the monitor display.Run commands can’t be received from any other display. Once the Inverter is running, it can be switched to other modes.
J
Operations in Operation Mode
Key operations in operation mode are shown in Figure 4.6.
All modes/constants status
Power ON
MENU
Operation Mode
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
DAT
Frequency reference setting/display
Frequency Ref
U1 -01 = 0 .
00 HZ
ESC
Output frequency display
Output Freq
U1 -02 = 0 .
00 Hz
Output current display
Output Current
U1 -03 = 0 .
00 A
Output voltage display
Output Voltage
U1 -06 = 0 .
0 VAC
Function selection U2 (fault trace)
Function U2
Fault Trace
DAT
ESC
Function selection U3 (fault history)
Function U3
Fault History
DAT
ESC
DAT Function selection U1 (Monitor)
Function U1
Monitor
ESC
Contents of fault trace
Current Fault
None
Contents of fault history
Last Fault
None
Various monitors
Frequency Ref
U1 -01 = 0 .
00 HZ
4
Fig
4.6
Operations in Operation Mode
J
Conditions for Monitoring
Table 4.3 shows the items that can be monitored in operation mode.
- 11
4
Setting User Constants
4.2.4 Operation Mode tion
M i stant
No.
The “Valid access levels” column in the table indicates whether an item can be monitored in a particular access level and control method. The codes in this column have the following meanings.
Q
B
Items that can be monitored in the Quick-start access level only.
Items that can be monitored in the Quick-start and Basic access levels.
A Items that can be monitored in all access levels. (Quick-start, Basic, and Advanced)
Items that cannot be monitored in the control mode shown.
The output signal levels for multi-function analog outputs shown in the table are for a gain of 100.0 and a bias of 0.00.
Table
4.3
Constants Monitored in Operation Mode
Name Valid Access Levels
Digital Operator
Display
Function Multi-function Analog Outputs
Unit
Open Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
Frequency reference
Frequency Ref
Output frequency
Monitors/sets the frequency reference value.
nits c n b s t ith user constant o1-03.
Monitors the output frequency.
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to r 10 V possible) user constant o1-03.
(0 to r
10 V possible)
0.01
Hz
Hz
Output Freq
Output current
Output Current
Control method
Control Method
Motor speed
Motor Speed
Output voltage
Output Voltage
DC bus voltage
DC Bus Voltage
Output power
Output kWatts
Torque reference
Torque Reference set.
(0 to +10 V output)
(0 to r
10 V possible)
Monitors the Inverter’s internal 10 V: 200 (400) VAC output voltage reference value.
(0 to +10 V output)
Monitors the DC voltage of the 10 V: 400 (800) VDC
Inverter’s internal main circuit.
(0 to +10 V output)
Monitors the output power.
(This is an internally detected value.)
Monitors the internal torque ref-
(0 to r 10 V possible)
(0 to r 10 V possible) trol is used.
Shows input ON/OFF status.
U1-10 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Hz
Input terminal status
Input Term Sts
Output terminal status
1: Terminal 1 ON
1: Terminal 2 ON
1: Terminal 3 ON
1: Terminal 4 ON
1: Terminal 5 ON
1: Terminal 6 ON
1: Terminal 7 ON
1: Terminal 8 ON
Shows output ON/OFF status.
U1-11 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1: Terminals 9--10 ON
Output Term Sts
1: Terminal 26 ON
Not used. (always 0)
1: Terminals 18/19--20
ON
- 12
4.2Modes
Status
Moni-
Name
Digital Operator
Display
Operation status
Inverter operating status.
U1-12 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1: Running
1: Zero-speed level
Int Ctl Sts 1
Cumulative operation time
1: Reset input ON
1: F.ref/F.out agree
1: Inverter ready
1: Minor fault detected
1: Major fault detected
Monitors the Inverter’s elapsed operating time.
Elapsed Time power-on time selection can be set with user constants o2-07 and o2-08.
Software No.
FLASH ID
Terminal 13 input voltage level
Term 13 Level
Terminal 14 input current level
Term 14 Level
Terminal 16 input voltage level
Term 16 Level
Motor secondary current (lq)
Monitors the input voltage of the frequency reference (volt-
10 V: 100% (10 V)
(0 to r 10 V possible)
An input of 10 V corresponds to
100%.
Monitors the input current of the frequency reference (current).
An input of 20 mA corresponds to 100%.
Monitors the input voltage of the multi-function analog input.
20 mA: 100% (20 mA)
10 V: 100% (10 V)
(0 to r 10 V possible)
100%.
Monitors the calculated value of the motor’s secondary current 10 V: Rated secondary cur-
Mot SEC Current
Motor exciting current (ld)
The motor’s rated secondary current corresponds to 100%.
Monitors the calculated value of the motor’s excitation current
(0 to +10 V output)
10 V: Rated secondary cur-
Mot EXC Current
Output frequency after soft-start
SFS Output
ASR input
The motor’s rated secondary current corresponds to 100%.
Monitors the output frequency after a soft start.
(0 to +10 V output) compensation functions such as slip compensation.
Monitors the input to the speed
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to r 10 V possible)
ASR Input
ASR output
ASR Output
Speed deviation
The max. frequency corresponds to 100%.
Monitors the output from the
(0 to r 10 V possible)
10 V: Rated secondary cur-
The motor’s rated secondary current corresponds to 100%.
Monitors the speed deviation
(0 to r 10 V possible)
Speed Deviation
The max. frequency corresponds to 100%.
(0 to r 10 V possible)
0.01
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
4
- 13
4
Setting User Constants
4.2.4 Operation Mode
Monitor
Name
Digital Operator
Display
DI-16H2 input status
Monitors the reference value from a VS-626MC5-DI16H2
Digital Reference Card.
DI-16 Reference
Output voltage reference (Vq)
Voltage Ref (Vq)
Output voltage reference (Vd) binary or BCD depending on user constant F3-01.
Monitors the Inverter’s internal voltage reference value for the motor’s secondary current control.
Monitors the Inverter’s internal voltage reference value for the
Voltage Ref (Vd)
Software No.
(CPU)
CPU ID
ACR output of q axis
ACR (q) Output
ACR output of d axis
ACR (d) Output
OPE fault constant
OPE Detected trol.
Manufacturer’s CPU software
Monitors current control output
10 V: 200 (400) VAC
(0 to r 10 V possible)
10 V: 200 (400) VAC
(0 to r
10 V possible) value for motor’s secondary cur- 10 V: 100% rent.
Monitors current control output value for motor s excitation cur rent.
Shows the first constant number
10 V: 100%
10 V: 100%
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
- 14
4.2Modes
tion trace
(See note.) stant
No.
Table 4.3 Constants Monitored in Operation Mode (Continued)
Name
Digital Operator
Display
Current fault
Current Fault
Last fault
Last Fault
Frequency reference at fault
Frequency Ref
Output frequency at fault
Output Freq
Output current at fault
Output Current
Motor speed at fault
Motor Speed
Output voltage reference at fault
Output Voltage
DC bus voltage at fault
DC Bus Voltage
Output power at fault
Output kWatts
Torque reference at fault
Torque Reference
Input terminal status at fault
Input Term Sts
Output terminal status at fault
Output Term Sts
Operation status at fault
Inverter status
Cumulative operation time at fault
Elapsed time
Torque reference when the “last au t occu ed.
(The rated torque = 100%.)
Input terminal status when the
Output terminal status when the ast au t occu ed.
(Same format as U1-11.)
Inverter operating status when
Elapsed operating or power-on curred.
Function
Frequency reference value when
Output frequency when the “last
Output current when the “last
Motor speed when the “last
Output voltage when the “last fault” occurred.
The main circuit DC voltage
Output power when the “last fault” occurred.
(Same format as U1-10.)
(Same format as U1-12.)
Multi-function Analog Outputs
Can’t be output.
Units
0.01
0.01
0.01
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
Note When faults CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1 and UV2 occur, a fault trace is not performed.
4
- 15
4
Setting User Constants
4.2.4 Operation Mode tion histoy stant
No.
U3-08
Name
Digital Operator
Display
Most recent fault
Last Fault
Second most recent fault
Fault Message 2
Third most recent fault
Fault Message 3
Fourth/oldest fault
Fault Message 4
Cumulative operation time at fault
Elapsed Time 1
Accumulated time of second fault
Elapsed Time 2
Accumulated time of third fault
Elapsed Time 3
Accumulated time of fourth/oldest fault
Elapsed Time 4
Information on the 2 nd to last
Information on the 3 rd to last
Information on the 4 fault.
curred.
Function
Elapsed running or power-on time when the 2 nd to last fault occurred.
Elapsed running or power-on time when the 3 to last fault occurred.
rd th
Elapsed running or power-on
Elapsed running or power-on time when the 4 th to last fault
Multi-function Analog Outputs
Can’t be output.
Units
1 hr
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
Q Q
J
J
Note Faults CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1 and UV2 are not recorded in the fault history.
Monitoring at Startup
In operation mode, the frequency reference, output frequency, output current, and output voltage can be monitored immediately if the factory presets are being used. One of these four values, the output voltage, can be changed to a different monitor item. When an item other than the output voltage is to be monitored, set that value in user constant o1-01 (Monitor selection). Refer to the example procedure given later in this manual.
When the power is turned ON, the frequency reference will appear in the Unit’s data display if the factor presets are being used. Any one of the four values monitored at startup (frequency reference, output frequency, output current, or the value set in user constant o1-01) can be selected to appear when the power is turned ON.
The value that appears at startup is determined by user constant o1-02 (Monitor selection after power up).
User constants o1-01 and o1-02 can be changed in the Basic or Advanced access levels. These user constants can be changed during operation.
Monitor Displays
The following notation is used in this manual when describing user constants.
Change
Constant
Number
Display Name
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector o1-01 Monitor selection 4 to 28 -6 B B
Use the last two digits from the U1 Monitor list (U1) to select a value. For example, the torque reference is U1-09, so input 9 to select the torque reference.
Indicates whether or not the constant can be changed during operation.
Setting Range
Units
Factory Setting
Levels
Can be changed during operation.
Cannot be changed during operation.
The setting range for the constant.
The unit used to set the constant (“--” indicates that no unit is used).
The value preset at the factory. (There are different factory settings for each control method, i.e., if the control method is changed, the factory setting can also change.)
Indicates the control methods and access levels under which the constant can be accessed and set.
Q
B
A
Accessible/settable under Quick-start.
Accessible/settable under Quick-start or Basic.
Accessible/settable under all access levels (Quick-start, Basic, and Advanced).
Not accessible/settable in the specified control method.
- 16
4.2Modes
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector o1-02
Monitor selection after power up
1 to 4 -1 B B
Use constant o1-02 to indicate which value will be displayed when the Inverter is started. Refer to the following table.
Monitor Display Contents at Startup
Setting
1
2
3
4
Contents
Indicates the frequency reference at startup.
Indicates the output frequency at startup.
Indicates the output current at startup.
Indicates the value set in user constant o1-01 at startup.
A EXAMPLE " Changing Monitor Display to Output Power at Startup in Basic Access Level
Change the access level to Basic if it is not already set there. Refer to Figure 4.4 for the procedure to change from the Quick-start to Basic access level.
Use the following procedure to change the display from the output voltage to the output power.
Step Key Sequence Digital Operator Display Remarks
1
MENU
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
2
MC5 Main Menu
Programming
3
Press twice.
DATA
ENTER
Function b1
Sequence
Changed to constant reading (function) level.
4
Function o1
Monitor Select
5
Press twice.
DATA
ENTER
User Monitor Sel
Output Voltage
Changed to constant setting level.
6
DATA
ENTER o1 -01 = 6
Output Voltage
7 o1 -01 = 8
Output kWatts
8
Press twice.
DATA
ENTER
Writes-in the new setting.
Entry Accepted
User Monitor Sel
Output kWatts
After a few seconds, the Operator display is as shown on the left.
Output power has been set in place of output voltage.
4
- 17
4
Setting User Constants
4.2.5 Initialize Mode
A EXAMPLE " Changing Monitor Display to Output Current at Startup in Basic Access Level
Use the following procedure to change user constant o1-02 so that the output current is displayed at startup.
(The procedure continues from the end of the previous example.)
Step
1
Key Sequence
NJ
Digital Operator Display
User Monitor Sel
Output kWatts
Remarks
Check the display.
2
Power-On Monitor
Frequency Ref
3
DATA
ENTER o1 -02 = 1
Frequency Ref
4 o1--02 = 3
Output Current
5
Press twice.
DATA
ENTER Entry Accepted
Writes-in the new setting.
Power-On Monitor
Output Current
After a few seconds, the Operator display is as shown on the left.
6
ESC
Function o1
Monitor Select
7
ESC
MC5 Main Menu
Programming
Output current has been set in monitor selection after power ON.
4.2.5 Initialize Mode
The initialize mode is used to select the language displayed by the Unit, the access level, and the control method; it is also used to initialize the Unit’s user constants. The structure of the initialize mode is shown in Figure 4.7.
Operation mode
MENU
Initialize mode Language
Programming mode Access level
Control mode
Initialize
Password
Function Selection A2 A2-01 User Pram 1
A2-02 User Pram 2
A2-32 User Pram 32
Accessible/settable only in Advanced setting level.
Fig
4.7
Structure of Initialize Mode User Constants
- 18
4.2Modes
J
Selecting the Display Language: A1-00
D
D
Use constant A1-00 to select the language displayed by the Inverter. A value of 0 sets English and a value of 1 sets Japanese.
This user constant is not returned to the factory setting when constants are initialized. It must be manually reset to the factory setting.
Change
User
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
A1-00
Language selection for
Digital Operator display
0 (English),
1 (Japanese)
--
1
(Japanese)
Q Q
A EXAMPLE " Changing the Language to English
Use the following procedure to change the display language from Japanese to English.
Step Key Sequence Digital Operator Display Remarks
1
MC5
MENU
2
MC5
3
4
5
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
(Language)
(Japanese)
A1--00 = 1
(Japanese)
A1--00 = 0
English
Changed to constant setting level.
6
DATA
ENTER Entry Accepted
Select Language
English
Writes-in the new setting.
After a few seconds, the Operator display is as shown on the left.
J
The display language has been set to English.
Setting the Access Level: A1-01
D Use constant A1-01 to select the user constant access level. This level determines which user constants can be changed and displayed.
D The user constants that can be displayed and changed also depend upon the control method being used.
Constant
Number
Name
Change
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
A1-01 Constant access level 0 4 -2 Q Q Q
Setting
Access Level Settings
0
1
2
3
4
Operation Only
User Program
Quick-start
Basic
Advanced
Function
This setting allows the operation mode and initialize mode to be changed or displayed.
Use this setting to prevent user constant settings from being changed.
This setting allows only the user-selected constants (up to 32) to be changed or displayed.
Select the desired user constants in A2-01 through A2-32.
This setting allows the user constants required to start the Inverter (about 25) to be changed or displayed.
This setting allows the commonly used user constants to be changed or displayed.
This setting allows all user constants to be changed or displayed.
4
- 19
4
Setting User Constants
4.2.5 Initialize Mode
J
Setting the Control Method: A1-02
D
D
D
Use constant A1-02 to select one of the four control methods.
This user constant is not returned to the factory setting when constants are initialized. It must be manually reset to the factory setting.
When using winding change function, the setting of constants A1-02 and E3-01 (motor 2 control selection) should be the same.
Change Valid Access Levels
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
A1-02
Control method selection
2 3 --
2
(Open Loop
Vector)
Q Q
3
Control Method Settings
Setting
2
Function
Open-loop vector control
(Vector control using the Inverter internal speed information).
Flux vector control
(Vector control using a PG Speed Control Card).
A EXAMPLE " Changing the Control Method to Flux Vector
Use the following procedure to change the control method to select flux vector.
Step
1
Key Sequence
MENU
Digital Operator Display
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
Remarks
2
MC5 Main Menu
Initialize
3
DATA
ENTER
Select language
English
4
Control Method
Open Loop
5
Press twice.
DATA
ENTER
A1--02 = 2
Open Loop
Changed to constant setting level.
6
A1--02 = 3
Flux Vector
7
DATA
ENTER
Writes-in the new setting.
Entry Accepted
Control Method
Flux Vector
After a few seconds, the Operator display is as shown on the left.
The control method has been changed to flux vector.
Table
4.4
Control Method Characteristics
Characteristic
Basic Control Method
Speed Detector
Open Loop Vector Control
Current vector control without PG
Not required
Optional Speed
Detectors
Not required
Speed Control
Accuracy
Starting Torque
Speed Control Range
Torque Limit
Torque Control
1:100
150%/1 Hz
0.2%
Possible
Not possible
S Variable speed drive applications.
Example Applications
Flux Vector Control
Current vector control with PG
Required (pulse generator)
PG-B2 or PG-X2
1:1000
150 %/0 r/min
0.02%
Possible
Possible
S Simple servo drives.
S Precision speed control.
S Torque control.
- 20
4.2Modes
J
Initializing User Constants: A1-03
D
D
Use constant A1-03 to initialize the user constants.
When initialized, the user constants will return to their factory-preset values. You should normally record the setting of any constants that are changed from the factory presets.
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
A1-03 Initialize
0, 1110 , 2220 ,
3330
-0 Q Q
Settings to Initialize User Constants
Setting
0
1110
2220
3330
Function
Returns to the Initialize Display without initializing any user constants.
Initializes the user constants to the user settings.
2-wire sequential initialization (Initializes the user constants to the factory settings.)
3-wire sequential initialization
Initializing to User Settings
This function initializes the user constants to values that have been recorded as user settings.
To record the user settings, change the user constants to the desired values and then set user constant o2-03
(User constant initial value) to 1. Once user settings are recorded, the o2-03 value will be automatically reset to 0. (The 1110 function will be disabled when user constant o2-03 is set to 0.)
D Example of Wiring for 2-wire Sequential Operation
1
Forward Run/Stop
2
Reverse Run/Stop
11
Sequential input common
Fig
4.8
Example of Wiring for 2-wire Sequential Operation
D Example of Wiring for 3-wire Sequential Operation
The default settings of the multi-function inputs are different from the default settings of the 2-wire sequence.
When setting a 3-wire sequence, the operation can be started and stopped with an automatically resetting pushbutton switch.
Stop switch (NC) Run switch (NO)
1
Run command
(Operates when the run switch is closed.)
2
Stop command
(Stops when the stop switch is open.)
5
Forward/Reverse run command
(Multi-function input 3)
11
Sequential input common
Fig
4.9
Example of Wiring for 3-wire Sequential Operation
4
- 21
4
Setting User Constants
4.2.5 Initialize Mode
A EXAMPLE " Initializing for 2-wire Sequential Operation
Use the following procedure to initialize user constants to the factory settings.
Step
1
Key Sequence
MENU
Digital Operator Display
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
Remarks
2
MC5 Main Menu
Initialize
3
DATA
ENTER
Select Language
English
4
Init Parameters
No Initialize
5
Press 3 times.
DATA
ENTER
A1--03 = 0
No Initialize
6
A1--03 = 2220
2-wire Initial
7
DATA
ENTER Entry Accepted
Writes-in the new setting.
Init Parameters
No Initialize
After a few seconds, the Operator display is as shown on the left.
The initialization has been completed for a 2-wire sequence.
- 22
4.2Modes
J
Passwords: A1-04 A1-05
D
D
D
D
Use constants A1-04 and A1-05 to write-protect the initialize-mode user constants.
User constants A1-01 through A1-03 and A2-01 through A2-32 can be displayed but not changed if the contents of A1-04 and A1-05 are not the same.
To write-protect the initialize-mode user constants, set the password in A1-05 after inputting the desired values in A1-01 through A1-03 and A2-01 through A2-32. User constant A1-05 can be displayed by displaying A1-04 and pressing the Menu Key while pressing the Reset Key. (A1-05 can’t be displayed with the usual Key sequences.)
It will be possible to change the initialize-mode user constants again when the same password is written to A1-04 and A1-05.
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
A1-04
A1-05
Password 1
Password 2
0 to 9999
0 to 9999
--
--
0
0
Q
Q
Q
Q
A EXAMPLE " Setting the Password to 1000
Use the following procedure to set the password to 1000.
Step
1
Key Sequence
MENU
Digital Operator Display
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
2
MC5 Main Menu
Initialize
3
DATA
ENTER
Select Language
English
4
Enter Password
A1--04 = 0
Press 4 times.
5
Select Password
A1--05 = 0 RESET
Hold RESET.
Remarks
6
7
MENU
And press MENU.
DATA
ENTER
Select Password
0000
Select Password
1000
The first digit will blink. The blinking digit can be changed.
The value of the digit will increment each time the Increment Key is pressed and then stop at 9. Press the
Decrement Key to decrease the value.
Writes-in the new setting.
8
9
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Entry Accepted
Select Password
A1--05 = 1000
Enter Password
A1--04 = 0
After a few seconds, the Operator display is as shown on the left.
J
The password has been set to 1000.
To enable changing user constants, set the same password in A1-05 = 0.
Setting User Constants: A2-01 to A2-32
D
D
D
User constants A2-01 through A2-32 specify the constants that can be displayed and changed when the access level (A1-01) is set to 1 (user programs).
User constants A2-01 through A2-32 can be changed only in the Advanced access level and cannot be changed during operation.
The following restrictions apply to setting/displaying user constants when the access level is set to the user program access level.
Operation
Initialize
The Quick-start level user constants can be displayed.
The Quick-start level user constants can be displayed or set.
Programming Only the user constants specified in A2-01 through A2-32 can be displayed or set.
Autotuning
Modified constants
The user constants cannot be displayed.
The user constants cannot be displayed.
4
- 23
4
Setting User Constants
4.2.5 Initialize Mode
A EXAMPLE " Setting C1-08 (Deceleration Time 4) in A2-01 to Define it as a User Constant
Step Key Sequence Digital Operator Display
1
MENU
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
2
MC5 Main Menu
Initialize
3
DATA
ENTER
Select Language
English
4
Function A2
User Constants
5
DATA
ENTER
User Param 1
A2--01 = ----------
6
DATA
ENTER
User Param 1
--------------
Remarks
The first digit blinks.
7
User Param 1
C1--01
Press twice.
8 User Param 1
C1--01
Writes-in set value 0000.
RESET
Press twice.
9
User Param 1
C1--08
10
Press 7 times.
DATA
ENTER Entry Accepted
Writes-in the new setting.
User Param 1
A2--01 = C1--08
After a few seconds, the Operator display is as shown on the left.
11
ESC
Function A2
User Constants
12
Access Level
Advanced
13
14
15
Press twice.
DATA
ENTER
Press twice.
DATA
ENTER
A1 -01 = 4
Advanced
A1 -01 = 1
User Program
Entry Accepted
The user program access level can be set only after one or more constants are set as user constants in A2-01 to
A2-32. If no constants are set, the user program access level will not be displayed for A1-01.
Writes-in the new setting.
A1 -01 = 4
Advanced
If the DATA/ENTER Key is not pressed within one minute, the Operator display will return as shown on the left. In this case, repeat from step
14.
After a few seconds, the Operator display is as shown on the left.
16
ESC
Access Level
User Program
MC5 Main Menu
Initialize
The access level has been set to the user program access level.
- 24
Figure 4.10 shows the structure of the user constants.
MENU
Operation mode
Initialize mode Language
Programming mode Access Level
Control Method
Initialize
Password
Function Selection A2 A2-01 User Param 1
A2-02 User Param 2
Fig
4.10
A2-32 User Param 32
These user constants can be changed and displayed only in the Advanced access level.
Structure of User Constants
4.2Modes
4
- 25
4
Setting User Constants
4.2.6 Programming Mode b A li ti
C T i
E Motor
F Options
4.2.6 Programming Mode
d Reference
The Inverter user constants can be set in programming mode. The user constants which can be changed and displayed depend on the access level and control method that are being used. Refer to the following table to determine if a user constant can be changed.
The groups of constants in programming mode and their functions are shown in Table 4.5.
Table
4.5
Programming Mode Constant Groups
Control
Method
Over
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector b1 Operating modes b2 DC braking b3 Speed searching
C1
Acceleration/deceleration times
Sequence
DC Braking
Speed Search
Accel/Decel
Settings such as the reference input method
DC braking function settings
Speed search function settings
Acceleration/deceleration time settings
C2
S-curve acceleration/deceleration
C3 Slip compensation
C4 Torque compensation
C5 Speed control
S-Curve Acc/Dec
Motor-Slip Comp
Torque Comp
ASR Tuning
C6 Carrier frequencies Carrier Freq
C8 Factory tuning constants Factory Tuning
Preset Reference d1 Frequency references d2
Frequency upper/lower limits
Reference Limits d3
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
F1
Jump frequencies
V/f characteristics
Motor constants
Motor 2 control method
V/f Characteristics 2
Motor 2 constants
PG speed control card settings
Jump Frequencies
V/f Pattern
Motor Setup
Motor 2 Ctl Meth
V/F pattern 2
Motor 2 Setup
PG Option Setup
F2
Analog Reference Card
AI
AI-14 Setup
S-curve characteristics for accel/decel times
Slip compensation function settings
Torque compensation function settings
Speed control loop user constant settings
Carrier frequency settings
Adjustment for open-loop vector control
Operator frequency reference settings
Frequency upper and lower limit settings
Prohibited frequency settings
Sets the motor V/f characteristics.
Sets the motor constants.
Sets the control methods for motor 2.
Sets the V/f characteristics for motor 2.
Sets the motor constants for motor 2.
User constant settings for a PG Card
F3 Digital Reference Card DI DI-08, 16 Setup
F4 Analog Monitor Card AO AO-08, 12 Setup
F5 Digital Output Card DO
F6 Digital Output Card DO
F7 Pulse Monitor Card PO
F8
F9
SI-F/SI-G Transmission
Card
CP-916B Transmission
Card
DO-02C
DO-08
PO-36F Setup
SI-F/G
DDS/SI-B
User constant settings for an Analog
Reference Card
User constant settings for a Digital Reference Card
User constant settings for an Analog
Monitor Card
User constant settings for a Digital Output Card
User constant settings for a Digital Output Card
User constant settings for a Pulse Monitor Card
User constant settings for a Transmission Card
User constant settings for a Transmission Card
- 26
4.2Modes
H Terminal
L Protection o Operator
H1 Multi-function inputs Digital Inputs
H2 Multi-function outputs Digital Outputs
H3 Analog inputs
H4
Multi-function analog outputs
H5
MEMOBUS communications
Analog Inputs
Analog Outputs
Serial Com Setup
L1 Motor protection functions Motor Overload
L2
Momentary power loss ride-through
L3 Stall prevention
PwrLoss Ridethru
Stall Prevention
L4 Frequency detection
L5 Fault restart
L6 Overtorque detection
Ref Detection
Fault Restart
Torque Detection
L7 Torque limits Torque Limit
L8 Hardware protection o1 Display/Monitor settings o2 Function settings
Hdwe Protection
Monitor Select
Key Selections
Function selection for multi-function inputs
Function selection for multi-function outputs
Function selection for analog inputs
Function selection for analog outputs
MEMOBUS communications settings
Overload protection settings and selection
Selects the power-loss processing method.
Stall prevention settings and selection
Frequency detection settings and selection
Fault restart function settings
Overtorque detection settings and selection
Torque limit settings (vector control only)
Overheating and phase loss protection settings
Selects the display and setting methods.
Key function selection and other user constants
Control
Method
Over
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
4
- 27
4
Setting User Constants
4.2.6 Programming Mode
MENU
Figure 4.11 shows the difference in the display structure for the various access levels.
Advanced Level Basic Level Quick-start Level
[Mode]
Operation mode
Initialize mode
Programming mode
Autotuning mode
Modified constants mode
DAT
[Group] b Application
C Tuning d Reference
DAT
[Function] b1 Sequence b2 DC braking b3 Speed search
C1 Accel/Decel
C2 S-curve characteristic setting
C3 Motor-slip compensation d1 Frequency reference presetting d2 Frequency upper/lower limit d3 Jump frequency
DAT
[Constant] b1-01 Reference selection b1-02 Operation method selection b1-03 Stopping method selection b2-01 Zero speed level b2-02 DC injection braking current b3-01 Speed search selection at start b3-02 Speed search operating current
C1-01 Acceleration time 1
C1-02 Deceleration time 1
C2-01 S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
C2-02 S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start
C3-01 Slip compensation gain d1-01 Frequency reference 1 d1-02 Frequency reference 2 d2-01 Frequency reference upper limit d2-02 Frequency reference lower limit d3-01 Jump frequency 1
E Motor
F Option
H Terminal
E1 V/f pattern setting
E2 Motor setup
F1 PG Speed Control
Card
H1 Sequence input
H2 Sequence output
E1-01 Input voltage setting
E1-02 Motor selection
E2-01 Motor rated current
F1-01 PG constant
H1-01 Digital input
H2-01 Digital output
L Protection L1 Motor protection
L2 Momentary power loss ride-through o1 Display/setting selection
L1-01 Motor protection selection
L1-02 Motor protection time constant o Operator o2 Function selection o1-01 Monitor selection o1-02 Monitor selection after power up o2-01 LOCAL/REMOTE Key enable/disable o2-02 STOP Key during control circuit terminal operation
P1-01 Winding change frequency
Fig
4.11
P Winding Change
(Optional)
P1 Winding change function
Display Structures for Different Access Levels
- 28
4.2Modes
4.2.7 Autotuning Mode
CAUTION
D Disconnect the load (machine, device) from the motor before autotuning.
The motor may turn, possibly resulting in injury or damage to equipment. Also, motor constants cannot be correctly set with the motor attached to a load.
Autotuning automatically tunes and sets the required motor constants when operating in the open-loop or flux vector control modes. Always perform autotuning before starting operation.
When the rated voltage, rated current, rated frequency, and number of poles listed on the motor nameplate have been input and the RUN Key is pressed, the motor constants calculated from these values will be written to E1-04 through E2-09 automatically.
When motor cannot be disconnected from the load, motor constants can be set by calculation.
Contact your YASKAWA representatives for details.
The Inverter’s autotuning function automatically determines the motor constants, while a servo system’s autotuning function determines the size of a load, so these autotuning functions are fundamentally different.
A EXAMPLE " Autotuning Procedure
Step
1
Key Sequence
MENU
Digital Operator Display
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
Remarks
2
MC5 Main Menu
Autotuning
3 press 3 times.
DATA
ENTER
Rated Voltage (see note)
200 .
0 VAC
4
5
6
DATA
ENTER
RESET
DATA
ENTER
Rated Voltage
200 .
0 VAC
Rated Voltage
200 .
0 VAC
Entry Accepted
The leading digit blinks.
When Increment Key is pressed, blinking value increases. When
Decrement Key is pressed, blinking value decreases.
The digit to be set moves to the right and blinks. Follow the above procedures as outlined in step 4.
After selecting values for steps 4 and
5, press DATA/ENTER Key.
The Operator display is as shown on the left. The value is written-in.
After a few seconds, the Operator display is as shown on the left.
Rated Voltage
200 .
0 VAC
7
Rated Current
1 .
90 A
8 DATA
ENTER
RESET
DATA
ENTER
Press the keys as in steps 4, 5, 6 of rated voltage setting.
9
Rated Frequency
60 .
0 HZ
10
DATA
ENTER
RESET
DATA
ENTER
Press the keys as in steps 4, 5, 6 of rated voltage setting.
11
Rated Speed
1750 RPM
12
DATA
ENTER
RESET
DATA
ENTER
Press the keys as in steps 4, 5, 6 of rated voltage setting.
Note Rated voltage for vector control motors is approx. 10 to 20% lower than general--purpose motors. Verify motor voltage listed on the nameplate or the test report before use.
4
- 29
4
Setting User Constants
4.2.7 Autotuning Mode
Step
13
Key Sequence
14
15
DATA
ENTER
RESET
DATA
ENTER
16 DATA
ENTER
RESET
DATA
ENTER
Digital Operator Display
Number of Poles
4
Select Motor 1/2
1
Remarks
Press the keys as in steps 4, 5, 6 of rated voltage setting.
Press the keys as in steps 4, 5, 6 of rated voltage setting.
Leave the setting at 1 to set the value for motor 1 (the motor contacts normally used.)
Select “2” to store the autotuning results for motor 2.
17
18
RUN
Tuning Ready?
Press RUN Key
Tune Processing
Hz A
Tune Successful
19
MENU
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
Returns to the operation mode display.
Autotuning starts and the motor rotates for approx. one minute.
Then the motor stops automatically.
IMPORTANT If a fault occurs during autotuning, refer to Table NO TAG Troubleshooting Autotuning Faults.
- 30
4.2Modes
4.2.8 Modified Constants Mode
The modified constants mode is used to change or display user constants that have been changed from their factory-preset values.
When any user constants have been changed in programming mode (b1-01 through o2-08), press the
DATA/ENTER Key in modified constants mode to display these user constants. (The initialize mode user constants won’t be displayed.)
A EXAMPLE " Changing Frequency Reference 1 to 30.00 in Modified Constants Mode
In the following example, user constants C1-01 (Acceleration time 1) and d1-01 (Frequency reference 1) have been changed from their factory settings.
The settings for these two user constants are displayed, and the setting for d1-01 is changed from 60.00 Hz to 30.00 Hz while C1-01 is set to 20.0 seconds.
Step
1
Key Sequence
MENU
Digital Operator Display
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
Remarks
2
MC5 Main Menu
Modified Consts
3
DATA
ENTER
Accel Time 1
C1 -01 = 20 .
0 Sec
4
Frequency Ref 1 d1 -01 = 60 .
00 HZ
5
DATA
ENTER
Frequency Ref 1
060 .
00 HZ
6
RESET
Frequency Ref 1
060 .
00 HZ
Blinking digit moves 1 place to the right.
7 Frequency Ref 1
030 .
00HZ
8 press 3 times.
DATA
ENTER
30.00 Hz is written-in.
Entry Accepted
Frequency Ref 1 d1 -01 = 30 .
00 HZ
After a few seconds, the Operator display is as shown on the left.
9
ESC
MC5 Main Menu
Modified Consts
Preset reference 1 is changed to
30.00 Hz in the modified constants mode.
10
MENU
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
Returns to the operation mode display.
4
- 31
5
Trial Operation
This chapter describes the preparations and Digital Operator procedures for trial operation of the VS-626MC5 and provides an example of trial operation.
5.1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Trial Operation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2 Checking the Display Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.3 Initializing Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.4 Setting Input Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.5 Autotuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.6 No-load Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.7 Loaded Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 3
5 4
5 4
5 4
5 4
5 5
5 6
5 - 8
5 - 9
5
- 1
5
Trial Operation
WARNING
D Check to be sure that the front cover is attached before turning ON the power supply. Do not remove the front cover during operation.
An electric shock may occur.
D Do not come close to the machine when the fault reset function is used. If the alarmed is cleared, the machine may start moving suddenly. Also, design the machine so that human safety is ensured even when it is restarted.
Injury may occur.
D Provide a separate emergency stop switch; the Digital Operator’s STOP Key is valid only when its function is set.
Injury may occur.
D Reset alarms only after confirming that the RUN signal is OFF. If an alarm is reset with the RUN signal turned ON, the machine may suddenly start.
Injury may occur.
CAUTION
D Don’t touch the radiation fins (heat sink), braking resistor, or Braking Resistor Unit. These can become very hot.
Otherwise, a burn injury may occur.
D Be sure that the motor and machine is within the applicable ranges before starting operation.
Otherwise, an injury may occur.
D Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
Otherwise, an injury may occur.
D Don’t check signals while the Inverter is running.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
D Be careful when changing Inverter settings. The Inverter is factory set to suitable settings.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged. You must, however, you must set the power supply voltage jumper for 400 V class Inverters of 18.5 kW or higher (see 5.2.4).
- 2
5.1Procedure
5.1
Procedure
Perform trial operation according to the following operational flow.
Item
Installation and
Mounting
Contents
Install the Inverter according to the installation conditions.
S Ensure that the installation conditions are met.
Wiring and Connection
Connect to the power supply and peripheral devices.
Power ON
S Select peripheral devices which meet the specifications and wire correctly.
Carrying out the following pre-connection checks before turning ON the power supply:
S Always ensure that a power supply of the correct voltage is used and that the power input terminals (R, S, T) are wired correctly.
200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 230 VDC, 50/60 Hz
400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 460 VDC, 50/60 Hz
S Make sure that the Motor output terminals (U, V, W) and the Motor are connected correctly.
S Make sure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly. Make sure that all control circuit terminals are turned OFF.
S When using a PG Speed Control Card, ensure that it is wired correctly.
S Set the motor to no-load status, (not connected to the mechanical system).
Having conducted the above checks, connect the power supply.
Check the Display
Status
Check to be sure that there are no faults in the Inverter.
1
S If the display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:
Data Display: Frequency Ref
S When an fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed. In that case, refer to Section 9 Maintenance
Operations.
Setting the Input Voltage
Set the Inverter input voltage (E1-01) to the correct voltage.
Page
- 1
- 1
- 4
- 4
- 5
Set the Motor Set the proper motor protection (E1-02).
- 6
Autotuning
2
Execute autotuning for motor unit separately before open-loop vector control or Flux vector control operation..
- 6
S When autotuning is executed, motor constants are set automatically.
No-load Operation Start the no-load motor using the Digital Operator.
S Set the frequency reference using the Digital Operator and start the motor using key sequences.
- 8
Actual Load Operation
Connect the mechanical system and operate using the Digital Operator.
- 9
Operation
S When there are no difficulties using the no-load operation, connect the mechanical system to the motor and operate using the Digital Operator.
Basic Operation: Operation based on the basic settings required to start and stop the Inverter.
Advanced Operation: Operation which uses advanced functions.
S For operation within standard constants select “Basic Operation.”
S To use the various applied functions such as, direct current control braking, speed search, S-curve acceleration/ deceleration, slip compensation, torque compensation, and select “Advanced Operation” in combination with
“Basic Operation.”
NO TAG
NO TAG
* 1. It is sometimes necessary to initialize constants after checking the display status.
Initializing Constants Initialize the constants.
S Check the Inverter capacity setting (kVA) in o2-04 before replacing the controller PCB with a spare.
* 2. When motor cannot be disconnected from the load, motor constants can be set by calculations. Contact your YASKAWA representatives for details.
- 4
5
- 3
5
Trial Operation
5.2.1 Power ON
5.2
Trial Operation Procedures
5.2.1 Power ON
J
Checkpoints before Turning ON the Power Supply
D Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage.
200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 230 VDC, 50/60 Hz
400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 460 VDC, 50/60 Hz
D
D
D
D
D
Make sure that the motor output terminals (U, V, W) and the motor are connected correctly.
Make sure that the Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly.
Set all Inverter control circuit terminals to OFF.
When using a PG Speed Control Card, make sure that it is wired correctly.
Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system (no-load status)
5.2.2 Checking the Display Status
If the Digital Operator’s display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:
Normal
Frequency Ref
U1--01 = 0.00 HZ
The frequency reference monitor is displayed in the data display section.
When an fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case, refer to Section NO TAG Maintenance Operations. The following display is an example of a fault display.
Fault
UV
Under Voltage
The display will differ depending on the type of fault.
5.2.3 Initializing Constants
D When replacing the controller PCB, check the Inverter capacity (kVA) in o2-04 first and then initialize constants to the factory settings. There is no need to initialize constants the first time trial operation is performed after purchasing the Inverter.
D To initialize the constants, set “2220” in A1-03 (Initialize).
D After initialization, the access level is set to Quick-start (A1-01). The following table shows the setting method for Quick-start.
Use the following procedure to initialize constants.
Step Key Sequence Digital Operator Display Remarks
Frequency Ref
U1--01 = 0.00 HZ
1
MENU
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
Displays operation mode.
2
MC5 Main Menu
Initialize
Displays initialize mode.
3
DATA
ENTER
Select Language
English
Puts the Inverter in initialize mode.
4
Initialize
Select
Displays the Initialize display.
5
Press 3 times.
DATA
ENTER
A1-03 = 0
Select
Displays the constant setting for
A1-03.
6
A1-03 = 2220
2--wire Initial
Initializes for a 2-wire sequence.
7
DATA
ENTER Entry Accepted
Initialize
Select
Writes the set values. “Entry Accepted” is displayed for approximately
0.5 seconds.
Returns to the Initialize display.
8
ESC
MC5 Main Menu
Initialize
Returns to the initialize mode display.
- 4
5.2.4 Setting Input Voltage
J
Set the input voltage of the Inverter (E1-01) according to the power supply voltage.
Input Voltage: E1-01
Set the input voltage.
Change
User
Constant
Number
E1-01
Name
Input voltage setting
Operation
Setting
Range
155 to 255
(310 to 510)*
Unit
VAC
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
200
(400)*
Q Q
* Values in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters.
Use the following procedure to set a 200 V class Inverter to an input voltage of 230 V.
Step Key Sequence Digital Operator Display Remarks
Main Menu
Initialize
Displays initialize mode.
1 Main Menu
Programming
Displays programming mode.
2
DATA
ENTER
Frequency Ref
Terminal
Puts the Unit in programming mode.
3
Input Voltage
E1-01 = 200 VAC
Displays the input voltage setting display.
4
Press 10 times.
DATA
ENTER
Input Voltage
200 VAC
The leading digit will blink
5
RESET
Input Voltage
200 VAC
The 2nd digit will blink.
6 Input Voltage
230 VAC
Set to “3”
7
Press 3 times.
DATA
ENTER Entry Accepted
Input Voltage
E1-01 = 230 VAC
The set value is overwritten. “Entry
Accepted” is displayed for approximately 0.5 seconds.
Returns to the input voltage display.
Check that the data has been updated.
8
ESC
Main Menu
Programming
Returns to the programming mode display.
J
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW or
Higher)
Set the power supply voltage jumper after setting the input voltage constant (E1-01) for 400 V class Inverters of 18.5 kW or higher. Insert the jumper into the voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply voltage.
The jumper is factory-set to 440 V when shipped. If the power supply voltage is not 440 V, use the following procedure to change the setting.
1.
Turn OFF the power supply switch and wait for at least one minute (three minutes for models larger than 30 kW) before removing the front panel and setting the jumper.
2.
Remove the front cover.
3.
Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter (see Figure 5.1).
5
- 5
5
Trial Operation
5.2.5 Autotuning
4.
Replace the front cover.
23CN 24CN 25CN 26CN 22CN FU2
21CN
TB2
20CN r 380V 400/415V 440V 460V
J
Jumper
Fig
5.1
Setting the Power Supply Voltage (Illustration Above is for 400 V Class Inverter between 18.5 kW and 45 kW)
Motor Selection (Motor Overheating Protection): E1-02
Set the type of motor being used with the motor selection constant (E1-02). This setting is a reference for the motor overheat protection.
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
E1-02
Motor selection
(motor overheating protection)
0 to 2 -0 Q Q
D E1-02 Settings
Setting
0
1
2
Standard motor (general-purpose motor)
Special motor (inverter-exclusive motor)
Special motor (vector-exclusive motor)
Function
5.2.5 Autotuning
J
Autotuning Operation
Use the following procedure to autotune the motor constants, i.e., set them automatically.
Step Key Sequence Digital Operator Display
MC5 Main Menu
Programming
Remarks
Displays programming mode.
1 Displays autotuning mode.
2
3
4
5
6
DATA
ENTER
MC5 Main Menu
Auto--Tuning
Rated Voltage
200. 0 VAC
* 1
Rated Current
1. 90 A
* 1
Rated Frequency
60. 0 HZ
* 1
Rated Speed
1750 RPM
* 1
Number of Poles
4
* 1
Displays the rated voltage.
*2
Displays the rated current.
*2
Displays the rated frequency.
*2
Displays the rated speed.
*2
Displays the number of poles.
*2
7
8
9
RUN
Select Motor 1/2
1
Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN key
Tune Proceeding
HZ A
Displays the motor selection.
(Leave set at “1” for motor 1 (the normally used motor constants).)
Displays a confirmation prompt for the start of the autotuning function.
(The lower line will blink.)
Starts the autotuning function.
(The upper line will blink.)
- 6
Step Key Sequence Digital Operator Display
Tune Successful
Remarks
Indicates the completion of autotuning.
Returns to the operation mode display.
10
MENU
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
* 1. When the values displayed and the motor rated values differ, set each value separately.
* 2. There are differences between simple and advanced settings. Refer to the table below.
Operator Display
Simple Setting
(Motor nameplate)
Advanced Setting
Rated Voltage
Rated Frequency
Motor rated voltage
Motor rated frequency
No--load voltage at rated revolutions
No--load frequency at rated revolutions
Rated voltage for vector control motors is approx. 10 to 20% lower than general--purpose motors.
Always verify motor voltage listed on the nameplate or test report before use.
The following example procedure changes the motor rated current to 1.60 A.
Step Key Sequence Digital Operator Display
Rated Current
1. 90 A
Remarks
Displays the rated current.
1
2
DATA
ENTER
RESET
Press 3 times
Rated Current
001. 90 A
Rated Current
001. 90 A
When changing the set values, press the DATA/ENTER Key and the digit to change will blink.
Select the digit to be changed.
3
Rated Current
001. 60 A
Set to 001.60 A.
4
Press 3 times
DATA
ENTER Entry Accepted
Rated Current
1. 60 A
Press the DATA/ENTER Key to overwrite the set values. “Entry Accepted” will be displayed for approximately
0.5 seconds.
Returns to the rated current display.
Data Invalid
Resistance
No-load Current
Saturation -1
Saturation -2
Rated Slip
Accelerate
J
D
D
When autotuning has been executed correctly, the constants (E1-04 to E2-09) will be automatically written.
Use the following troubleshooting procedure is a fault occurs during autotuning.
Troubleshooting Autotuning Faults
Display Message
The displays and countermeasures for autotuning faults are shown below in Table 5.1. If one of these faults is detected, it will be displayed on the Operator and the motor will coast to a stop. The fault contact and alarm contact outputs will not function. When a fault occurs, “Tune Aborted” will be displayed and the messages shown in the following table will blink.
Table
5.1
Troubleshooting Autotuning Faults
Fault Description Countermeasure
Motor data fault Motor data error for autotuning.
S Check the input data.
S Check the Inverter and motor capacities.
Line resistance fault
No-load current fault
Saturated core coefficient 1 fault
Saturated core coefficient 2 fault
Rated slip fault
Autotuning was not completed within a set time.
S Check the input data.
S Check the motor wiring
Acceleration fault
The motor did not accelerate within a set time.
S Increase the acceleration time (C1-01).
S Increase the torque limits (L7-01, -02) if these have been decreased.
S Disconnect the motor from the machine if it has been connected.
5
- 7
5
Trial Operation
5.2.6 No-load Operation
Display Message
PG Direction
Motor speed
ALARM: Over Load
(Displayed after completion of autotuning)
Tune Aborted
Minor Fault:
Tune Aborted
V/f Over Setting
(Displayed after completion of autotuning)
Fault
Motor direction fault
Motor speed fault
Description
There is a contact fault between the Inverter, PG (phase A and B), and motor (phases U, V, and W)
The torque reference was too large
(100%) during autotuning.
The torque reference was over
20% during autotuning.
A minor Inverter fault occurred.
Countermeasure
S Check the PG wiring.
S Check the motor wiring.
S Check the PG direction and constant F1-05.
S Disconnect the motor from the machine if it has been connected.
S Increase the acceleration time (C1-01).
S Check the input data (particularly the number of PG pulses).
Check the input data (particularly the number of PG pulses) if the motor is being autotuned separately.
Check the minor fault indicated in the boxes in the display shown at the left.
Torque reference exceeded 100%, and no--load current exceeded
70%.
S
S
Check the setting.
Disconnect the motor from the load.
D
D
Fault displays can be cleared by pressing the MENU Key.
All set constants (motor constants) will be initialized if a fault occurs. Reset the constants from the beginning when before starting autotuning again.
5.2.6 No-load Operation
The section describes trial operation in which the motor is operated from the Digital Operator with the motor in the no-load state (with the motor not connected to the mechanical system).
J
Setting the Frequency Reference
Set the frequency reference on the frequency reference monitor in the operation mode.
The following is an operation example with the frequency reference set to 10 Hz.
Step Key Sequence Digital Operator Display
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
Remarks
Displays operation mode.
1
DATA
ENTER
Frequency Ref
U1-01 = 0.00 HZ
Puts the Unit in operation mode and displays the frequency reference.
2
3
LOCAL
REMOTE
DATA
ENTER
Frequency Ref
U1-01 = 0.00 HZ
Frequency Ref
000.00 HZ
Switches operation to the Digital Operator. (SEQ, REF and LED indicators turn OFF.)
Sets the frequency reference.
4
RESET
Frequency Ref
000. 00HZ
The tens digit blinks.
5
Frequency Ref
010. 00HZ
Set to 010.00 Hz.
6
Tuning overload fault
Minor fault
V/f Over Setting
DATA
ENTER Entry Accepted
The set values are overwritten.
Frequency Ref
010. 00 HZ
Returns to the frequency reference display.
- 8
J
Operation Using the Digital Operator
D
D
D
D
D
Press the RUN Key. The motor will start to rotate. (forward rotation)
Press the FWD/REV Key. The motor will rotate in the reverse direction.
Press the Stop Key. The motor will stop. (The RUN Key indicator will keep blinking until the motor stops.)
The frequency reference can be changed, even during operation. When this is done, the frequency reference is changed as soon as the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed to input the set values.
If the Jog Key is pressed when the Inverter is stopped, it will rotate by the jog frequency (Factory setting: 6.0 Hz) only while the Key is being pressed.
Checking the Operating Status
J
D
D
After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnormal sound from the motor.
Check that no faults have occurred in the Inverter during operation.
5.2.7 Loaded Operation
J
J
J
J
After checking the operation with the motor in no-load status as described in 5.2.6, connect the load mechanical system and perform trial operation with an actual load.
Connecting the Load System
D
D
After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.
Be sure to tighten all the screws when securing the motor shaft to the mechanical system.
Operation using the Digital Operator
D
D
D
Use the Digital Operator in the same way as in no-load operation.
If fault occurs during operation, make sure the STOP Key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible.
At first, set the frequency reference to a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed.
Checking Operating Status
D
D
Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow speed, increase the frequency reference.
After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnormal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display to ensure that the U1-03 (output current) is not excessive.
Adjusting AFR Gain
There are some guidelines to settle the motor vibrations or fluctuations when carrying a load.
D
D
Gradually increase the AFR gain (C8--08) while checking the motor response. If the motor still fluctuates or vibrates although C8--08 is set to 2.0, gradually increase the AFR time constant (C8--09) to 100 ms.
Increasing the torque compensation time constant (C4--02) may settle the motor vibrations. Changing constants C8--08, C8--09 and C4--02 may slow the speed and torque responses.
5
- 9
6
Basic Operation
This chapter explains the basic settings required to operate and stop the
VS-626MC5. The user constants described here will be sufficient for simple
Inverter.
Even when your application requires special functions, such as torque control or PID control, make these basic settings first and then go to the explanations of those special functions in chapter NO TAG Advanced Operation.
6 - 2 6.1
Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1 Setting the Access Level and Control Method: A1-01,
A1-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.2 Frequency Reference Settings: b1-01, H3-01, H3-08,
H3-09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.3 Frequency Reference from Digital Operator: b1-01, o1-03, d1-01 to d1-09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.4 Run Source and Sequence Input Responsiveness: b1-02, b1-06, b1-07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.5 Acceleration/Deceleration Times: C1-01 through
C1-08, C1-09, C1-10, C1-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.6 Prohibiting Reverse Operation: b1-04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.7 Selecting the Stopping Method: b1-03 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.8 Multi-function Input Settings: H1-01 through H1-06 . .
6.2
Open-loop Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1 Autotuning for general-purpose motors . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2 Autotuning for machine tool spindle motors . . . . . . . . .
6.2.3 Autotuning Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.
3 Flux Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.
3 .1 PG Speed Control Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.
3 .2 Setting the Zero-speed Operation Constants . . . . . . . . .
6.
3 .3 Autotuning for general-purpose motors . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.
3 .4 Autotuning for machine tool spindle motors . . . . . . . . .
6.
3 .5 Autotuning Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.
3 .6 Speed Control (ASR) Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.
3 .7 Speed Control (ASR) Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 2
6 - 4
6 -7
6 -9
6 1 0
6 1 1
6 1 2
6 1 2
6 1 7
6 1 7
6 1 8
6 2 1
6 2 2
6 2 2
6 - 25
6 - 27
6 - 29
6 3 1
6 3 2
6 3 4
6
- 1
6
Basic Operation
6.1.1 Setting the Access Level and Control Method: A1-01, A1-02
6.1
Common Settings
This section describes the constants that are used with all of the control methods.
6.1.1 Setting the Access Level and Control Method: A1-01, A1-02
J
Constant Access Level: A1-01
D Select the constant access level. This level determines which constants can be accessed and changed.
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
A1-01 Constant access level 0 to 4 -2 (Q) Q Q
D
2
Access Level Settings
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
Name
Operation Only
User Program
Quick-Start
Basic
Advanced
Function
Allows the operation mode and initialize mode to be displayed or changed. Use this setting to prevent constant settings from being changed.
Allows only the user-selected constants (up to 32) to be displayed or changed. Set the desired constants as “User Parameters” in constants
A2-01 through A2-32.
Allows the constants required to start the Inverter (about 25) to be displayed or changed.
Allows the commonly used constants to be displayed or changed.
Allows all constants to be displayed or changed.
D
D
The control method setting also affects which constants can be displayed and changed. Refer to chapter
NO TAG User Constant Lists.
The constants required for basic operation can be displayed and changed in the Basic level, but this section also describes constants that can be set only in the Advanced level, so set the access level to
Advanced.
Changing the Access Level
The following procedure shows how to change from Quick-Start to Advanced.
Step Key Sequence Digital Operator Display
1
Remarks
Displays operation mode.
MENU
MC5 Main Menu
Operation
MC5 Main Menu
Initialize
Displays initialize mode.
3
DATA
ENTER
Select Language
English
Puts the Unit in initialize mode.
(Select Language display)
4
Access Level
Quick-Start
Displays the Access Level (A1-01).
5
DATA
ENTER
A1-01 = 2
Quick-Start
Displays the constant setting for
A1-01.
6
A1-01 = 4
Advanced
Displays Advanced.
7
Depress Twice.
DATA
ENTER Entry Accepted
Writes the new setting.
Access Level
Advanced
Returns to the Access Level display.
- 2
J
Control Method: A1-02
D
D
Select one of the four control methods.
This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
A1-02
Control method selection
2 3 --
2
Open
Loop
Vector
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Q Q
D Control Method Settings
Setting Control Method
2
3
Open loop vector control
Flux vector control
Function
Vector control using the Inverter’s internal speed information
Vector control using a PG Speed Control Card
D The characteristics of each control method are shown in Table 6.1.
Table
6.1
Control Method Characteristics
Characteristic Open Loop Vector
Basic control method Current vector control without PG
Flux Vector
Current vector control with PG
Speed detector Not required
Required
(pulse generator)
Optional speed detectors
Not required PG-B2 or PG-X2
Speed control range
Starting torque
Speed control accuracy
Torque limit
1:100
150%/1 Hz
0.2%
Possible
S Variable speed drive applications.
1:1000
150%/0 r/min
0.02%
Example applications
Possible
S Simple servo drives.
S Precision speed control.
6
- 3
6
Basic Operation
6.1.2 Frequency Reference Settings: b1-01, H3-01, H3-08, H3-09
6.1.2 Frequency Reference Settings: b1-01, H3-01, H3-08, H3-09
These settings are required when inputting analog voltage or current signals from the control circuit terminals.
J
Frequency Reference Selection: b1-01
D Constant b1-01 is used to select the reference source.
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range b1-01 Reference selection 0 to 3
Unit
Setting
-1
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Q Q
D Settings
Setting
2
3
0
1
Reference source
Digital Operator
Control circuit terminals (analog inputs)
Transmission
Optional Card
J
D The frequency reference is input from the control circuit terminals (external terminals), so set b1-01 to 1.
Frequency Reference (Voltage), Terminal 13 Signal Level: H3-01
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
H3-01
Signal level selection
(terminal 13)
0 1 -0 B B
D
D
D
The frequency reference (voltage) is valid when constant b1-01 has been set to 1.
Set the voltage range for the frequency reference (voltage) signal.
Settings
Setting Function
0
1
0 to 10 VDC input [11--bit + polarity (positive/negative) input]
--10 to 10 VDC input
(A negative voltage is a reference for reverse rotation.)
J
Frequency Reference (Current), Terminal 14 Signal Level: H3-09, H3-08
D
D
Set terminal 14 to a frequency reference with constant H3-09 to use terminal 14 as the frequency reference terminal.
The frequency reference setting is 1F.
Function Selection: H3-09
Change
User
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
H3-09
Multi-function analog input (terminal 14)
1 to 1F -1F A A
D After setting constant H3-09, set terminal 14 signal level with H3-08.
Signal Level: H3-08
D
D
The frequency reference (current) is valid when constant b1-01 has been set to 1.
Set the signal level for the frequency reference (current).
Change
User
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
H3-08
Signal level selection
(terminal 14)
0 2 -2 A A
- 4
D Settings
Setting
0
1
2
Function
0 to 10 VDC input [10--bit input]
--10 to 10 VDC input
(A negative voltage is a reference for reverse rotation.)
4 to 20 mA input
D
D
D
D
When the terminal is being used as a voltage input terminal (setting 0 or 1), jumper J1 must be disconnected on the control board. (See Figure 6.1.) The terminal’s input resistor will be destroyed if the terminal is used for a voltage input with jumper J1 connected.
When frequency references are being input simultaneously from both the voltage terminal 13 and the current terminal 14, the final reference value will be the sum of the two references that are input.
To switch the frequency reference input between the voltage terminal 13 and the current terminal 14, set a value of 1F in any one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 through H1-06).
The voltage terminal 13 will be used when this multi-function input is OFF and the current terminal
14 will be used when this multi-function input is ON.
If a 0 to r
10 VDC input is set, H3-01 must also be set to a 0 to r
10 VDC input.
Jumper wire
J1
Control circuit terminals
11 12 ( G ) 13
1 2 3
14
4
15
5
16
6
17
7
25
8
26
21
27
22
33
23
18 19 20
9 10
R
L1
S
L2
Power input
T
L3
© ¨ 1 ¨ 2 B1 B2
Braking Resistor
U
T1
V
T2
W/T3
Motor output
CHARGE
Main circuit terminals
J
Fig
6.1
Terminal Arrangement of a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW
Function and Signal Level for Multi-function Analog Input (Terminal 16):
H3-04, H3-05
D
D
This function is useful when switching between two analog inputs. The input is from terminal 16.
When using the multi-function input (terminal 16) as the frequency reference terminal, first set the multi-function analog input function to “Auxiliary Reference” by setting constant H3-05 to 0.
Function for Multi-function Analog Input, Terminal 16: H3-05
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
H3-05
Multi-function analog input (terminal 16)
0 to 1F -0 B B
D
D
D
The auxiliary reference is factory-preset to 0.
After setting H3-05 to 0, set any one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 through H1-06) to a value of 3 (multi-step speed reference 1).
When a multi-function analog input has been set to “Auxiliary Reference,” it is treated as frequency reference 2 during multi-step speed operation, so it can’t be used unless the multi-step speed reference
1 has been set.
6
- 5
6
Basic Operation
6.1.2 Frequency Reference Settings: b1-01, H3-01, H3-08, H3-09
Signal Level for Multi-function Analog Input, Terminal 16: H3-04
D Set the signal level for the multi-function analog input.
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
H3-04
Signal level selection
(terminal 16)
0 1
Unit
--
Setting
0
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Function
0 to 10 VDC input [11--bit + polarity (positive/negative) input]
--10 to 10 VDC input
(A negative voltage is a reference for reverse rotation.)
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
B B
J
Adjusting Analog Inputs: H3-02, H3-03, H3-06, H3-07, H3-10, H3-11, H3-12
D There are three constants used to adjust the analog inputs: The gain, bias (both set separately for each input), and filter time constant (a single value for all of the inputs).
x The gain and bias can be adjusted separately for each analog input (terminals 13, 14, and 16).
Gain:
Bias:
Set the frequency corresponding to a 10 V (20 mA) input as a percentage of the maximum frequency. (The maximum output frequency set in E1-04 is 100%.)
Set the frequency corresponding to a 0 V (4 mA) input as a percentage of the maximum frequency. (The maximum output frequency set in E1-04 is 100%.) x Set the gains and biases for terminals 13, 14, and 16 as follows:
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
H3-02 Gain for terminal 13
0.0 to
1000.0
% 100.0
B B
H3-03
H3-10
H3-11
H3-06
H3-07
Bias for terminal 13
Gain for terminal 14
Bias for terminal 14
Gain for terminal 16*
Bias for terminal 16*
--100.0 to
100.0
0.0 to
1000.0
--100.0 to
100.0
0.0 to
1000.0
--100.0 to
100.0
%
%
%
%
%
0.0
100.0
0.0
100.0
0.0
B
A
A
B
B
B
A
A
B
B
* The settings for terminal 16 are valid only when the multi-function analog input has been selected. The gain and bias set here will be disregarded if a frequency reference is selected and the values set for terminal 13 will be used.
Frequency reference
Max. output frequency u Gain
100
Max. output frequency u Bias
100
0 V
( 4 mA )
Fig
6.2
Gain and Bias Chart
10 V
( 20 mA )
Use the current values shown in parentheses when current input has been selected.
Analog Input Filter Time Constant: H3-12
D A primary delay digital filter can be set for all three analog inputs (frequency reference (voltage), frequency reference (current), and multi-function analog input)
Change Valid Access Levels
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
H3-12
Analog input filter time constant
0.00 to 2.00
s 0.00
A A
D This setting is effective when there are sudden changes or noise in the analog input signal.
- 6
D Responsiveness decreases as the setting increases.
6.1.3 Frequency Reference from Digital Operator: b1-01, o1-03, d1-01 to d1-09
J
Frequency Reference Source: b1-01
D Select the reference source.
Constant
Number b1-01
Name
Reference selection
Change during
Operation
Range
0 to 3
Unit
Setting
-1
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Q
Flux Vector
Q
D Settings
Setting
0
1
2
3
Reference source
Digital Operator
Control circuit terminals (analog inputs)
Transmission
Optional Card
J
D The frequency reference is input from the Digital Operator, so set b1-01 to 0.
Frequency Unit for Reference Setting and Monitoring: o1-03
Change
User
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector o1-03
Frequency unit for reference setting and monitor
0 to 39999 -0 B B
D Settings
Setting
0
1
2 to 39
40 to 39999
Function
0.01 Hz units
0.01% units (The maximum frequency is 100%.) r/min units (Set the number of poles.) r/min = 120 frequency reference (Hz)/o1--03
(o1--03 sets the motor poles.)
Decimal point is set according to the 5th digit value of o1--03.
5th digit = 0: Displays
5th digit = 1: Displays
5th digit = 2: Displays .
.
5th digit = 3: Displays .
Setting values of 100% frequency are set according to the first to fourth digits of o1--03
[Example 1]
When the setting value (100% speed) is 200.0, o1--03 is set to 12000.
When o1--03 is set to 12000, 100% speed displays 200.0. 60% speed displays 120.0.
[Example 2]
When the setting value (100% speed) is 65.00, o1--03 is set to 26500.
When o1--03 is set to 26500, 60% speed displays 39.00.
D When the 40 to 39,999 range is used, any unit can be set for the reference frequency.
For example, the frequency reference can be displayed or set in units such as mm/s or m/min to coincide with the linear operating speed of the machine.
6
- 7
6
Basic Operation
6.1.3 Frequency Reference from Digital Operator: b1-01, o1-03, d1-01 to d1-09
J
Preset Frequency Reference Values: d1-01 through d1-09
User
Constant
Number d1-01 d1-02 d1-03 d1-04 d1-05 d1-06 d1-07 d1-08 d1-09
Name
Frequency reference 1
Frequency reference 2
Frequency reference 3
Frequency reference 4
Frequency reference 5
Frequency reference 6
Frequency reference 7
Frequency reference 8
Jog frequency reference
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
0 to 400.00
o1-03 0.00 Hz
0 to 400.00
o1-03 0.00 Hz
0 to 400.00
o1-03 0.00 Hz
0 to 400.00
o1-03 0.00 Hz
0 to 400.00
o1-03 0.00 Hz
0 to 400.00
o1-03 0.00 Hz
0 to 400.00
o1-03 0.00 Hz
0 to 400.00
o1-03 0.00 Hz
0 to 400.00
o1-03 6.00 Hz
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
B
B
B
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
B
B
B
B
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
B
D
D
D
D
D
The units for these values are set in o1-03.
The frequency reference default value and set value will change when o1-03 is changed.
For example, if preset reference 1 is set to 6.00 Hz and o1-03 is changed to 1 (0.01% units), the setting for preset reference 1 will become 10.00%.
When using preset references 2 through 8, be sure to set multi-step speed references 1, 2, and 3 in the multi-function inputs (H1-01 through H1-06) as required.
When using the jog function, set the jog frequency reference in constant d1-09. When jogging from an external terminal, set the multi-function inputs (H1-01 through H1-06) to “Jog Frequency Reference,” “Forward Jog,” or “Reverse Jog” as required.
The multi-function input setting is unnecessary when jogging from the Operator.
- 8
6.1.4 Run Source and Sequence Input Responsiveness: b1-02, b1-06, b1-07
J
Run Source: b1-02
Constant
Number b1-02
Name
Operation method selection
Change
Operation
Setting
Range
0 to 5
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
-1 Q Q
D
D
D
D
2
3
0
1
4
5
Constant b1-02 is used to select the source of the run command.
When a control circuit terminal (external terminal) is set, the Unit operates with 2-wire forward run/ stop and reverse run/stop control. (When the Unit has been initialized for a 3-wire control or a multifunction input is set to 0 (3-wire sequence), the Unit operates with 3-wire run, stop and forward/reverse controls.)
When using winding change function, set b1-02 to “5” (winding change sequence).
Settings
Setting Run source
Digital Operator
Control circuit terminals (external terminals)
Transmission
Optional Card
MEMOBUS transmission (for CP--717)
Winding change sequence
J
Sequence Input Responsiveness (Reading Twice): b1-06
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector b1-06
Read sequence input twice
0 1 -1 A A
D
D
Set the responsiveness of the control inputs (forward/reverse run and multi-function inputs)
Settings
Setting Function
0
1
Two scans every 2 ms (Use when connecting transistor outputs.)
Two scans every 5 ms (Use when connecting contact outputs or switches.)
J
D Set the responsiveness to match the type of control inputs being used. Use a setting of 1 if there is one or more contact inputs.
Operation after Switching to Remote Mode: b1-07
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector b1-07
Operation selection after switching to remote mode
0 1 -0 A A
D
D
Set the interlock operation to be used after switching from local mode (operation from Digital Operator) to remote mode (operation according to control circuit terminal).
Settings
Setting Function
0
1
No operation even if RUN signal is ON after switching to remote mode. (Operation will start if the RUN signal turns OFF and then back ON after switching to remote mode.)
Operate according to the RUN signal after switching to remote mode.
6
- 9
6
Basic Operation
6.1.5 Acceleration/Deceleration Times: C1-01 through C1-08, C1-09, C1-10, C1-11
6.1.5 Acceleration/Deceleration Times: C1-01 through C1-08, C1-09, C1-10, C1-11
This section describes setting the acceleration times, deceleration times, and emergency stop time.
J
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Unit: C1-10
Constant
Number
C1-10
Name
Accel/decel time setting unit
Change during
Operation
Range
0 1
Unit
Setting
-1
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
A
Flux Vector
A
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Function
Sets the acceleration/deceleration time unit to 0.01 seconds.
Sets the acceleration/deceleration time unit to 0.1 seconds.
J
D Set “0” to set more precise acceleration and deceleration times. (This will reduce the setting range.)
Acceleration/Deceleration Times: C1-01 through C1-08
D Set individual acceleration and deceleration times.
x An acceleration time is the time required to go from 0% to 100% of the maximum output frequency.
x A deceleration time is the time required to go from 100% to 0% of the maximum output frequency.
D Four acceleration times and four deceleration times can be set. When using acceleration/deceleration times 2 through 4, set multi-function inputs (H1-01 through H1-06) to the acceleration/deceleration time selectors 1 and 2.
Change Valid Access Levels
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
C1-01 Acceleration time 1
0.0 to
6000.0
s 10.0
Q Q
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-05
C1-06
C1-07
C1-08
Deceleration time 1
Acceleration time 2
Deceleration time 2
Acceleration time 3
Deceleration time 3
Acceleration time 4
Deceleration time 4
0.0 to
6000.0
0.0 to
6000.0
0.0 to
6000.0
0.0 to
6000.0
0.0 to
6000.0
0.0 to
6000.0
0.0 to
6000.0
s s s s s s s
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
Q
B
B
A
A
A
A
Q
B
B
A
A
A
A
J
D
D
The setting range for the acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting in C1-10 (acceleration/ deceleration time unit). The table shows the setting range when the factory setting is used for C1-10.
If C1-10 is set to “0” (0.01 s) the setting range will be 0.00 to 600.00 s.
Emergency Stop Time: C1-09
D
D
D
Sets the deceleration time that will be used when an emergency stop signal is input or a fault is detected.
The deceleration time is the time required to go from 100% to 0% of the maximum output frequency.
When using an emergency stop input, set a multi-function input (H1-01 through H1-06) to for an emergency stop.
The emergency stop time is effective for the following faults. Set a stopping method for each.
x Inverter overheating (OH) pre-alarm: Set in L8-03.
x Pulse generator faults: Set in F1-02 through F1-04.
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
C1-09 Emergency stop time
0.0 to
6000.0
s 10.0
B B
- 10
J
D
D
The setting range for the emergency stop deceleration time depends upon the setting in C1-10 (acceleration/deceleration time unit). The table shows the setting range when the factory setting is used for
C1-10.
If C1-10 is set to “0” (0.01 s) the setting range will be 0.00 to 600.00 s.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Switching Frequency: C1-11
D
D
When an acceleration/deceleration time switching frequency is set, the acceleration and deceleration times will be changed automatically as the frequency passes the set level.
If the acceleration/deceleration time selectors 1 and 2 are input via the multi-function inputs, they will have priority.
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
C1-11
Accel/decel time switching frequency
0.0 to 400.0
Hz 0.0
A A
Output frequency
Acc/Dec Time Switching Frequency (C1-11)
C1-07 C1-01 C1-02 C1-08
Acceleration/Deceleration Times 1 (C1-01 and C1-02) are used when the output frequency t C1-11
Acceleration/Deceleration Times 4 (C1-07 and C1-08) are used when the output frequency < C1-11
Fig
6.3
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Switching Frequency
6.1.6 Prohibiting Reverse Operation: b1-04
D
D
Set whether or not to operate the motor in reverse when a reverse reference is input.
Set this constant to “1” to disable reverse operation when necessary.
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector b1-04
Prohibition of reverse operation
0 -0 B B
D Settings
Setting
0 Allows reverse operation.
Function
6
- 11
6
Basic Operation
6.1.7 Selecting the Stopping Method: b1-03
6.1.7 Selecting the Stopping Method: b1-03
D Set the stopping method used when a stop command is input.
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit b1-03
Stopping method selection
0 --
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
0 Q Q
D Settings
Setting
0 Deceleration to stop
Function
D The following diagrams show the operation of the stopping method.
x Deceleration to Stop (b1-03 = 0)
Run command
ON OFF
Output frequency
Deceleration time
DC injection braking
Excitation level (b2-01)
DC injection braking time at stop (b2-04)
Decelerates to a stop at a rate set with the selected deceleration time.
Fig
6.4
Deceleration to Stop
6.1.8 Multi-function Input Settings: H1-01 through H1-06
D Set the functions for terminals 3 to 8. Set the functions of the multi-function inputs according to the application.
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
H1-01
Multi-function input 1
(terminal 3)
0 to 77 -24 B B
H1-02
H1-03
H1-04
H1-05
H1-06
Multi-function input 2
(terminal 4)
Multi-function input 3
(terminal 5)
Multi-function input 4
(terminal 6)
Multi-function input 5
(terminal 7)
Multi-function input 6
(terminal 8)
0 to 77
0 to 77
0 to 77
0 to 77
0 to 77
--
--
--
--
--
14
3 (0)
4 (3)
6 (4)
8 (6)
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
D
D
The default settings in parentheses are the default values when the Unit is initialized for 3-wire sequence control.
The constant settings that are used most often are explained below. Refer to chapter NO TAG Advanced
Operation or the constant tables for details on the other settings.
Set “0” S 3-wire sequence (forward/reverse run command):
S Multi-step sped references 1 to 3 and jog command:
S Acceleration/Deceleration Time Selectors 1 and 2:
Set “3” to “6”
Set “7” and “1A”
S Emergency Stop:
S FORWARD and REVERSE JOG References:
S Terminal 13/14 Switch:
Set “15”
Set “12” and “13”
Set “1F”
- 12
J
3-wire Sequence (Forward/Reverse Run Commands): “0”
D
D
When a value of “0” is set for any one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 through H1-06), 3-wire sequence control is used and the multi-function input terminal for which “0” was set becomes the forward/reverse run command terminal.
When the Unit is initialized for 3-wire sequence control with A1-03 , multi-function input 3 (terminal
5) becomes the input terminal for the forward/reverse run command.
Stop switch (NC) Run switch (NO)
1
2
5
11
Run command
(Operates when the run switch is closed.)
Stop command
(Stops when the stop switch is open.)
Forward/reverse command
(Multi-function input)
Sequential input common
Fig
6.5
3-wire Sequence Wiring Example
Run command
Stop command
Forward/reverse run command
50 ms min.
ON/OFF (Either is possible.)
OFF (Stop)
OFF (Forward) ON (Reverse)
Motor speed
Stop Forward
Fig
6.6
Timing Chart for 3-wire Sequence
Reverse Stop Forward
J
Multi-step Speed References 1 through 3 and JOG Reference: “3” to “6”
D
D
Eight frequency references and one jog frequency reference can be used.
Set the multi-step speed references 1, 2, and 3 and the JOG reference for the multi-function inputs, and change the status of these inputs to switch between the 9 frequency references.
Terminal Constant Setting Function
5
6
7
8
H1-03
H1-04
HI-05
H1-06
3
4
5
6
Multi-step speed reference 1 (Also used for master-speed/auxiliary-speed switching when an auxiliary reference is set for the multi-function analog input in H3-05.)
Multi-step speed reference 2
Multi-step speed reference 3
JOG reference (This setting has higher priority than the multi-step speed reference.)
6
- 13
6
Basic Operation
6.1.8 Multi-function Input Settings: H1-01 through H1-06
D The following table shows which frequency is selected by each possible combination of multi-step speed and JOG reference settings.
Terminal 5 Terminal 6 Terminal 7 Terminal 8
Multi-step speed reference 1
Multi-step speed reference 2
Multi-step speed reference 3
JOG reference
Selected frequency
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
--
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
--
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
--
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Reference 1: d1-01 (master speed frequency)
Reference 2: d1-02 (auxiliary speed frequency)
Reference 3: d1-03
Reference 4: d1-04
Reference 5: d1-05
Reference 6: d1-06
Reference 7: d1-07
Reference 8: d1-08
Jog frequency: d1-09
Selecting 1-step and 2-step Frequency References
D
D
D
D
To use the master frequency (analog terminal 13 or 14), set b1-01 to 1.
To use frequency reference 1 (d1-01), set b1-01 to 0.
To use the auxiliary frequency reference (analog terminal 16), use the factory setting.
To use frequency reference 2 (d1-02), set H3-05 to 1F.
Reference 8
Frequency reference
Reference 2
Auxiliary speed
Reference 3
Reference 1
Master speed
Reference 6
Reference 5
Reference 4
Reference 7
JOG frequency
RUN/STOP
ON
Multi-step speed reference 1
OFF
ON
Multi-step speed reference 2 OFF ON
Multi-step speed reference 3
JOG reference
OFF
ON
OFF ON
Fig
6.7
Timing Chart for Multi-step Speed and JOG References
OFF
- 14
Three-step Speed Operation Example
The following example shows three-step speed operation with frequencies set at Inverter constants.
D Sequence d1 03 d1 02 d1 01
Output frequency
CLOSED
Forward/reverse run command, terminal 1 or 2
Multi-step speed reference
1, terminal 5
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
Multi-step speed reference
2, terminal 6
D Connections
CLOSED
CLOSED
VS
-
626MC 5
R
S
T
R
S
T
U
V
W
IM
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
Multi-step speed reference 1
Multi-step speed reference 2
1
2
5
6
11
D User Constant Settings
Constant No.
A1-01 b1-01 d1-01 d1-02 d1-03
H1-03
H1-04
H3-05
Name
Constant access level
Reference selection
Frequency reference 1
Frequency reference 2
Frequency reference 3
Multi-function input (terminal 5)
Multi-function input (terminal 6)
Multi-function input (terminal 16)
Setting
3: Basic (B)
0: Operator
Hz frequency setting
Hz frequency setting
Hz frequency setting
3: Multi-step speed reference 1 (factory setting)
4: Multi-step speed reference 2 (factory setting)
1F: Not used
Terminal 6 would not be needed if 2-step speed operation were required.
6
- 15
6
Basic Operation
6.1.8 Multi-function Input Settings: H1-01 through H1-06
J
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Selectors 1 and 2: “7” and “1A”
D Four acceleration times and four deceleration times can be set. The multi-function inputs can be set as acceleration/deceleration time selectors 1 and 2 to switch between these acceleration and deceleration times.
Setting Function
7
1A
Acceleration/Deceleration time selector 1
Acceleration/Deceleration time selector 2
D The following table shows which acceleration and deceleration times are selected by each possible combination of acceleration/deceleration time selectors 1 and 2. The acceleration and deceleration times can be changed while the Inverter is operating.
Accel/Decel Time Selector 1
Accel/Decel Time Selector 2
Acceleration Time Deceleration Time
OFF or not set OFF or not set
ON
OFF or not set
ON
OFF or not set
ON
ON
Acceleration time 1
(C1-01)
Acceleration time 2
(C1-03)
Acceleration time 3
(C1-05)
Acceleration time 4
(C1-07)
Deceleration time 1
(C1-02)
Deceleration time 2
(C1-04)
Deceleration time 3
(C1-06)
Deceleration time 4
(C1-08)
J
Emergency Stop: “15” “17”
D
D
D
When the multi-function input that is set as an emergency stop is turned ON, the motor will decelerate to a stop at the rate set with the deceleration time in C1-09 (emergency stop time).
To clear the emergency stop, turn OFF the run command, turn OFF the emergency stop input, and then turn ON the run command again.
Set “17” to make the emergency stop the normally closed condition.
Setting Function
15
17
Emergency stop (normally open condition: Decelerates to stop when ON in the emergency stop period C1--09)
Emergency stop (normally closed condition: Decelerates to stop when OFF in the emergency stop period C1--09)
J
Forward and Reverse Jog Commands: “12” and “13”
The jogging can be performed in forward or reverse.
Setting
12
Function
Forward jog command: Runs forward at the jog frequency (d1-09).
13 Reverse jog command: Runs in reverse at the jog frequency (d1-09).
J
D
D
D
D
The forward jog and reverse jog commands have priority over other frequency reference commands.
The inverter will stop operation with the stopping method set in b1-03 if the forward jog and reverse jog commands are both ON for more than 500 ms.
Turn ON either the forward jog command or the reverse jog command, not both.
These jog commands can operate the Inverter independently. It isn’t necessary for a forward/reverse run command to be input.
Terminal 13/14 Switch: “1F”
D When this function is set for a multi-function input, that input terminal can be used to switch between terminal 13 and terminal 14.
OFF The analog input from terminal 13 is used as the master-speed frequency reference.
ON The analog input from terminal 14 is used as the master speed frequency reference.
D
D
When terminal 14 is used as the frequency reference, set “1F” (frequency reference) in constant H3-09; this constant is the function selector for frequency reference (current) terminal 14. A setting fault
(OPE03) will occur if this function is selected without setting “1F” in H3-09.
When H3-09 is set to “1F” (frequency reference) but none of the multi-function inputs is set to “1F”
(terminal 13/14 switch), the sum of the inputs from terminals 13 and 14 will be used as the masterspeed frequency reference.
- 16
6.2
Open-loop Vector Control
Open-loop vector control is vector control without a pulse generator input. Autotuning is the only setting for basic operation with open-loop vector control.
Always perform autotuning for motor unit separately before vector control operation.
To operate with the greatest speed precision near the rated speed, select a motor with a rated voltage that is at least 20 V below the Inverter’s input power supply voltage for 200 V class Inverters and 40 V below for 400 V class Inverters. When the input voltage is the same as the rated voltage, the voltage limit may be applied and vector control won’t be established.
6.2.1 Autotuning for general-purpose motors
CAUTION
D Do not connect a load to the motor when performing autotuning.
Doing so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
When motor cannot be disconnected from the load, motor constants can be setby calculation. Contact your
YASKAWA representatives for details.
Precautions before Autotuning
J
J
D
D
D
D
The Inverter’s autotuning function automatically determines the motor constants while a servo system’s autotuning function determines the size of a load, so these autotuning functions are fundamentally different.
If a load is connected when autotuning is performed, not only will incorrect motor constants be recorded, but the motor may operate erratically or unexpectedly. Disconnect the load before autotuning.
The motor shaft with rotate when autotuning is performed. Confirm safety before starting autotuning.
When motor cannot disconnected from the load, motor constants can be set by calculation. Contact your YASKAWA representatives for details.
Inverter Input Voltage Setting: E1-01
D Set the Inverter input voltage (E1-01) to match the power supply voltage.
Constant
Number
Name
Change
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
E1-01 Input voltage setting
155 to 255
(310 to 510) VAC
200
(400)
Q Q
J
D The voltage settings shown in parentheses are the values for the 400 V class. This setting is used as the reference value for functions such as the protection functions.
Motor Selection: E1--02
D Set the type of motor being used. This setting is a reference for overheating protection functions.
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
E1-02
Motor Selection
(motor overheating protection)
0 to 2 -0 Q Q
D Settings
Setting
0
1
2
Standard motor (general--pupose motor)
Special motor (inverter--exclusive motor)
Special motor (vector--exclusive motor)
Function
6
- 17
6
Basic Operation
6.2.2 Autotuning for machine tool spindle motors
J
Required Constant Settings
1.
Enter autotuning mode and make the following constant settings: x Rated Voltage x
Set the rated voltage (VAC) shown on the motor nameplate.
Rated Current
Set the rated current (A) shown on the motor nameplate.
Rated Frequency x x
Set the rated frequency (Hz) shown on the motor nameplate.
Rated Speed x
Set the rated speed (r/min) shown on the motor nameplate.
Number of Poles x
Set the number of poles.
Motor Selection
Select motor 1 or motor 2. (Normally select motor 1.)
2.
The following message will appear when the constants have been set:
Tuning Ready?
Press RUN Key
The “Press RUN Key” message will blink.
J
3.
At this point, it is still possible to change the constant settings by pressing the Increment and Decrement Keys to display the desired constant.
4.
Press the STOP Key to cancel autotuning, and then press the MENU Key and DATA/ENTER Key. The operation mode display will appear.
* Rated voltage for vector control motors is approx. 10 to 20% lower than general--purpose motors. Always verify motor voltage listed on the nameplate or test report before use.
Performing Autotuning
D
D
D
Autotuning will start if the RUN Key is pressed when the “Tuning Ready?” message is being displayed.
The motor will operate during autotuning, so be sure that it is safe for the motor to operate before presing the RUN Key.
The following message will be displayed when the RUN Key is pressed:
Tune Proceeding
Hz A
The “Tune Proceeding” message will blink.
D
D
D
Autotuning takes up to 1.5 minutes. The message “Tune Successful” will be displayed when autotuning has been completed.
If autotuning has been completed successfully, press the MENU Key and proceed to the next operation.
If a fault occurred during autotuning, refer to 6.2.3 Autotuning Faults for details on correcting the cause of the fault and perform autotuning again.
6.2.2 Autotuning for machine tool spindle motors
CAUTION
D Do not connect a load to the motor when performing autotuning.
Doing so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
J
Precautions before Autotuning
D
D
D
D
The VS-626MC5’s autotuning function automatically determines the motor constants while a servo system’s autotuning function determines the size of a load, so these autotuning functions are fundamentally different.
If a load is connected when autotuning is performed, not only will incorrect motor constants be recorded, but the motor may operate erratically or unexpectedly. Please disconnect load before performing autotuning.
The motor shaft will rotate when autotuning is performed. Confirm safety before starting autotuning.
For winding change motors, conduct autotuning of motor 1 and 2.
- 18
J
Acquisition of Motor Data
D
D
D
When autotuning motors for machine tool spindles, it is necessary to check the following data for the winding motors (Y-and - windings).
D
D
D
D
D
D
No-load voltage at base speed
Rated current at base speed
No-load frequency at base speed
Base speed(r/min)
Number of poles
No-load frequency at max. speed
No-load voltage at max. speed
Rated voltage (with 100% load)
Leakage inductance (L = L1 + L2)
Refer to Fig. 6.8 for details.
R1 L1 R2/s L2
Rm
Lm
R1 Primary resistance
R2 Secondary resistance
S Slip
Rm Iron loss resistance
Lm excitation inductance
Fig
6.8
Motor equivalent circuit (One phase, Example of Y-winding)
J
Constant setting prior to autotuning
Following constants must be set before performing autotuning.
D Motor leak inductance (E2-06)
Set motor leak inductance using the following formula.
Setting by the motor leak inductance L (= L1 + L2)
( E2 – 06 )
2 Q Rated frequency at base speed ( Hz ) L ( H ) Rated current at base speed ( A )
No–load voltage at base speed( V )
Note:Refer to Fig. 6.8 for details of leakage inductance “ L”.
Setting by the lock test values
(E2–06)
¯
(Vs 2
3Is 2 ) (Ps
3Is 2 ) 2 Rated current at base speed (A)
No–load voltage at base speed (V)
100 ( % )
100(%)
Vs Lock test voltage V
Is Lock test current A
Ps Lock test loss W
The result of the above formula should be from 5 to 25%. Verify the data when the obtained results are too large (or small).
D Carrier frequency
Set carrier frequency to 5.0 kHz.
Carrier frequency during autotuning: C8-30=1 (Carrier frequency is set to a value as set in C6-01)
Carrier frequency upper limit: C6-01=5.0 kHz
6
- 19
6
Basic Operation
6.2.2 Autotuning for machine tool spindle motors
J
Required Constant Settings
1.
Enter autotuning mode and make the following constant settings: x x x x x x
Rated Voltage
Set the rated voltage (VAC) at the base speed(r/min).
Rated Current
Set the rated current (A) at the base speed(r/min).
Rated Frequency
Set the rated frequency (Hz) at the base speed.
Rated Speed(r/min)
Set the rated speed (r/min) at the base speed.
Number of Poles
Set the number of poles.
Motor Selection
Select motor 1 or 2.
2.
The following message will appear when the constants have been set:
Tuning Ready?
Press RUN Key
The “Press RUN Key” message will blink.
J
3.
At this point, it is still possible to change the constant settings by pressing the
Increment ( ) and Decrement ( ) Keys to display the desired constant.
4.
Press the STOP Key to cancel autotuning, and then press the MENU Key and DATA/ENTER Key.
The operation mode display will appear.
Performing Autotuning
D
D
D
Autotuning will start if the Run Key is pressed when the “Tuning Ready?” message is being displayed.
The motor will operate during autotuning, so be sure that it is safe for the motor to operate before pressing the RUN Key.
The following message will be displayed when the Run Key is pressed:
Tune Proceeding
Hz A
The “Tune Proceeding” message will blink.
J
D
D
D
D
Autotuning takes up to 1.5 minutes. The message “Tune Successful” will be displayed when autotuning is completed.
When autotuning has been completed successfully, record the motor constants. Repeat autotuning for three times and set to the resulting average (value).
If a fault occurred during autotuing, refer to 6.2.3 Autotuning Faults for details on correcting the cause of the fault and perform autotuning again.
After autotuning of Motor 1 is completed, perform autotuning of Motor 2 using the same procedures.
Adjustment after autotuning
Adjust the following constants when autotuning has completed.
x x
Max. frequency (E1-04) : No-load frequency at the maximum speed (Hz).
Max. voltage (E1-05) = No--load voltage at maximum speed (V)
- 20
6.2.3 Autotuning Faults
Fault Display
Data Invalid
(Motor data fault)
ALARM: Over Load
(Motor speed fault)
Accelerate
Rated Slip
(Rated slip fault)
Saturation -1
(Iron core saturation coefficient
1 fault)
Saturation -2
(Iron core saturation coefficient
2 fault)
Resistance
(Line-to-line resistance fault)
No-load Current
(No-load current fault)
Tune Aborted
Minor Fault:
D
D
D
One of the fault messages in the following table will be displayed if a fault occurs during autotuning and the motor will stop. In this case, determine the cause of the fault, correct it, and perform autotuning again.
The fault display can be cleared by pressing the MENU Key.
The motor constants will revert to their default settings if a fault occurs. Set these constants again before starting autotuning again.
Table
6.2
Troubleshooting Autotuning Faults for Open-loop Vector Control
There was a fault in the data set during autotuning.
Probable Cause
There was a fault in the relationship between the rated frequency, rated speed, and number of poles.
A load is connected to the motor.
Remedy
Change the settings to conform to the following equation:
Rated speed < 120 u Motor frequency/Number of poles
Remove the load.
The effective load factor exceeded 20% during autotun-
The torque reference value exceeded 100% during autotuning.
There was a setting fault during autotuning.
Check the rated current setting. Change if necessary.
There is a motor bearing problem.
There is a broken/disconnected motor power wire.
A load is connected to the motor.
Turn the Inverter off and rotate the motor by hand.
Replace the motor if it doesn’t turn smoothly.
Check and replace wiring components if necessary.
Remove the load.
Initialize the torque limit constants (H7-01 to
H7-04).
The motor doesn’t accelerate within the prescribed time.
The torque limit function is operating.
The acceleration time is too short.
A load is connected to the motor.
The rated slip setting can’t be tuned within the prescribed time.
A load is connected to the motor.
Increase acceleration time 1 (C1-01).
Remove the load.
Remove the load.
The core-saturation coeffithe prescribed time.
The motor terminal resist-
The rated current setting isn’t correct.
Check and change the setting if necessary.
ting can’t be tuned within the prescribed time.
There is a broken/disconnected motor power wire.
Check and replace wiring components if necessary.
---
The rated current setting isn’t correct.
Check and change the setting if necessary.
There is a broken/disconnected motor power wire.
A minor Inverter fault occurred.
Check and replace wiring components if necessary.
Check the minor fault indicated in the boxes in the display shown at the left.
Tune Aborted
V/f Over Setting of autotuning)
Torque reference exceeded
100%, and no--load current exceeded 70%.
Rated voltage and rated frequency settings are not correct.
The load is connected to the motor.
Check the setting and correct any problems.
Disconnect the motor from the load.
6
- 21
6
Basic Operation
6.3.1 PG Speed Control Card Settings
6.3
Flux Vector Control
With flux vector control (vector control with PG), make the settings for the PG Speed Control Card, select the zero-speed operation method, set the various autotuning constants, and then adjust the gain of the speed control loop.
Always perform auto--tuning for motor unit separately before vector control operation. Vector control is not effective without autotuning.
To ensure high-accuracy speed control, use a motor specifically designed for vector control with an integrated
PG.
When setting up a PG (encoder), connect it directly to the motor shaft. If the PG is connected to the motor via gearing or belts, responses can be delayed by backlash or torsion; the delayed responses can generate oscillation and make control impossible.
When continuously operating the unit at low speeds with a heavy load, reduce the carrier frequency (C6--01) to 2 kHz.
6.3.1 PG Speed Control Card Settings
J
Available PG Speed Control Cards
J
D
D
There are 4 models of PG Speed Control Cards, but only 2 models can be used with vector control.
x PG-B2: Phase-A/Phase-B pulse inputs, complementary output x PG-X2: Phase-A/Phase-B/Phase-Z pulse inputs, line drivers
Select the Card according to the application and install it in the Inverter as described in 3.7 Installing
and Wiring PG Speed Control Cards.
PG Constant: F1-01
D
D
Set the PG (pulse generator or encoder) constant in pulses/revolution.
Set the number of phase-A or phase-B pulses in one motor revolution.
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
F1-01 PG constant 0 to 60000 p/r 600
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Q
J
PG Rotation Direction: F1-05
D This constant is used to coordinate the PG’s rotation direction with the motor’s rotation direction.
The setting for the standard applicable Yaskawa PG (made by Thermtac) is an advanced phase A for forward rotation.
D
D
Generally, phase A leads when the PG rotates in the clockwise direction (looking from the input axis).
When a forward reference is output, the motor rotates in the counterclockwise direction (looking from the output axis).
Set whether phase A or phase B leads when the motor operates in the forward direction.
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
F1-05 PG rotation 0 1 -0 B
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Function
Phase A leads with forward rotation. (Phase B leads with reverse rotation.)
Phase B leads with forward rotation. (Phase A leads with reverse rotation.)
- 22
VS-626MC5
Forward
Motor PG (encoder)
Setting: 0
Pulse output
Setting: 1
D
Phase A
Phase B
Phase A
Phase B
Forward rotation in a typical motor (applicable Yaskawa PG: made by Thermtac):
Forward
The motor output shaft rotates in the counterclockwise direction with a forward inverter reference.
Forward rotation
Phase A
Phase B
D Phase A leading in a typical PG:
Phase A leads when the input axis rotates clockwise.
Phase A
Phase B
Fig
6.9
PG Rotation Direction Setting
J
PG Pulse Output Monitor Division Rate: F1-06
D
D
This constant is effective only when a PG-B2 PG Control Card is used.
It sets the division ratio used when the pulse monitor output is connected to a pulse input device.
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
F1-06
PG division rate (PG pulse monitor)
1 to 132 -1 B
D The first digit in the setting (0 or 1) is n and the second two digits (01 to 32) are m. The division ratio is calculated from n and m with the following equation:
Setting Ranges n: 0, 1 m: 1 to 32 Division ratio = ( 1 + n )/m
F1-06 = n m
J
D Possible division rate settings are as follows: 1/32
%
F1-06
%
1. For example, if the division rate is
1/2 (a setting of “2”), the monitor output will be half of the number of pulses output from the PG.
Fault Detection Functions: F1-02 to F1-04, F1-08 to F1-11, F1-14
PG Disconnection Stopping Method: F1-02, F1-14
D Sets the PG open-circuit detection time and stopping method that is used when a break is detected in the PG cable (PGO).
Change
User
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
F1-02
Operation selection at
PG open circuit
0 to 3 -1 B
F1-14
PG open-circuit detection time
0.0 to 10.0
s 2.0
A
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Function
Deceleration to stop using deceleration time 1 (C1-02).
Coast to stop
6
- 23
6
Basic Operation
6.3.1 PG Speed Control Card Settings
Setting
2
3
Function
Emergency stop using the emergency-stop time (C1-09).
Continue operation (PGO is displayed, and continues operation.)
Overspeed Settings: F1-03, F1-8, F1-09
D
D
Overspeed refers to an excessive motor speed.
Set the conditions (level and time) for detecting overspeed and the stopping method that is used when an overspeed is detected.
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
F1-03
Operation selection at overspeed
0 to 3 -1 B
F1-08
Overspeed detection level
0 to 120 % 115 A
F1-09
Overspeed detection delay time
0.0 to 2.0
s 0.0
A
D Settings
Setting
2
3
0
1
Function
Deceleration to stop using deceleration time 1 (C1-02).
Coast to stop
Emergency stop using the emergency-stop time (C1-09).
Continue operation (OS is displayed, and continues operation.)
D F1-08 and F1-09 Settings
Constant F1-08 sets the overspeed detection level as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Constant F1-09 sets the length of time in seconds that the motor speed must exceed the overspeed detection level in order to generate an overspeed fault.
PG Speed Deviation Settings: F1-04, F1-10, F1-11
D PG speed deviation refers to the difference between the actual motor speed and the reference speed.
D These constants set the conditions (level and time) for detecting PG speed deviation and the stopping method that is used when a PG speed deviation is detected.
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
F1-04
F1-10
F1-11
Operation selection at deviation
Excessive speed deviation detection level
Excessive speed deviation detection delay time
0 to 3
0 to 50
0.0 to 10.0
--
% s
3
10
0.5
B
A
A
D Settings (F1-04)
Setting
0
Function
Deceleration to stop using deceleration time 1 (C1-02).
1
2
3
Coast to stop
Emergency stop using the emergency-stop time (C1-09).
Continue operation (Displays “DEV” and continues control.)
D F1-10 and F1-11 Settings
Constant F1-10 sets the PG speed deviation detection level as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. Constant F1-11 sets the length of time in seconds that the difference between the motor speed and reference speed must exceed the PG speed deviation detection level in order to detect a PG speed deviation (DEV).
- 24
6.3.2 Setting the Zero-speed Operation Constants
J
D
D
With flux vector control, operation is possible even when the frequency reference is zero (below the minimum output frequency).
Set the operation methods for the minimum output frequency.
Stopping Method Selection: b1-03
D Set the stopping method used when a stop command is input.
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Range
Unit b1-03 Stopping method selection
0 to 3 --
Setting
0
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Q
Flux Vector
Q
D Settings
Setting
2
3
0
1
Function
Deceleration to stop
Coast to stop
DC injection braking stop (This setting can’t be made with flux vector control.)
Coast to stop with timer (This setting can’t be made with flux vector control.)
J
Zero-speed Operation: b1-05 and Minimum Output Frequency: E1-09
D Set the operation method used when the frequency reference is below the minimum output frequency.
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector b1-05
Operation selection for setting of E1-09 or less
0 to 3 -0 A
D Settings
Setting
2
3
0
1
Function
Operate according to the frequency reference. (E1-09 is invalid.)
Interrupt the output. (Coast when the frequency reference is below E1-09.)
Operate at E1-09 frequency. (Output the frequency set in E1-09.)
Zero-speed operation (Zero reference value when the frequency reference is below E1-09.)
Minimum Output Frequency (FMIN): E1-09
D Set the minimum output frequency according to the requirements of the application.
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
E1-09 Min. output frequency 0.0 to 400.0
Hz 0.0
Q A
6
- 25
6
Basic Operation
6.3.2 Setting the Zero-speed Operation Constants
J
Initial Excitation Settings: b2-01, b2-03, b2-04
D Set the zero speed level, DC injection braking time at startup, and the DC injection braking time when stopping.
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector b2-01
Zero speed level (DC injection braking starting frequency)
0.0 to 10.0
Hz 0.5
B B b2-03 b2-04
DC injection braking time at start
DC injection braking time at stop
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 to
10.00
s s
0.00
0.50
B
B
B
B
D
D
D
With flux vector control, the DC injection braking function is replaced by the initial excitation function and zero speed function.
The timing of the initial excitation function depends on the zero-speed operation method selected in b1-05 (zero-speed operation), as shown in Figure 6.10.
The initial excitation function stops a motor that is rotating because of inertia.
ON
OFF
Run command
Frequency reference from analog input
0
D b1-05 = 0
(RUN at Frequency
Ref)
Initial excitation
D b1-05 = 1
(STOP)
BB (Baseblock)
Initial excitation from E1-09
E1-09
Inverter internal frequency reference
(Soft start input)
After the run command goes
OFF, zero-speed control is performed for the time set in b2-04 when the motor speed drops below b2-01.
BB
After the frequency reference falls below E1-09, initial excitation starts when the motor speed drops below b2-01.
D b1-05 = 2
(RUN at Min Frequency)
Initial excitation
BB
D b1-05 = 3
(RUN at Zero RPM)
Initial excitation
BB
BB
After the run command goes
OFF, zero-speed control is performed for the time set in b2-04 when the motor speed drops below b2-01.
BB
After the run command goes
OFF, zero-speed control is performed for the time set in b2-04 when the motor speed drops below b2-01.
BB
Fig
6.10
Zero speed Zero speed BB
Settings for Initial Excitation and Zero-speed Control
D
D
D Initial excitation is started from b2-01 (zero speed level) when decelerating. A setting of b2-01 < E1-09 is valid only with flux vector control.
The current level for the initial excitation function is set in E2-03 (motor no-load current).
The DC injection braking current (b2-02) isn’t used with flux vector control and can’t be set.
- 26
6.3.3 Autotuning for general-purpose motors
Autotuning for general purpose motors
CAUTION
D Do not connect a load to the motor when performing autotuning.
Doing so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
When motor cannot be disconnected from the load, motor constants can be set by calculation. Contact your
YASKAWA representatives for details.
J
J
Precautions Before Autotuning
D
D
D
D
The Inverter’s autotuning function automatically determines the motor constants while a servo system’s autotuning function determines the size of a load, so these autotuning functions are fundamentally different.
If a load is connected when autotuning is performed, not only will incorrect motor constants be recorded, but the motor may operate erratically or unexpectedly. Disconnect the load before autotuning.
The motor shaft will rotate when autotuning is performed. Confirm safety before starting autotuning.
When motor cannot be disconnected from the load, motor constants can be set by calculation. Contact your YASKAWA representatives for details.
Inverter Input Voltage Setting: E1-01
D Set the Inverter input voltage to match the power supply voltage.
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
E1-01 Input voltage setting
155 to 255
(310 to 510)
VAC
200
(400)
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Q Q
J
D
D
The voltage settings shown in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters.
This setting is used as the reference value for functions such as the protection functions.
Motor Selection (Motor Overheating Protection): E1--02
D Set the type of motor being used. This setting is a reference for overheating protection functions.
Constant
Number
Name
Change
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
E1-02
Motor selection (motor overheating protection)
0 to 2 -0 Q Q
D Settings
Setting
0
1
2
Standard motor (general--purpose motor)
Special motor (inverter--exclusive motor)
Special motor (vector--exclusive motor)
Function
6
- 27
6
Basic Operation
6.3.3 Autotuning for general-purpose motors
J
Required Constant Settings
1.
Enter autotuning mode and make the following constant settings: x x x x x x x
Rated Voltage *
Set the rated voltage (VAC) shown on the motor nameplate.
Rated Current
Set the rated current (A) shown on the motor nameplate.
Rated Frequency
Set the rated frequency (Hz) shown on the motor nameplate.
Rated Speed
Set the rated speed (r/min) shown on the motor nameplate.
Number of Poles
Set the number of poles.
Motor Selection
Select motor 1 or motor 2. (Normally select motor 1.).
PG Pulses/Rev:
Set the number of A-phase or B-phase pulses per revolution.
2.
The following message will appear when the constants have been set:
Tuning Ready?
Press RUN key
The “Press RUN Key” message will blink.
J
3.
At this point, it is still possible to change the constant settings by pressing the Increment and Decrement Keys to display the desired constant.
4.
Press the STOP Key to cancel autotuning, and then press the MENU Key and DATA/ENTER Key. The operation mode display will appear.
* Rated voltage for vector control motors is approx. 10 to 20% lower than general--purpose motors. Always verify motor voltage listed on the nameplate or test report before use.
Performing Autotuning
D
D
D
Autotuning will start if the Run Key is pressed when the “Tuning Ready?” message is being displayed.
The motor will operate during autotuning, so be sure that it is safe for the motor to operate before pressing the Run Key.
The following message will be displayed when the Run Key is pressed:
Tune Proceeding
Hz A
The “Tune Proceeding” message will blink.
D
D
D Autotuning takes up to 1.5 minutes. The message“Tune Successful” will be displayed when autotuning is completed.
If autotuning has been completed successfully, press the Menu Key and proceed to the next operation.
If a fault occurred during autotuning, refer to Table 6.3 Autotuning Faults for details on correcting the cause of the fault and perform autotuning again.
- 28
6.3.4 Autotuning for machine tool spindle motors
CAUTION
D Do not connect a load to the motor when performing autotuning.
Doing so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
J
Precautions before Autotuning
J
D
D
D
D
The VS-626MC5’s autotuning function automatically determines the motor constants while a servo system’s autotuning function determines the size of a load, so these autotuning functions are fundamentally different.
If a load is connected when autotuning is performed, not only will incorrect motor constants be recorded, but the motor may operate erratically or unexpectedly. Please disconnect load before performing autotuning.
The motor shaft will rotate when autotuning is performed. Confirm safety before starting autotuning.
For winding change motors, conduct autotuning of motor 1 and 2.
Acquisition of Motor Data
When autotuning motors for machine tool spindles, it is necessary to check the following data for the winding motors (Y- and - windings).
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Leakage inductance (L = L1 + L2)
Refer to Fig.6.11 for details.
Rated frequency at base speed (Hz)
Rated current at base speed (A)
No-load voltage at base speed (V)
No-load frequency at base speed (Hz)
Base speed (r/min)
Number of poles
No-load frequency at max. speed (Hz)
No-load voltage at max. speed (V)
R1 L1 R2/s L2
Rm
Lm
R1 Primary resistance
R2 Secondary resistance
S Slip
Rm Iron loss resistance
Lm Excitation inductance
Fig
6.11
Motor equivalent circuit (For one phase, Converted to Y-winding)
6
- 29
6
Basic Operation
6.3.4 Autotuning for machine tool spindle motors
J
Constant setting prior to autotuning
Following constants must be set before performing autotuning.
D Motor leak inductance (E2-06)
Set motor leak inductance using the following formula.
Setting by the motor leak inductance L (= L1 + L2)
( E2 – 06 )
2 Q
Rated frequency at base speed ( Hz ) L ( H ) Rated current at base speed ( A )
No–load voltage at base speed ( V )
Note : Refer to Fig.6.11 for details of leakage inductance “L”.
Setting by the lock test values
(E2–06)
¯
(Vs 2
3Is 2 ) (Ps
3Is 2 ) 2 Rated current at base speed (A)
No–load voltage at base speed (V)
100 ( % )
100(%)
Vs Lock test voltage V
Is Lock test current A
Ps Lock test loss W
J
The result of the above formula should be from 5 to 25%. Verify the data when the obtained results are too large (or small).
D Carrier frequency
Set carrier frequency to 5.0 kHz.
Carrier frequency during autotuning: C8-30=1 (Carrier frequency is set to a value as set in C6-01)
Carrier frequency upper limit: C6-01=5.0 kHz
Required Constant Settings
1.
Enter autotuning mode and make the following constant settings: x x x x x x x
Rated Voltage
Set the rated voltage (VAC) at the base speed(r/min).
Rated Current
Set the rated current (A) at the base speed(r/min).
Rated Frequency
Set the rated frequency (Hz) at the base speed.
Rated Speed(r/min)
Set the rated speed (r/min) at the base speed.
Number of Poles
Set the number of poles.
Motor Selection
Select motor 1 or 2.
Number of PG pulse
Set the number PG pulse.
2.
The following message will appear when the constants have been set:
Tuning Ready?
Press RUN Key
The “Press RUN Key” message will blink.
J
3.
At this point, it is still possible to change the constant settings by pressing the
Increment ( ) and Decrement ( ) Keys to display the desired constant.
4.
Press the STOP Key to cancel autotuning, and then press the MENU Key and DATA/ENTER Key.
The operation mode display will appear.
Performing Autotuning
D
D
D
Autotuning will start if the Run Key is pressed when the “Tuning Ready?” message is being displayed.
The motor will operate during autotuning, so be sure that it is safe for the motor to operate before pressing the RUN Key.
The following message will be displayed when the Run Key is pressed:
Tune Proceeding
Hz A
The “Tune Proceeding” message will blink.
D
D
Autotuning takes up to 1.5 minutes. The message “Tune Successful” will be displayed when autotuning is completed.
When autotuning has been completed successfully, record the motor constants. Repeat autotuning for three times and set to the resulting average (value).
- 30
J
D
D
If a fault occurred during autotuing, refer to 6.3.5 Autotuning Faults for details on correcting the cause of the fault and perform autotuning again.
After autotuning of Motor 1 is completed, perform autotuning of Motor 2 using the same procedures.
Adjustment after autotuning
1.
Adjust the following constants when autotuning has completed.
x x
Max. frequency (E1-04) : No-load frequency at the maximum speed (Hz)
Max. voltage (E1-05) = No-load voltage at maximum speed (V)
2.
Adjust the ASR gain (C5-01, C5-03) within the range below.
(C5-01C5-03) = Factory setting (20.00) factory setting Max. Speed/ base speed
6.3.5 Autotuning Faults
Fault Display
Data Invalid
(Motor data fault)
ALARM: Over Load
(Motor speed fault)
Accelerate
Rated Slip
(Rated slip fault)
Saturation -1
(Iron core saturation coefficient
1 fault)
Saturation -2
(Iron core saturation coefficient
2 fault)
Resistance
(Line-to-line resistance fault)
No-load Current
(No-load current fault)
D
D
D
One of the fault messages in the following table will be displayed if a fault occurs during autotuning and the motor will stop. In this case, determine the cause of the fault, correct it, and perform autotuning again.
The fault display can be cleared by pressing the MENU Key.
The motor constants will revert to their default settings if a fault occurs. Set these constants again before starting autotuning again.
Table
6.3
Troubleshooting Autotuning Faults for Flux Vector Control
There was a fault in the data set during autotuning.
Probable Cause
The effective load factor ex-
There was a fault in the relationship between the rated frequency, rated speed, and number of poles.
A load is connected to the motor shaft.
There was a setting fault during autotuning.
i ing.
There is a motor bearing problem.
The torque reference value exceeded 100% during autotuning.
The motor doesn’t accelerate
There is a broken/disconnected motor power wire.
A load is connected to the motor shaft.
The torque limit function is operating.
The acceleration time is too short.
A load is connected to the motor shaft.
Remedy
Change the settings to conform to the following equation:
Rated speed < 120 u Motor frequency/Number of poles
Remove the load.
Check the rated current setting. Change if necessary.
Turn the Inverter off and rotate the motor by hand.
Replace the motor if it doesn’t turn smoothly.
Check and replace wiring components if necessary.
Remove the load.
Initialize the torque limit constants (H7-01 to
H7-04).
Increase acceleration time 1 (C1-01).
Remove the load.
The rated slip setting can’t be tuned within the prescribed time.
A load is connected to the motor shaft.
Remove the load.
The core-saturation coeffithe prescribed time.
The rated current setting isn’t correct.
Check and change the setting if necessary.
There is a broken/disconnected motor power wire.
Check and replace wiring components if necessary.
Motor Direction Fault
Motor direction fault
PG Circuit Fault
PGO: PG break detected)
Tune Aborted
Minor Fault:
The motor terminal resistance or no-load current setting can’t be tuned within the prescribed time.
The rated current setting isn’t correct.
There is a broken/disconnected motor power wire.
Check and change the setting if necessary.
Check and replace wiring components if necessary.
Pulses aren’t being input from the PG even though a rotation output is being sent to the motor.
There is a faulty connection between the Inverter and PC
(A or B phase) or the Inverter and Motor (U, V, or W phase).
S The cable to the PG is broken/disconnected.
S The PG’s power supply is broken/disconnected.
A minor Inverter fault occurred.
S
S
S
Check the PG wiring.
Check the motor wiring.
Check the PG rotation direction and constant F1-05.
Check the wiring and correct any problems.
Check the minor fault indicated in the boxes in the display shown at the left.
6
- 31
6
Basic Operation
6.3.6 Speed Control (ASR) Structure
Fault Display
Tune Aborted
V/f Over Setting
(Displayed after completion of autotuning) exceeded 70%.
Probable Cause
Torque reference exceeded
Rated voltage and rated frequency settings are not correct.
The load is connected to the motor.
Remedy
Check the setting and correct any problems.
Disconnect the motor from the load.
6.3.6 Speed Control (ASR) Structure
D The following block diagram shows the structure of the speed control.
Torque limits
C5-01 , C5-03
+ +
Frequency reference
P
+
1
1 sT
C5-06
Detected speed
I L7-01 to L7-04
C5-02 , C5-04
Secondary current reference
In vector flux control, the ASR’s P gain is the maximum frequency standard.
Fig
6.12
Speed Control Structure
J
Gain Settings: C5-01, C5-02
D Set the proportional gain and the integral time of the speed control (ASR).
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
C5-01
ASR proportional (P) gain 1
0.00 to
300.00
Multiple
20.00
B
C5-02 ASR integral (I) time 1
0.000 to
10.000
s 0.500
B
J
Low-speed Gain Settings: C5-03, C5-04, C5-07
D Use these constants to set different proportional gain and integral time settings for low-speed operation. Constant C5-03 sets the low-speed proportional gain of the speed loop (ASR), and C5-04 sets the low-speed integral time.
D Set constant C5-07 to the frequency at which to switch to the low-speed ASR proportional gain and integral time.
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
C5-03
ASR proportional (P) gain 2
0.00 to
300.00
Multiple
20.00
B
C5-04 ASR integral (I) time 2
0.000 to
10.000
s 0.500
B
C5-07
ASR switching frequency
0.0 to 400.0
Hz 0.0
A
- 32
D Figure 6.13 shows how the proportional gain and integral time approach the ASR proportional gain
2 and ASR integral time 2 linearly.
P , I
P = C5-01
I = C5-02
P = C5-03
I = C5-04 (Low speed)
0
Motor speed ( Hz )
C5-07
If C5-07 is set to 0.0, ASR proportional gain 1 and ASR integral time 1 are used for the proportional gain and integral time at all frequencies.
Fig
6.13
Gain Settings at Low Frequencies
J
Multi-function Input Settings: H1-01 Terminal 3 to H1-06 Terminal 8
ASR Integral Reset Setting: “E”
D
D
When one of the multi-function inputs is set to “E,” the input can be used to switch the speed control loop between P control and PI control.
P control (integral reset) is used when the multi-function input is ON.
ASR Proportional Gain Switch Setting: “77”
D
D
When one of the multi-function inputs is set to “77,” the input can be used to switch between proportional gain 1 and proportional gain 2.
Proportional gain 2 (C5-03) is used when the multi-function input is ON. This input has higher priority than the ASR switching frequency set in C5-07.
ON
ASR Gain Switch signal (a multi-function input)
OFF
Proportional gain
(P)
Proportional gain determined by motor speed.
C5-03 gain setting
C5-02 C5-02
The gain is changed linearly in integral time 1 (C5-02). The integral time setting isn’t switched.
Fig
6.14
ASR Proportional Gain Switch
J
Speed Control (ASR) Responsiveness: C5-06
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
C5-06 ASR primary delay time
0.000 to
0.500
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector s 0.004
A
D
D
D
Normally it isn’t necessary to make this adjustment.
Constant C5-06 can be used when adjusting the gain doesn’t remove motor oscillation, or adjusting the gain removes oscillation but results in poor responsiveness.
A high C5-06 setting lowers the responsiveness of the speed control, but makes it difficult for oscillation to occur.
6
- 33
6
Basic Operation
6.3.7 Speed Control (ASR) Gain
6.3.7 Speed Control (ASR) Gain
J
Gain Adjustment Procedure
Use the following procedure to adjust the gain with the mechanical system and actual load connected.
At zero-speed, increase C5-01 (ASR
P Gain 1) until there is no oscillation.
At zero-speed, decrease C5-02 (ASR
I Time 1) until there is no oscillation.
Does oscillation develop when the motor operates at the maximum normal operating speed?
NO
YES
Decrease C5-01 (ASR P Gain 1).
Adjustment completed.
(When there is higher-level position control, adjust the position loop gain so that overshooting/undershooting doesn’t occur.)
Fig
6.15
Increase C5-02 (ASR I Time 1).
Gain Adjustment Procedure
J
Fine Adjustments
D
D
When you want even finer gain adjustment, adjust the gain while observing the speed waveform.
Constant settings like those shown in the following table will be necessary to monitor the speed waveform.
Constant Setting Explanation
H4-01 Analog output selection (terminal 21)
H4-02 Analog output gain (terminal 21)
H4-03 Analog output bias (terminal 21)
H4-04 Analog output selection (terminal 23)
H4-05 Analog output gain (terminal 23)
H4-06 Analog output bias (terminal 23)
2
1.00
0.0
5
1.00
0.0
it th g t p itor the output frequency.
it th t d
H4-07 Analog output level selection 1
This setting allows a 0 to r 10 V signal range to be monitored.
D
D
The multi-function analog outputs have the following functions with these constant settings.
x Multi-function analog output 1 (terminal 21): Outputs Inverter’s output frequency (0 to r 10 V).
x Multi-function analog output 2 (terminal 23): Outputs actual motor speed (0 to r 10 V).
Terminal 22 is the multi-function analog output common.
We recommend monitoring both the output frequency and the motor speed to monitor the response delay or deviations from the reference value, as shown in the following diagram.
Output frequency
Motor speed
Motor speed (response)
Time
Fig
6.16
Example Monitor Waveforms
- 34
Adjusting ASR Proportional Gain 1 (C5-01)
D
D
D
This gain setting adjusts the responsiveness of the speed control (ASR).
The responsiveness is increased when this setting is increased. Usually this setting is higher for larger loads. Oscillation will occur if this setting is increased too much.
The following diagram shows the type of changes that can occur in the response when the ASR proportional gain is changed.
The proportional gain is high.
(Oscillation occurs when the gain is too high.)
Motor speed
The proportional gain is low.
Time
Fig
6.17
Responsiveness for Proportional Gain
Adjusting ASR Integral Time 1 (C5-02)
D
D
D
This constant sets the speed control (ASR) integral time.
Lengthening the integral time lowers the responsiveness, and weakens the resistance to external influences. Oscillation will occur if this setting is too short.
The following diagram shows the type of changes that can occur in the response when the ASR integral time is changed.
Short integral time
Motor speed
Long integral time
Time
Fig
6.18
Responsiveness for Integral Time
J
Different Gain Settings for Low-speed and High-speed
Switch between low-speed and high-speed gain when oscillation occurs because of resonance with the mechanical system at low speed or high speed.
Setting the Gain Switching Frequency (C5-07)
D Set the switching frequency to about 80% of the motor operating frequency or the frequency at which oscillation occurs.
Low-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-03, C5-04)
D
D
Connect the actual load and adjust these constants at zero-speed. Increase ASR proportional gain 2
(C5-03) until there is no oscillation.
Decrease ASR integral time 2 (C5-04) until there is no oscillation.
High-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-01, C5-02)
D
D
D
Adjust these constants at normal operating speed. Increase ASR proportional gain 1 (C5-01) until there is no oscillation.
Decrease ASR integral time 1 (C5-02) until there is no oscillation.
Refer to Fine Adjustments on page - 34 for details on making fine adjustments of high-speed operation.
6
- 35
7
Advanced Operation
This chapter describes the user constants used for specific control methods in VS-626MC5 application.
7.1
Open-loop Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 Torque Limit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2 Adjusting Speed Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3 Setting/Adjusting Motor Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4 Operation Selection when Output Voltage
Saturated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5 Starting Torque Compensation Function
(for SPEC: F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2
Flux Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1 Torque Limit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2 Setting/Adjusting Motor Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.3 Operation Selection when Output Voltage
Saturated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3
Common Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1 Application Constants: b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.2 Tuning Constants: C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.3 Reference Constants: d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.4 Option Constants: F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.5 External Terminal Functions: H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.6 Protective Functions: L
7.3.7 Operator Constants: o
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4
Optional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1 Winding Change Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.2 Wiring for Winding Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.3 Setting/Adjusting the Winding Change Constants . . . .
7 - 2
7 3
7 5
7 5
7 8
7 9
7 10
7 11
7 12
7 16
7 17
7 18
7 21
7 24
7 26
7 31
7 48
7 60
7 64
7 64
7 66
7 69
7
- 1
Advanced Operation
7
7.1
Open-loop Vector Control
b Application d Reference
E Motor
F Options i l
L Protection o Operator
The functions that can be used with open-loop vector control are listed in Table 7.1. Details on functions that are specific to open-loop vector control (i.e. those marked with a ) are provided in the following table.
Table
7.1
Open-loop Vector Control Functions
Control
Method
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
C3
C4
C5
C6
C8 d1 d2 d3 b1 b2 b3 b8
C1
C2 d4
Sequence
DC Injection Braking
Speed Search
Energy Saving
Accel/Decel
S-Curve Acc/Dec
Motor-Slip Compensation
Torque Compensation
Speed Controls
Carrier Frequency
Factory Tuning
Preset Reference
Reference Limits
Jump Frequencies
Reference Frequency Hold
Function
V/f Pattern
Motor Setup
Motor 2 Control Methods
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
F1
Motor 2 V/f Characteristics
Motor 2 Motor Constants
PG speed control card settings
F2 Analog Reference Card AI
F3 Digital Reference Card DI
F4 Analog Monitor Card AO
F5 Digital Output Card DO
F6 Digital Output Card DO
F7 Pulse Monitor Card PO
F8
F9
SI-F/SI-G Transmission
Card
CP-916B Transmission
Card
H1 Multi-function Inputs
H2 Multi-function Outputs
L6
L7
L8 o1 o2
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
H3 Analog Inputs
H4
Multi-function Analog Outputs
H5
MEMOBUS Communications
Motor Protection Functions
Power Loss Ridethru
Stall Prevention
Reference Detection
Fault Restart
Torque Detection
Torque Limit
Hardware Protection
Monitor Select
Key Selections
Settings such as the reference input method
DC injection braking function settings
Speed search function settings
Not used. (Can’t be set.)
Acceleration/deceleration time settings
S-curve characteristics for acceleration/deceleration times
Slip compensation function settings
Torque compensation function settings
Not used. (Can’t be set.)
Carrier frequency settings
Adjustment for open-loop vector control
Frequency reference settings (when using Operator)
Frequency upper and lower limit settings
Prohibited frequency settings
Up/Down, Accel/Decel stop hold frequency setting
(Motor constants are set by the autotuning function.)
Control method settings for motor 2.
V/f characteristics settings for motor 2.
Motor constant settings for motor 2.
User constant settings for a PG Card
User constant settings for an Analog Reference Card
User constant settings for a Digital Reference Card
User constant settings for an Analog Monitor Card
User constant settings for a Digital Output Card
User constant settings for a Digital Output Card
User constant settings for a Pulse Monitor Card
User constant settings for a Transmission Card
User constant settings for a Transmission Card
Function selection for multi-function inputs
Function selection for multi-function outputs
Function selection for analog inputs
Function selection for analog outputs
MEMOBUS communications settings
Sets thermal functions that protect the motor.
Selects the power-loss processing method.
Accel/Decel stall prevention settings and selection
Frequency detection settings and selection
Fault restart function settings
Sets overtorque detection functions 1 and 2 (by torque)
Four-quadrant individual torque limit settings
Hardware overheating and open-phase protection settings
Selects the Operator’s display and setting methods.
Operator’s key function selection and other constants
- 2
7.1.1 Torque Limit Function
With open-loop vector control, torque limits can be applied at an arbitrary value because the torque output by the motor is calculated internally.
The torque limit function is useful when the load cannot sustain a torque above a certain level or to maintain the regenerative torque above a certain level. The two ways to apply torque limits are listed below. (The lower torque limit will be used if both of these methods are set.)
D
D
Setting a torque limit with the constants
Limiting torque with the analog inputs
IMPORTANT
The accuracy of the torque limit is r 5% for output frequencies above 10 Hz, but the accuracy is lower for output frequencies below 10 Hz. Use flux vector control if you want to apply a torque limit at low-speed (below 10 Hz).
J
Torque Limits: L7-01 through L7-04
Torque limits can be set separately for the 4 ways that torque can be applied: forward torque, reverse torque, forward regenerative torque, and reverse regenerative torque.
Change Valid Access Levels
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
L7-01
L7-02
L7-03
L7-04
Forward torque limit
Reverse torque limit
Forward regenerative torque limit
Reverse regenerative torque limit
0 to 300
0 to 300
0 to 300
0 to 300
%
%
%
%
200
200
200
200
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
Figure 7.1 shows the relationship between each constant and the output torque.
When the torque limit function is used, the torque limits have priority and motor speed control and compensation will be disregarded, so the acceleration/deceleration times might be lengthened and motor speed might be reduced.
Reverse
Output torque
Forward direction
L7-01
L7-04
Regenerative torque Motor speed
Forward
Regenerative torque
L7-03
L7-02
Reverse direction
Fig
7.1
Torque Limit Function
7
- 3
7
Advanced Operation
7.1.1 Torque Limit Function
J
Limiting Torque with Analog Inputs: H3-05, H3-09
The following two analog inputs that can be used to limit torque.
Multi-function analog input, terminal 16
Frequency reference (current), terminal 14
Use either or both of these inputs as needed with constants H3-05 and H3-09.
Change
User
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
H3-05
H3-09
Multi-function analog input (terminal 16)
Multi-function analog input (terminal 14)
0 to 1F
1 to 1F
--
--
0
1F
B
A
B
A
D Settings
Setting
10
11
12
15
Forward Torque Limit
Reverse Torque Limit
Regenerative Torque Limit
Forward/Reverse Torque Limit
Function
D
D
D
The above table shows only those settings related to the torque limit function.
Set the analog input terminal’s signal level, gain, and bias to match the actual input signal.
The factory settings for the input terminal’s signal level are as follows: x Terminal 16: 0 to 10 V (A 10 V input limits the torque to 100% of the motor’s rated torque.) x Terminal 14: 4 to 20 mA (A 20 mA input limits the torque to 100% of the motor’s rated torque.)
Figure 7.2 shows the relationship between the output torque and each torque limit.
Output torque
Forward direction
Forward torque limit
Regenerative torque limit
Reverse
Motor speed
Forward
Regenerative torque limit
Reverse torque limit
Reverse direction
Fig
7.2
Limiting Torque with Analog Inputs
D
D
When the forward torque limit has been set, the analog input signal acts as the limit value for torque generated in the forward direction. The torque limit input is effective when torque is generated in the forward direction even if the motor is operating in reverse (regenerative torque).
The torque limit is 100% of the motor’s rated torque when the analog input is at its maximum value
(10 V or 20 mA). To increase the torque limit above 100%, set the input terminal’s gain above 100%.
For example, a gain of 150.0% would result in a torque limit of 150% of the motor’s rated torque with a 10 V or 20 mA analog input.
x Gain for multi-function analog input, terminal 16: H3-06 x Gain for frequency reference (current), terminal 14: H3-10
- 4
7.1.2 Adjusting Speed Feedback
With open-loop vector control, internal Inverter data is used to calculate the feedback value. The gain of this automatic frequency regulator (AFR) operation can be fine-tuned according to motor response. (Normally it isn’t necessary to change the default setting.)
J
Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Gain: C8-08
User
Constant
Number
C8-08
Name
AFR gain
Change during
Operation
Range
0.00 to
10.00
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Multiple
1.00
A
D
D
Normally it isn’t necessary to change this setting.
Fine-tune the gain when motor operation is unstable causing hunting to occur or torque/speed responsiveness is low.
x When hunting occurs, increase the gain by 0.05 increments while checking the motor responsiveness.
x When responsiveness is low, decrease the gain by 0.05 increments while checking the motor responsiveness.
7.1.3 Setting/Adjusting Motor Constants
J
Adjusting the V/f Pattern: E1-04 through E1-10, E1-13
Normally it isn’t necessary to adjust the V/f pattern with open-loop vector control. Adjust the V/f pattern when you want to change the maximum output frequency setting or decrease the Inverter’s output voltage or when stalls are occurring during no-load operation.
To increase the motor’s rated speed, increase the maximum output frequency in E1-04 in programming mode after autotuning.
It is possible to make user-defined V/f pattern settings (E1-04 through E1-10) in open-loop vector control mode. (The preset V/f patterns cannot be selected.)
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
E1-04
Max. output frequency
40.0 to
400.0
Hz 60.0
Q Q
E1-05 Max. voltage
0.0 to 255.0
*1
VAC 200.0
*1 Q Q
Q E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
Base frequency
Mid. output frequency
Mid. output frequency voltage
Min. output frequency
Min. output frequency voltage
Base voltage
0.0 to 400.0
0.0 to 400.0
0.0 to 255.0
*1
0.0 to 400.0
0.0 to 255.0
*1
Hz
Hz
VAC
Hz
VAC
60.0
3.0
*2
11.0
*1 *2
0.5
2.0
*1 *2
Q
A
A
Q
A
E1-13 0.0 to 255.0
VAC 0.0
Q
* 1. These voltages are for 200 V class Inverters; double the voltage for 400 V class Inverters.
* 2. The default setting depends on the Inverter’s capacity. The default settings shown in the table are for 200 V class, 0.4 to 1.5 kW Inverters. (See page NO TAG.)
Note 1.The default settings for E1-07 through E1-10 depend on the control method. The default settings shown in the table are for open-loop vector control. (See page NO TAG.)
2. The four frequency settings must satisfy the following formula:
E1-04 (F
MAX
) t E1-06 (F
A
) > E1-07 (F
B
) t E1-09 (F
MIN
)
3. When making the V/f characteristics a straight line, set the same value in E1-07 (middle output frequency) and E1-09 (minimum output frequency). In this case, constant E1-08
(middle output frequency voltage) will be disregarded.
4. If E1-13 is set to 0.0, the same value as in E1-13 will be set for E1-05. It does not normally need to be set separately.
A
Q
7
- 5
7
Advanced Operation
7.1.3 Setting/Adjusting Motor Constants
Output voltage ( V )
VMAX
( E1-05 )
VBASE
( E1-13 )
VC
(E1-08)
VMIN
( E1-10 )
FMIN
( E1-09 )
FB
( E1-07 )
Fig
7.3
User-defined V/f Pattern
FA
( E1-06 )
FMAX
( E1-04 )
Frequency ( Hz )
J
Adjusting Output Voltage: VC (E1-08), VMIN (E1-10)
Adjust the output voltage when you want to output more torque at low speed, such as in an elevator, or when torque isn’t really necessary and you want to reduce the output voltage to save energy.
Adjustment range: 200 V class Inverters: Initial value 0 to 2 V
400 V class Inverters: Initial value 0 to 4 V
D
D
When generating more torque, gradually increase the voltage but do not exceed 100% of the motor’s rated current.
When saving energy, decrease the voltage but do not cause stalling.
Setting the Maximum Output Frequency
The maximum output frequency can be set from 40.0 to 400.0 Hz. Set this constant in accordance with the motor’s maximum rotational speed.
Setting Motor Constants: E2-01 through E2-03 (E5-01 through E5-03), E2-05 through E2-08 (E5-05, E5-06)
D
D
The motor constants (function E2) will all be set automatically when autotuning is performed, so it normally isn’t necessary to set them manually. Set these constants manually if autotuning can’t be completed properly.
User constant numbers for motor 2 are given in parentheses.
Motor Rated Current: E2-01
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
E2-01
(E5-01)
Motor rated current 0.32 to 6.40
A 1.90
Q Q
D
D
The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The default setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. (The table shows the default setting for 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverters.) (See page
NO TAG.)
Set the rated current (A) shown on the motor nameplate.
Motor Rated Slip: E2-02
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
E2-02
(E5-02)
Motor rated slip
0.00 to
20.00
Hz 2.90
Q Q
D
D
The default setting depends upon the Inverter capacity.
(The table shows the default settings for 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverters.)
Calculate the rated slip (E2-02) from the value shown on the motor nameplate with the following equation and set this value.
Rated slip = rated frequency (Hz) -- rated speed (r/min) u number of poles/120
- 6
Motor No-load Current: E2-03
User
Constant
Number
E2-03
(E5-03)
Name
Motor no-load current
Change during
Operation
Range
0.00 to
1500.0
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
A 1.20
Q Q
D
D
The default setting depends upon the Inverter capacity.
(The table shows the default settings for 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverters.)
Set the no-load current (E2-03) at the rated voltage and rated frequency. Normally this value isn’t shown on the motor nameplate, so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer.
Motor Line-to-line Resistance: E2-05
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
E2-05
(E5-05)
Motor line-to-line resistance
Range
0.000 to
65.000
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
9.842
A A
D
D
The default setting depends upon the Inverter capacity.
(The table shows the default settings for 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverters.)
Set the motor terminal resistance (U--V, V--W, and W--U) in constant E2-05. Normally this value isn’t shown on the motor nameplate, so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer for the terminal resistance at the insulation class temperature. Use the following equations to calculate the resistance value from the terminal resistance of a test report.
x x x
E-class insulation: Terminal resistance at 75 q C in the test report ( : ) x 0.92
B-class insulation: Terminal resistance at 75 q C in the test report ( : ) x 0.92
F-class insulation: Terminal resistance at 115 q C in the test report ( : ) x 0.87
Motor Leakage Inductance: E2-06
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
E2-06
(E5-06)
Motor leak inductance 0.0 to 30.0
% 18.2
A A
D
D
D
D
The default setting depends upon the Inverter capacity.
(The table shows the default settings for 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverters.)
Set the voltage drop (caused by the motor’s leakage inductance) as a percentage of the motor’s rated voltage in constant E2-06.
This constant does not normally required setting because the Inverter automatically compensates during operation.
Normally this value isn’t shown on the motor nameplate, so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer. It is also acceptable to set the loss (caused by the motor’s leakage inductance) as a percentage.
Motor Iron-core Saturation Coefficients 1, 2: E2-07, E2-08
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
E2-07
Motor iron-core saturation coefficient 1
0.00 to 0.50
--
E2-08
Motor iron-core saturation coefficient 2
0.00 to 0.75
--
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
0.50
0.75
A
A
A
A
D
D
D
Constants E2-07 and E2-08 are not required when using the motor at or below the rated frequency.
Set these constants when operating at a frequency higher that the motor’s rated frequency. Set the following values: x Motor iron-core saturation coefficient 1: Core-saturation coefficient when magnetic flux is 50%.
x Motor iron-core saturation coefficient 2: Core-saturation coefficient when magnetic flux is 75%.
Normally these values aren’t shown on the motor nameplate, so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer. Operation will be possible with the factory-preset values.
7
- 7
7
Advanced Operation
7.1.4 Operation Selection when Output Voltage Saturated
7.1.4 Operation Selection when Output Voltage Saturated
The Inverter cannot output a voltage that is higher than the input voltage. If the output voltage command to the motor (monitor constant U1--06) exceedes the input voltage in the high--speed region, the output voltage will become saturated, and the control unstable with open loop vector control.
Select one of the following methods to prevent this unstable condition.
J
Limited Output Voltage Operation: C3--06 (for SPEC: F)
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
C3--06
Limited output voltage operation
0 1 1 0 A A
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Disables limited output voltage operation.
Enables limited output voltage operation.
Function
D If the limited output voltage operation is disabled and output voltage becomes saturated, slip compensation is automatically disabled to prevent instability.
The output current does not change when the slip compensation is disabled, however precise speed control is no longer possible. Enable limited output voltage operation if precise speed control is required.
D If the limited output voltage operation is enabled, the magnetic flux current of the motor is automatically controlled, and the output voltage command itself is limited, which maintains precise speed control.
Check the Inverter current margins as the output current will be maximum 10% higher (with a rated load) than when limited output voltage operation is disabled.
Note 1.C3--06 does not need to be changed if the Unit is used only at medium or low speeds, or when the power supply voltage is 10% or more higher than the rated voltage of the moror, or when speed precision in the high--speed region is not required.
2. When the power supply voltage is too low for the rated motor voltage, speed control will not be precise even if limited output voltage operation is enabled.
- 8
7.1.5 Starting Torque Compensation Function (for SPEC: F)
Starting torque compensation can be input to speed up the torque command at starting with open--loop vecter control.
This function is effective for mechinery with large friction loads, cranes, and other applications where starting torque is required. However, this compensation only applies at startup, in contrast to Flux vector control.
J
Starting Torque Compensation Function (C4--03 to C4--05)
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
C4--03
C4--04
C4--05
Starting torque compensation value (forward direction)
Starting torque compensation value (reverse direction)
Constant for starting torque compensation
0.0 to 200.0
--200.0 to
0.0
0 to 200
0.1
%
0.1
%
1 ms
0.0
0.0
10
A
A
A
Speed command input
(terminal 13)
Forward (Reverse) command input (terminal 12)
Time constant:
C4--05
Open
Torque compensation volume
Closed
Time constant:
C4--02
C4--05 4
C4--03 (forward)
C4--04 (reverse, negative polarity)
The larger between b2--01 and E1--09
E1--09
Output frequency
The lower limit of Inverter’s torque value is determined by the above torque com-pensation value.
Fig
7.4
Time Chart for Starting Torque Frequency
D
D
D
D
When this function is used, set the starting torque value to the friction load value for ordinary machinery, and to the load for cranes and other lifting devices.
x Friction load: Set the friction load for both C4--03 and C4--04.
x Lifting devices: Set the load for the motor side only (hoist). Do not use this function for lifting devices with counterweights as a shock will be generated if there is a regenerative load.
Compensation can be set only for the motoring side, for both the forward and reverse directions. It cannot be set for the regenerative side.
Starting torque compensation is disabled when switching between forward and reverse after conducting a speed search.
Starting torque compensation is always disabled when the second motor is used.
7
- 9
Advanced Operation
7
7.2
Flux Vector Control
b Application d Reference
E Motor
F Options i l
L Protection o Operator
The functions that can be used with flux vector control are listed in Table 7.2. Details on functions that are specific to flux vector control (i.e. those marked with a ) are provided in the following table.
Table
7.2
Flux Vector Control Functions
Control Method
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
C4
C5
C6
C8 d1 d2 d3 b1 b2 b3
C1
C2
C3 d4
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
Sequence
DC Injection Braking
Speed Search
Accel/Decel
S-Curve Acc/Dec
Motor-Slip Compensation
Torque Compensation
Speed Controls
Carrier Frequency
Factory Tuning
Preset Reference
Reference Limits
Jump Frequencies
Reference frequency hold function
V/f Pattern
Motor Setup
Motor 2 Control Methods
Motor 2 V/f Characteristics
F1
Motor 2 Motor Constants
PG Speed Control Card
Settings
F2 Analog Reference Card AI
F3 Digital Reference Card DI
F4 Analog Monitor Card AO
F5 Digital Output Card DO
F6 Digital Output Card DO
F7 Pulse Monitor Card PO
F8
F9
SI-F/SI-G Transmission
Card
CP-916B Transmission
Card
L7
L8 o1 o2
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
H1 Multi-function Inputs
H2 Multi-function Outputs
H3 Analog Inputs
H4
H5
Multi-function Analog Outputs
MEMOBUS Communications
Motor Overload
Power Loss Ridethru
Stall Prevention
Reference Detection
Fault Restart
Torque Detection
Torque Limit
Hardware Protection
Monitor Select
Key Selections
Settings such as the reference input method
DC injection braking function settings
Speed search function settings
Acceleration/deceleration time settings
S-curve characteristics for accel/decel times
Motor temperature compensation function adjustment
Not used. (Can’t be set.)
Speed control loop adjustment
Carrier frequency settings
Not used. (Can’t be set.)
Frequency reference settings (when using Operator)
Frequency upper and lower limit settings
Prohibited frequency settings
Up/Down, Accel/Decel stop hold frequency setting
Motor constant settings
(Motor constants set automatically with autotuning.)
Control method settings for motor 2.
V/f characteristics settings for motor 2.
Motor constant settings for motor 2.
Constant settings for a PG Speed Control Card
User constant settings for an Analog Reference Card
User constant settings for a Digital Reference Card
User constant settings for an Analog Monitor Card
User constant settings for a Digital Output Card
User constant settings for a Digital Output Card
User constant settings for a Pulse Monitor Card
User constant settings for a Transmission Card
User constant settings for a Transmission Card
Function selection for multi-function inputs
Function selection for multi-function outputs
Function selection for analog inputs
Function selection for analog outputs
MEMOBUS communications settings
Sets electrical/thermal functions that protect the motor.
Selects the power-loss processing method.
Accel/Decel stall prevention settings and selection
Frequency detection settings and selection
Fault restart function settings
Sets overtorque detection functions 1 and 2 (by current)
Torque limit function settings
Hardware overheating and open-phase protection settings
Selects the Operator’s display and setting methods.
Operator’s key function selection and other constants
- 10
7.2.1 Torque Limit Function
With flux vector control, the torque limit can be applied at an arbitrary value because the torque output by the motor is calculated internally.
The torque limit function is useful when the load cannot sustain a torque above a certain level or regenerative torque above a certain level.
The two ways to apply a torque limit are listed below.
D Setting torque limits with the constants
D Limiting torque with the analog inputs
The lower torque limit will be used if both of these methods are set. The accuracy of the torque limit is r 5% at all frequencies.
J
Setting a Torque Limit with Constants: L7-01 to L7-04
D Torque limits can be set separately for the 4 ways that torque can be applied: forward torque, reverse torque, forward regenerative torque, and reverse forward regenerative torque.
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
L7-01
L7-02
Forward torque limit 0 to 300
0 to 300
%
%
200
200
B
B
B
B
L7-03
Reverse torque limit
Forward regenerative torque limit
0 to 300 % 200 B B
L7-04
Reverse regenerative torque limit
0 to 300 % 200 B B
D Figure 7.5 shows the relationship between each constant and the output torque.
Output torque
Forward direction L7-01
Reverse
L7-04
Regenerative torque Motor speed
Forward
Regenerative torque
L7-03
L7-02
Reverse direction
Fig
7.5
Torque Limit Function
J
D When the torque limit function is used, the torque control has priority and motor speed control and compensation will be disregarded, so the acceleration/deceleration times might be lengthened and motor speed might be reduced.
Limiting Torque with Analog Inputs: H3-05, H3-09
The following two analog inputs that can be used to limit torque. Use either or both of these inputs as needed with constants H3-05 and H3-09.
D
D
Multi-function analog input terminal 16
Frequency reference (current) terminal 14
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
H3-05
H3-09
Multi-function analog input (terminal 16)
Multi-function analog input (terminal 14)
0 to 1F
1 to 1F
--
--
0
1F
B
A
B
A
7
- 11
7
Advanced Operation
7.2.2 Setting/Adjusting Motor Constants
D Settings
Setting
10
11
12
13
15
Name
Forward Torque Limit
Reverse Torque Limit
Regenerative Torque Limit
Torque reference (The input limits torque in both the forward and reverse directions during speed control.)
Forward/Reverse Torque Limit (Limits torque in both the forward and reverse directions.)
D
D
D
The above table shows only those settings related to the torque limit function.
Set the analog input terminal’s signal level, gain, and bias to match the actual input signal.
The factory default settings for the input terminal’s signal level are as follows: x Terminal 16: 0 to +10 V (A 10 V input limits the torque to 100% of the motor’s rated torque.) x Terminal 14: 4 to 20 mA (A 20 mA input limits the torque to 100% of the motor’s rated torque.)
Figure 7.6 shows the relationship between the output torque and each torque limit.
Output torque
Forward direction
Forward torque limit
Regenerative torque limit
Reverse
Motor speed
Forward
Regenerative torque limit
Reverse torque limit
Reverse direction
Fig
7.6
Limiting Torque via Analog Inputs
D
D
When the forward torque limit has been set, the analog input signal acts as the limit value for torque generated in the forward direction. The torque limit input is effective when torque is generated in the forward direction even if the motor is operating in reverse (regenerative torque).
The torque limit is 100% of the motor’s rated torque when the analog input is at its maximum value
(10 V or 20 mA). To increase the torque limit above 100%, set the input terminal’s gain above 100%.
For example, a gain of 150.0% would result in a torque limit of 150% of the motor’s rated torque with a 10 V or 20 mA analog input.
7.2.2 Setting/Adjusting Motor Constants
J
Adjusting the V/f Pattern: E1-04 to E1-06, E1--09, E1-13
D Normally it isn’t necessary to adjust the V/f pattern with flux vector control. Adjust the V/f pattern when you want to change the maximum output frequency, maximum voltage, base frequency, or minimum output frequency settings.
Change
User
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
E1-04 Max. output frequency
40.0 to
400.0
Hz 60.0
Q Q
E1-05
E1-06
E1-09
E1-13
Max. voltage
Base frequency
Min. output frequency
Base voltage
0.0
to
255.0
*1
VAC
0.0 to 400.0
Hz
0.0 to 400.0
Hz
0.0 to 255.0
VAC
200.0
60.0
0.0
*1
0.0
*2
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
* 1. These voltages are for the 200 V class; Double the voltage for 400 V class Inverters.
* 2. If E1-13 is set to 0.0, the same value as in E1-13 will be set for E1-05. It does not normally need to be set separately.
Note 1.The default setting for E1-09 depends on the control method. The default settings shown in the table are for flux vector control.
2. The three frequency settings must satisfy the following equation:
E1-04 (F
MAX
) t E1-06 (F
A
) > E1-09 (F
MIN
)
- 12
Output voltage ( V )
VMAX
( E1-05 )
V BASE
( E1-13 )
FMIN
( E1-09 )
FA
( E1-06 )
Fig
7.7
V/f Pattern Adjustment
FMAX
( E1-04 )
Frequency ( Hz )
Units for V/f Pattern Settings: o1-04
The units used for V/f pattern frequency settings can be changed when flux vector control has been selected.
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector o1-04
Frequency units of constant setting
0 1 -0 B
D Display Unit Settings
Setting
0
1
Units: Hz
Units: r/min
Function
J
D
D
D
The setting units for constants E1-04, E1-06, and E1-09 can be changed.
The unit for other frequencies will not change.
Constant o1-04 is specific to flux vector control.
Setting Motor Constants: E2-01 to E2-09
The motor constants (function E2) will all be set automatically when autotuning is performed.
Set these constants manually if autotuning can’t be completed properly.
Motor Rated Current: E2-01
Constant
Number
E2-01
Name
Motor rated current
Change
Operation
Setting
Range
0.32 to 6.40
Unit
A
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
1.90
Q Q
D
D
The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The default setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. (The table shows the default setting for 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverters.) See page
NO TAG.)
Set the rated current (A) shown on the motor nameplate.
Motor Rated Slip: E2-02
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
E2-02 Motor rated slip
0.00 to
20.00
Hz 2.90
Q Q
D
D
The default setting depends upon the Inverter capacity.
(The table shows the default settings for 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverters.) (See page NO TAG.)
Calculate the rated slip (E2-02) from the value shown on the motor nameplate with the following equation and set this value.
Rated slip = rated frequency (Hz) -- rated speed (r/min) u number of poles/120
Motor No-load Current: E2-03
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
E2-03 Motor no-load current
0.00 to
1500.0
A 1.20
Q Q
7
- 13
7
Advanced Operation
7.2.2 Setting/Adjusting Motor Constants
D
D
The default setting depends upon the Inverter capacity.
(The table shows the default settings for 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverters.) (See page NO TAG.)
Set the no-load current (E2-03) at the rated voltage and rated frequency. Normally this value isn’t shown on the motor nameplate, so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer.
Number of Motor Poles: E2-04
Change
Constant
Number
E2-04
Name
Number of motor poles
Operation
Range
2 to 48
Unit
--
Setting
4
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Q
D Set the number of poles (E2-04) shown on the motor nameplate.
Motor Line-to-line Resistance: E2-05
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
E2-05
Motor line-to-line resistance
Range
0.000 to
65.000
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
9.842
A A
D
D
D
The default setting depends upon the Inverter capacity.
(The table shows the default settings for 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverters.) (See page NO TAG.)
Set the motor terminal resistance (U--V, V--W, and W--U) in constant E2-05.
Normally this value isn’t shown on the motor nameplate, so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer for the terminal resistance at the insulation class temperature. Use the following equations to calculate the resistance value from the terminal resistance of a test report.
x E-class insulation: Terminal resistance at 75 q
C in the test report (
:
) x 0.92
x x
B-class insulation: Terminal resistance at 75 q C in the test report ( : ) x 0.92
F-class insulation: Terminal resistance at 115 q C in the test report ( : ) x 0.87
Motor Leak Inductance: E2-06
Constant
Number
E2-06
Name
Motor leak inductance
Change during
Operation
Range
0.0 to 30.0
Unit
%
Setting
18.2
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
A
Flux Vector
A
D
D
D
D
The default setting depends upon the Inverter capacity.
(The table shows the default settings for 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverters.) (See page NO TAG.)
Set the voltage drop (caused by the motor’s leakage inductance) as a percentage of the motor’s rated voltage in constant E2-06.
This constant does not normally require setting because the Inverter automatically compensates during operation.
Normally this value isn’t shown on the motor nameplate, so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer. It is also acceptable to set the loss (caused by the motor’s leakage inductance) as a percentage.
- 14
Motor Iron-core Saturation Coefficients 1, 2: E2-07, E2-08
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
E2-07
E2-08
Motor iron-core saturation coefficient 1
Motor iron-core saturation coefficient 2
0.00 to 0.50
0.00 to 0.75
--
--
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
0.50
0.75
A
A
A
A
D
D
D
Constants E2-07 and E2-08 are not required when using the motor at or below the rated frequency.
Set these constants when operating at a frequency higher that the motor’s rated frequency. Set the following values: x Motor iron-core saturation coefficient 1: Iron-core saturation coefficient when magnetic flux is
50%.
x Motor iron-core saturation coefficient 2: Iron-core saturation coefficient when magnetic flux is
75%.
Normally these values aren’t shown on the motor nameplate, so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer. Operation will be possible with the factory-preset values.
Motor Mechanical Loss: E2-09
User
Constant
Number
E2-09
Name
Motor mechanical loss
Change during
Operation
Range
0.0 to 10.0
Unit
%
Setting
0.0
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
A
J
D
D
Normally it isn’t necessary to change this setting in the following cases: x There is a large torque loss to the motor’s bearings x There is a large torque loss to a fan or pump
Set the mechanical loss as a percentage of the motor’s rated output power (W). Constant E2-09 is used to compensate for torque lost mechanically in the motor.
Setting the Slip Compensation Gain: C3-01
User
Constant
Number
C3-01
Name
Slip compensation gain
Change during
Operation
Range
0.0 to 2.5
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Multiple
1.0
B B
D
D
Normally it isn’t necessary to change this setting.
With flux vector control, constant C3-01 sets the motor’s temperature compensation gain. Adjust the setting when a torque limit or torque control is being used and the output torque varies with the ambient temperature.
7
- 15
7
Advanced Operation
7.2.3 Operation Selection when Output Voltage Saturated
7.2.3 Operation Selection when Output Voltage Saturated
The Inverter cannot output a voltage that is higher than the input voltage. If the output voltage command to the motor (monitor constant U1--06) exceeds the input voltage in the high--speed region, the output voltage becomes saturated, and precise torque control is not longer possible during flux vector control.
Select noe of the following methods to insure precise torque control.
J
Limited Output Voltage Operation: C3--06
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
C3--06
Limited output voltage operation
0 1 1 0 A A
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Disables limited output voltage operation.
Enables limited output voltage operation.
Function
D If the limited output voltage operation is disabled and output voltage becomes saturated, the output current does not change. However, torque control precision is no longer possible.
Enable limited output voltage operation if precise torque control is required.
D If the limited output voltage operation is enabled, the magnetic flux current of the motor is automatically controlled, and the output voltage command itself is limited, which maintains precies torque control.
Check the Inverter current margins as the output current will be maximum 10% higher (with a rated load) than when limited output voltage operation is disabled.
Note 1.C3--06 does not need to be changed if the Unit is used only at mediun or low speeds, or when the power supply voltage is 10% more higher than the rated voltage for the motor, or when torque control precision in the high--speed region is not required.
2. When the power supply voltage is too low for the rated motor voltage, precise torque control will not be maintained even if limited output voltage operation is enabled.
- 16
7.3
Common Functions
b Application d Reference
E Motor
F Options i l
L Protection o Operator
The functions that can be used for all control methods are listed in Table 7.3. Details on functions marked with a are provided in the following table.
Table
7.3
Functions Used with All Control Methods
Control Method
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux
Vector
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C8 b1 b2 b3
C1 d1 d2 d3 d4
E1
E2
E3
E4
Sequence
DC Injection Braking
Speed Search
Accel/Decel
S-Curve Acc/Dec
Motor-Slip Compensation
Torque Compensation
Speed Controls
Carrier Frequency
Factory Tuning
Preset Reference
Reference Limits
Prohibited Frequencies
Reference Frequence Hold
Functions
V/f Pattern
Motor Setup
Motor 2 Control Methods
Motor 2 V/f Characteristics
E5
F1
Motor 2 Motor Constants
PG Speed Control Card
Settings
F2 Analog Reference Card AI
F3 Digital Reference Card DI
F4 Analog Monitor Card AO
F5 Digital Output Card DO
F6 Digital Output Card DO
F7 Pulse Monitor Card PO
F8
SI-F/SI-G Transmission
Card
F9
CP-916B Transmission
Card
H1 Multi-function Inputs
L4
L5
L6
L7
L1
L2
L3
L8 o1 o2
H2 Multi-function Outputs
H3 Analog Inputs
H4
Multi-function Analog Outputs
H5
MEMOBUS Communications
Motor Overload
Power Loss Ridethru
Stall Prevention
Reference Detection
Fault Restart
Torque Detection
Torque Limit
Hardware Protection
Monitor Select
Key Selections
Settings such as the reference input method
DC injection braking function settings
Speed search function settings
Acceleration/deceleration time settings
S-curve characteristics for acceleration/deceleration times
Slip compensation function settings
Torque compensation function settings
Speed control tuning
Carrier frequency settings
Adjustment for open-loop vector control
Frequency reference settings (when using Operator)
Frequency upper and lower limit settings
Prohibited frequency settings
Up/Down, Accel/Decel stop hold frequency setting
Control method settings for motor 2.
V/f characteristics settings for motor 2.
Motor constant setting for motor 2.
Constant settings for a PG Speed Control Card
User constant settings for an Analog Reference Card
User constant settings for a Digital Reference Card
User constant settings for an Analog Monitor Card
User constant settings for a Digital Output Card
User constant settings for a Digital Output Card
User constant settings for a Pulse Monitor Card
User constant settings for a Transmission Card
User constant settings for a Transmission Card
Function selection for multi-function inputs
Function selection for multi-function outputs
Function selection for analog inputs
Function selection for analog outputs
MEMOBUS communications settings
Sets electrical/thermal functions that protect the motor.
Selects the power-loss processing method.
Accel/Decel stall prevention settings and selection
Frequency detection settings and selection
Fault restart function settings
Sets overtorque detection functions 1 and 2
Torque limit settings
Hardware overheating and open-phase protection settings
Selects the Operator display and setting methods.
Operator key function selection and other constants
-----
7
- 17
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.1 Application Constants: b
7.3.1 Application Constants: b
J
DC Injection Braking: b2-01 to b2-04
D The DC injection braking function decelerates by applying a DC current to the motor. This happens in the following two cases x DC Injection Braking Time at Start:
Effective for temporarily stopping and then restarting, without regenerative processing, a motor coasting by inertia.
x DC Injection Braking Time at Stop:
Used to prevent coasting by inertia when the motor is not completely stopped by normal deceleration when there is a large load. The stopping time can be shortened by lengthening the DC injection braking time or increasing the DC injection braking current.
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector b2-01
Zero speed level (DC injection braking starting frequency)
0.0 to 10.0
Hz 0.5
B B b2-02
DC injection braking current
0 to 100 % 50 B b2-03 b2-04
DC injection braking time at start
DC injection braking time at stop
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 to
10.00
s s
0.00
0.50
B
B
B
B
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
For the zero speed level (b2-01), set the frequency for beginning DC injection braking for deceleration.
If the excitation level is lower than the minimum output frequency (E1-09), the DC injection braking will begin from the minimum output frequency.
In flux vector control mode, DC injection braking becomes the initial excitation starting frequency at the time of deceleration. In that case, braking starts from the excitation level regardless of the minimum output frequency setting.
The excitation level is also used as the operating frequency for the zero servo function (for flux vector control only).
For the DC injection braking current (b2-02), set the value for the current that is output at the time of
DC injection braking. DC injection braking current is set as a percentage of Inverter rated output current, with the Inverter rated output current taken as 100%.
For the DC injection braking time at start (b2-03), set the DC injection braking operating time for when the motor is started.
For the DC injection braking time at stop (b2-04), set the DC injection braking operating time for when the motor is stopped.
Figure 7.8 provides a timing chart of DC injection braking (initial excitation).
Output frequency
E1-09
(Min. output frequency) b2-03
(DC injection braking time at start)
Fig
7.8
DC Injection Braking Timing Chart
The larger of b2-01 or
E1-09
Time b2-04
(DC injection braking time at stop)
- 18
J
Megnetic Flux Compensation: b2--08 (for SPEC: F)
When the DC injection braking time at start (initial excitation) function is used to start the motor magnetic flux before operating machinery requiring high starting torque, particularly with large--capacity motors, the startup of the magnetic flux may take some time due to the effect of the electrical time constants of the motor.
Use the magnetic flux compensation function to supply a strong magnetic flux current when starting the
DC injection braking time at start (initial excitation). This will increase the speed and stability of the motor’s internal megnetic flux startup.
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Acces Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector b2--03
DC injection braking time at start
0.00 to
10.00
0.01
s
0.00
B B b2--08
Magnetic flux compensation volume
0 to 500* 1% 0 A A
When b2--08 is 100%, it indicates the motor no--load current (motor magnetic flux current).
Run command
Output frequency b2--08 b2--08=100%
Motor’s magnetic flux current
Control mode During base block b2--03
Limited to smaller of 80% of the inverter’s rated current of the motor’s rated current.
Motor’s magnetic flux current during control
During speed control
During DC injection braking time at start (initial excitation)
Fig
7.9
Time Chart for Magnetic Flux Compensation
D
D
D
D
D
If b2--08 is set at 100% or greater, a stronger current can be supplied when starting DC injection braking time at start (initial exciation), and the motor’s internal magnetic fulx startup can be speeded up. The startup time can be reduced by approximately half when the b2--08 is set to 200%.
The magnetic flux startup is slower if b2--08 is less than 100%. (Do not normally set b2--08 to less than
100%. However, the operation will be the same as b2--08 = 100% when b2--08 = 0%, and the startup will be at the set DC injection braking current (b2--02).
If the magnetic flux compensation volume (b2--08) is set to a large value, there may be greater noise generated from the motor during DC injection braking time at start.
The electrical time constant when the motor’s magnetic flux is started (secondary circuit time constant) can be calculated using the motor constant E2 setting and the following formula:
Secondary circuit time constant T2 = [E2--01 2 --E2--03 2 ) 1/2 /(2 x E2--02 x E2--03)] (sec)
Do not use this function when slow commencement of braking due to DC injection braking time at start (initial exciation) is becoming a problem. Use the separate DC braking command (setting: 60) for multi--function contact input, and start the motor magnetic flux beforehand while stopping the motor.
7
- 19
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.1 Application Constants: b
J
Speed Search: b3-01 to b3-03
The speed search function finds the speed of a coasting motor and starts up smoothly from that speed. It is effective in situations such as switching from a commercial power supply.
Speed Search Selection at Start: b3-01
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation b3-01
Speed search selection at start
Range
0 1
Unit
Setting
-0 *
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
A A
* When the control method is switched, the factory setting changes as follows: open-loop vector 0; flux vector: 1
D Settings
Setting Contents
0
1
Speed search disabled: Motor starts from minimum output frequency.
Speed search enabled: Speed search is performed from maximum output frequency and motor is started. (In control methods with PG, i.e., V/f with PG feedback and flux vector, motor starts from the motor speed.)
D
D
Set “1” to use the speed search function. A speed search is performed each time the run command is input.
To use speed search freely in control methods without PG, i.e., V/f control and open-loop vector control, set the multi-function contact input selection (H1-01 to H1-06) to 61 or 62 (external search command). (See para 7.3.5.)
Speed Search Operating Current, Speed Search Deceleration Time, and Min. Baseblock Time: b3-02, b3-03, L2-03
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector b3-02
Speed search operating current
0 200 % 100 A b3-03
L2-03
Speed search deceleration time
Min. baseblock time
0.1
10.0
0.0
0.5
s s
2.0
0.5
*
A
B B
* The factory setting varies depending on the Inverter capacity. The values shown in the table are for 200 V class Inverters of 0.4 kW.
D
D
D
D
D
For the speed search operating current (b3-02), set the operating current for the speed search. If restarting is not possible with the setting, then lower the setting.
Set the speed search operating current as a percentage of the Inverter’s rated output current, with the
Inverter’s rated output current taken as 100%.
For the speed search deceleration time (b3-03), set the output frequency deceleration time for while the speed search is being performed. Set the time required to decelerate from the maximum output frequency to 0 Hz.
Speed search deceleration (b3-03) can be used for the Speed search after winding change.
When the speed search and DC injection braking are set, set the minimum baseblock time (L2-03). For the minimum baseblock time, set the time to wait for the motor’s residual voltage to dissipate. If an overcurrent is detected when starting a speed search or DC injection braking, raise the setting to prevent a fault from occurring.
Run command
Maximum output frequency
OFF ON
Deceleration time set for b3-03
Frequency reference that is set
Output frequency
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) b3-02
Output current
Fig
7.10
Speed Search Timing Chart
- 20
7.3.2 Tuning Constants: C
J
S-curve Characteristic Function: C2-01 to C2-04
D Using the S-curve characteristic function for acceleration and deceleration can reduce shock to the machinery when stopping and starting.
D With the Inverter, S-curve characteristic times can be set respectively for beginning acceleration, ending acceleration, beginning deceleration, and ending deceleration.
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
C2-01
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
0.00 to 2.50
s 0.20
A A
C2-02
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
0.00 to 2.50
s 0.20
A A
C2-03
C2-04
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end
0.00 to 2.50
0.00 to 2.50
s s
0.20
0.00
A
A
A
A
D The relation between these constants is shown in Figure 7.11.
Run command
ON OFF
Output frequency
C2-02 C2-03
C2-01 C2-04
Time
Fig
7.11
Setting S-curve Characteristics
D When the S-curve characteristic time is set, the acceleration and deceleration times will be lengthened as follows: x x
Acceleration time =
Selected acceleration time + (S-curve at beginning of acceleration + S-curve at end of acceleration)
/ 2
Deceleration time =
Selected deceleration time + (S-curve at beginning of deceleration + S-curve at end of deceleration) / 2
7
- 21
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.2 Tuning Constants: C
J
Motor Slip Compensation: C3-01 to C3-04
D The motor slip compensation function calculates the motor torque according to the output current, and sets gain to compensate for output frequency.
x This function is used to improve speed accuracy when operating with a load.
Slip Compensation Gain: C3-01
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
C3-01 Slip compensation gain 0.0 to 2.5
Multiple
1.0 * B B
* When the control method is switched, the factory setting changes as follows: open-loop vector 0; flux vector: 1.0
x When “1.0” is set, this function compensates for the rated slip that has been set, by the rated torque output.
x With flux vector control, this becomes the gain to compensate for slip caused by motor temperature variation. (Refer to Slip Compensation Gain: C3-01 under 7.2.2.)
Motor Slip Compensation Gain Adjustment Procedure
1.
Correctly set the motor rated slip (constant E2-02) and the motor no-load current (constant E2-03).
x The motor rated slip can be calculated by means of the following equation, using the numbers that are shown on the motor nameplate.
Motor rated slip =
Motor rated frequency (Hz) -- rated speed (r/min) x motor (No. of poles) / 120 x Set the values at the rated voltage and rated frequency for the motor no-load current. With vector control, the motor rated slip is automatically set by autotuning.
2.
Set the slip compensation gain (constant C3-01 to “1.0.” (If it is set to “0.0,” slip compensation will be disabled.)
3.
Operate with a load, measure the speed, and adjust the slip compensation gain (in increments of 0.1).
x x
If the speed is lower than the target value, increase the slip compensation gain.
If the speed is higher than the target value, decrease the slip compensation gain.
Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time: C3-02
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
C3-02
Slip compensation primary delay time
0 to 10000
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector ms 200 A
D This constant does not normally need to be set. Adjust the slip compensation primary delay time if the motor slip compensation responsiveness is low, or if the speeds are unstable.
x If responsiveness is low, lower the setting.
x If speeds are unstable, raise the setting.
Slip Compensation Limit: C3-03
User
Constant
Number
C3-03
Name
Slip compensation limit
Change during
Operation
Range
0 to 250
Unit
%
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
200 A
D
D
D
Constant C3-03 sets the slip compensation limit as a percentage of motor rated slip (E2-02), with the motor rated slip taken as 100%.
If the speed is lower than the target value and does not change even when the slip compensation gain is adjusted, it is possible that the slip compensation limit has been reached. Raise the limit and then check again. Make sure, however, that the value of the sum of the reference frequency and the slip compensation limit does not exceed the speed capacity of the machinery.
The limit is as shown in Figure 7.12 in the constant torque and constant output areas.
- 22
Slip compensation limit
E1-04
E1-06
C3-03
C3-03
Fig
7.12
E1-06 E1-04
Output frequency
E1-06: Base frequency
E1-04: Maximum output frequency
Slip Compensation Limit
Slip Compensation Selection During Regeneration: C3-04
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
C3-04
Slip compensation selection during regeneration
0 1 --
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
0 A
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Contents
Slip compensation disabled during regeneration
Slip compensation enabled during regeneration
J
D
D
Constant C3-04 enables or disables slip compensation during regeneration.
The amount of regeneration is momentarily increased when this function is used, so some control option (e.g., Braking resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, Braking Unit) may be required.
Torque Compensation Function: C4-01, C4-02
The torque compensation function detects increases in the motor load, and increases the output torque to compensate.
Torque Compensation Gain: C4-01
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
C4-01
Torque compensation gain
Range
Unit
0.00 to 2.50
Multiple
Setting
1.00
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
B
D
D
D
This constant can be changed during operation, but normally no adjustments are required.
Set the torque compensation gain so that the output current at low-speed rotation does not exceed 50% of the Inverter’s rated output current.
Do not adjust the setting of this constant for open-loop vector control.
Torque Compensation Time Constant: C4-02
Change
User
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
C4-02
Torque compensation time constant
0 to 10000
Unit ms
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
20 A
D The torque compensation time constant does not normally need to be adjusted, but make adjustments in the following cases: x x
If the motor generates excessive oscillation, raise the setting.
If motor responsiveness is low, lower the setting.
7
- 23
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.3 Reference Constants: d
J
Carrier Frequency: C6-01
D
D
The carrier frequency characteristics differ according to the control method.
x Open-loop vector control and flux vector control: Constant frequency (The carrier frequency upper limit only is set.)
The carrier frequency does not normally need to be adjusted, but make adjustments in the following cases: x If the wiring distance between the Inverter and the motor is long, lower the carrier frequency.
Wiring Distance 50 m max.
100 m max.
Over 100 m
Carrier Frequency 15 kHz max.
10 kHz 5 kHz max.
x If there are great irregularities in speed or torque, lower the carrier frequency.
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
C6-01
Carrier frequency upper limit
2.0 to 15.0
kHz 15.0
* B B
* The setting range and the factory setting vary according to the Inverter capacity. The table shows a value of 200 V class, 0.4 kW. (See page NO TAG.)
D In the vector control modes, the carrier frequency is determined by the carrier frequency upper limit
(constant C6-01).
7.3.3 Reference Constants: d
J
Frequency Reference Function: d2-01, d2-02
D
D
The frequency reference function sets the output frequency upper and lower limits.
When the frequency reference is zero and a run command is input, the motor operates at the frequency reference lower limit (d2-02). The motor will not operate, however, if the lower limit is set lower than the minimum output frequency (E1-09).
Change Valid Access Levels
Constant
Numberc
Name
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector d2-01
Frequency reference upper limit
0.0 to 110.0
% 100.0
B B d2-02
Frequency reference lower limit
0.0 to 109.0
% 0.0
B B
D
D
The frequency reference upper and lower limits are set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04), in increments of 1%.
The upper and lower limits of the frequency reference are shown in Figure 7.13.
Internal frequency reference
Frequency reference upper limit (d2-01)
Frequency reference lower limit (d2-02)
Fig
7.13
Set frequency reference
Upper and Lower Limits of the Frequency Reference
- 24
J
Prohibited Frequencies (Jump Frequencies): d3-01 to d3-04
D
D
This function allows the prohibition or “jumping” of certain frequencies within the Inverter’s output frequency range so that the motor can operate without resonant oscillations caused by some machine systems.
It is also used for deadband control.
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector d3-01 B B d3-02 d3-03 d3-04
Jump frequency 1
Jump frequency 2
Jump frequency 3
Jump frequency width
0.0 to 400.0
Hz
0.0 to 400.0
Hz
0.0 to 400.0
Hz
0.0 to 20.0
Hz
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.0
B
B
B
B
B
B
D
D
D
D
D
To disable this function, set the jump frequency references (d3-01 to d3-03) to 0.0 Hz.
For d3-01 to d3-03, set the center values of the frequencies to be jumped. Be sure to set the jump frequency so that d3-03
% d3-02
% d3-01.
For d3-04, set the jump frequency bandwidth. The jump frequency r the jump frequency bandwidth becomes the jump frequency range.
Operation is prohibited within the jump frequency range, but changes during acceleration and deceleration are smooth with no jumps.
The relation between the internal frequency reference and the set frequency references is shown in Fig-
ure 7.14.
Internal frequency reference d3-04
Dotted lines show operation during acceleration/deceleration.
Fig
7.14
d3-03
Set frequency reference d3-02 d3-01
Setting Prohibited Frequencies
J
Hold Reference Memory Selection: d4--01
D
D
D
Constant d4--01 is enabled by making either of the following settings for the multi--function inputs
(H1--01 to H1--06).
x x
Acceleration/deceleration ramp hold (setting: A)
Up command (setting: 10)/down command (setting: 11)
When hold status is established by these external signals, specify whether or not the output frequency is to be retained.
When this function is enabled, operation is re--started after power--up using the frequency reference value that was retained.
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector d4-01
Frequency reference hold function selection
0 1 -0 A A
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Contents
Disabled. Restart after operation stoppage or power--up begins at zero.
Enabled. Restarr after operation stoppage or power--up begins at the held frequency reference.
J
D For information regarding the acceleration/deceleration stop (hold) command and the up/down command, refer to the decription of Multi--function Input (H1).
Trim Control Level: d4--02
D The trim control level is valid when the trim control increase command (setting: 1C) or trim control decrease command (setting: 1D) is set for a multi--function input (H1--01 to H1--06).
7
- 25
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.4 Option Constants: F
D If the trim control increase command is ON when a frequency reference is input on the analog input, the trim control level will be added to the analog frequency reference and then output as the output frequency. If the trim control decrease command is ON, the frequency reference will be decreased by the trim control level.
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector d4-02 +-- Speed limits 0 to 100 % 25 A A
D
D
D
Set the trim control level as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
If the frequency reference minus the trim control level is less than zero, the output frequency will be zero.
Refer to the description of Multi--function Inputs (H1) for details on the trim control increase and trim control decrease commands.
7.3.4 Option Constants: F
J
Installing Option Cards
A maximum of three Option Cards can be installed in the Inverter. The installation location of each is determined by the type of Card. Be sure to install the Cards in their correct locations.
Constants of the Option Cards can be referred or set with the access level Basic.
Table
7.4
Option Card Specifications
Type of card
Pulse Monitor Card
Model
AI-14U
AI-14B
DI-08
DI-16H2
PG-B2
PG-X2
AO-08
AO-12
PO-36F
Specifications
14-bit analog, 2 inputs (voltage/current)
14-bits analog, 3 inputs
8-bit digital input (BCD/binary)
16-bit digital input (BCD/binary)
Complementary, A/B-phase input
Line-driver, A/B-phase input
8-bit analog output, 2 channels
12-bit analog output, 2 channels
Pulse frequency output
Location
C
C
C
A
D
C
A
D
D
Installation Procedure
1.
Turn OFF the Inverter’s main-circuit power supply. Wait at least one minute (or at least three minutes for models of 30 kW or more).
2.
Remove the Inverter’s front cover. Check to be sure that the CHARGE LED is turned OFF.
3.
Check the Option Card’s installation location (A, C, or D). (See Figure 7.15.)
4.
Insert the accessory spacer into the spacer mounting hole in the Inverter mounting base.
5.
Align the Option Card connector with the connector position on the control board, and then pass the spacer to the spacer mounting hole on the card.
Press firmly until the spacer snaps into place.
6.
Connect the Option Card’s FG connection line to the Inverter ground terminal (terminal 12).
- 26
4CN
Option A connector
2CN
Option C connector
3CN
Option D connector
Option A
7CN
Option C
Control board
Option D
Inverter mounting base
Front View Side View
Fig
7.15
Installation Locations for Option Cards
J
Analog Reference Card: F2-01
D
D
When using a AI-14B/A1-14U Analog Reference Card, set constant b1-01 (reference selection) to “3”
(option).
When using a AI-14B, set the function for channels 1 to 3 with constant F2-01. (There are no constants to set for AI-14U.)
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
F2-01
Bi-polar or uni-polar input selection
0 1 -0 B B
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Description
3-channel individual input (CH1: terminal 13; CH2: terminal 14; CH3: terminal 16)
3-channel additional input (Sum of CH1 to CH3 is used as the frequency reference value.) b1-01 = 1 b1-01 = 3
D
D
Constant b1-01 (reference selection) must be set to “1” (external terminal), when 3-channel individual input (setting: 0) is set.
When using a AI-14B and setting 3-channel individual input, the multi-function inputs cannot be set to the Option/Inverter selection function (setting: 2).
7
- 27
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.4 Option Constants: F
Setting: 1 to 5
Setting: 6
J
Digital Reference Card: F3-01
D When using a DI-08 or DI-16H2 Digital Reference Card, set constant b1-01 (reference selection) to
“3” (option) and set the input method with constant F3-01.
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
F3-01 Digital input option 0 to 7 -0 B B
D Settings
Setting
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
Description
BCD 1% unit
BCD 0.1% unit
BCD 0.01% unit
BCD 1 Hz unit
BCD 0.1 Hz unit
BCD 0.01 Hz unit
BCD special setting (5-digit input) (Only when DI-16H2 is used.)
Binary input (Setting is displayed in decimal notation.)
Sign
2 10
4
D
D
The maximum frequency (100% speed) reference will be used when the binary input is set (setting:
7) and all bits are “1.” x x
DI-08: Maximum output frequency reference (255/100%).
DI-16H2: Maximum output frequency reference (16 bits: 30000/100%, 12 bits: 4095/100%).
Setting 6, BCD special setting (5-digit input), is valid only when the D1-16H2 is used. Using this setting, a frequency from 0.00 to 399.98 Hz can be set in BCD. The data input method is different from that for settings of 1 to 5.
8 10
3
4 10
3
2 10
3
1 10
3
8 10
0
4 10
0
2 10
0
1 10
0
1 10
4
8 10
3
4 10
3
2 10
3
1 10
1
8 10
0
4 10
0
2 10
0
J
D
D
The sign bit is used as a data bit, so only positive (plus) data can be set.
The second digit below the decimal point is set by bits 8x10
0
, 4x10
0
, and 2x10
0
, so the settings are made in units of 0.02 Hz. (If these three bits are “111,” “110,” and “101,” they will be recognized as
“9.”)
Analog Monitor Card: F4-01 to F4-04
D When using an AO-08 or AO-12 Analog Monitor Card, set the monitor items and gain with the following constants.
Valid Access Levels
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
F4-01
Channel 1 monitor selection
1 to 38 -2 B B
F4-02 Channel 1 gain 0.00 to 2.50
Multiple
1.00
B B
F4-03
Channel 2 monitor selection
1 to 38 -3 B B
F4-04 Channel 2 gain 0.00 to 2.50
Multiple
0.50
B B
F4--05
F4--06
Channel 1 output bias
Channel 2 output bias
--10.0 to
+10.0
--10.0 to
+10.0
%
%
0.0
0.0
B
B
B
B
Fig
7.16
F4--02
(F4--04)
+
+
Output gain
F4--05
(F4--06)
Output bias
A O
Analog Output Block Diagram
- 28
J
D
D
D
D
For the output monitor selections (F4-01, F4-03), set the numbers for the right side of the “U1” constants in the Table 4.3. The setting range is 1 to 38, but the following numbers cannot be set: 4, 10,
11, 12, 13, 14, 25, and 28 to 35.
When the AO-12 is used, outputs of 0 to r 10 V are possible. For that, set constant H4-07 (multi-function analog output signal level selection) to “1” (0 to r
10 V outputs). There are some monitor items.
However, that can only use outputs of 0 to +10 V even if constant H4-07 is set to “1.”
When the AO-08 is used, only outputs of 0 to +10 V are possible regardless of the constant H4-07 setting.
Set the amount of parallel movement by raising or lowering the output characteristics in the output bias.
Use a percentage (%) as the unit of measurement with 10 V equalling 100%.
DO-02 Digital Output Card Settings: F5-01 F5-02
D Set the output selections in the following constants when using a DO-02 Digital Output Card.
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change
Operation
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
F5-01
Channel 1 output selection
00 to 37 -0 B B
F5-02
Channel 2 output selection
00 to 37 -1 B B
J
D Set the values from Table 7.7.
DO-08 Digital Output Card Settings: F6-01
D Set the output mode in the following constants when using a DO-08 Digital Output Card.
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
F6-01 Output mode selection 0 1 -0 B B
D The items output from the DO-08 will be as follows according to the setting of F6-01.
Setting Terminal Output
0: 8 channels of output
TD5-TD11
TD6-TD11
TD7-TD11
TD8-TD11
TD9-TD11
TD10-TD11
TD1-TD2
TD3-TD4
TD5-TD11
TD6-TD11
TD7-TD11
TD8-TD11
TD9-TD11
TD10-TD11
TD1-TD2
TD3-TD4
Overcurrent SC OC GF
Overvoltage OV
Inverter overload OL2
Fuse blown PUF
Overspeed OS
Inverter overheat OH1 or motor overload OL1
Zero speed detection
Speed agree
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Zero speed detection
Speed agree
Running
Minor fault
7
- 29
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.4 Option Constants: F
Coded Outputs
Bit 3210
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
Meaning
No fault
Overcurrent SC OC GF
Overvoltage OV
Inverter overload OL2
Inverter overheat OH OH1
Overspeed OS
Fuse blown PUF
Braking Resistor Unit overheat RH
Braking Transistor fault RR
Bit 3210
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
Meaning
External fault EF
Controller fault CPF
Motor overload OL1
Not used
Power loss UV1 UV2 UV3
Excessive speed deviation DEV
PG disconnected PGO
Not used.
J
Pulse Monitor Card: F7-01
D When using a PO-36F Pulse Monitor Card, set the output pulse in constant F7-01.
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
F7-01
Frequency multiple selection
0 to 4 -1 B B
D Settings
Setting
2
3
0
1
4
1F
6F
10F
12F
36F
1 x Inverter output frequency
6 x Inverter output frequency
10 x Inverter output frequency
12 x Inverter output frequency
36 x Inverter output frequency
Description
D “F” indicates the output frequency (Hz). For example, if “0” (1F) is set, when the output frequency is 60 Hz there will be an output of 60 pulses per second. (Duty 50%)
- 30
7.3.5 External Terminal Functions: H
This section describes the settings for the external terminal functions.
65
66
77
60
61
62
64
15
16
1A
11
12
13
14
C
E
F
10
A
B
8
9
6
7
4
5
Setting value
1C
1D
1E
1F
0
1
2
3
1B
20 2F
J
Multi-function Input Settings: H1
The settings and functions for the multi-function inputs are listed in Table 7.5.
Table
7.5
Multi-function Input Functions
Function
Control Method
Open Loop
Vector
Flux vector
3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse run command)
Local/Remote selection (ON: Operator, OFF: Constant setting)
Option/Inverter selection (ON: Option card)
Multi-step speed reference 1
When H3-05 is set to “0,” this function is combined with “Master/auxiliary speed switch.”
Multi-step speed reference 2
Multi-step speed reference 3
Jog frequency reference (higher priority than multi-step speed reference)
Accel/Decel time 1
External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)
External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)
Accel/Decel ramp hold (ON: Accel/decel stopped, frequency on hold)
OH2 alarm signal input (ON: OH2 will be displayed)
Multi-function analog input selection (ON: Enable)
Speed control integral reset (ON: Integral control disabled)
Not used. (Do not input this setting.)
Up command (Always set with the down command)
Down command (Always set with the up command)
FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-09)
RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-09)
Fault reset (Reset when turned ON)
Emergency stop (ON: Deceleration to stop in emergency stop time C1-09)
Motor switch command (Motor 2 selection)
Accel/Decel time 2
Constants write enable (ON: All constants can be written-in. OFF: All constants other than frequency monitor are write protected.)
Trim control increase (ON: d4-02 frequencies are added to analog frequency references.)
Trim control decrease (ON: d4-02 frequencies are subtracted from analog frequency references.)
Analog frequency reference sample/hold
Frequency reference terminal 13/14 selection (ON: selects terminal 14)
External fault (Desired settings possible)
Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation
Stopping method: Deceleration to stop, coast to stop, emergency stop or continue operation.
DC injection braking command (ON: Performs DC injection braking)
External speed search command 1: Maximum output frequency (ON: speed search)
External speed search command 2: Set frequency (ON: speed search)
External speed search command 3
KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact)
KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact)
Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch (ON: C5-03)
7
- 31
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.5 External Terminal Functions: H
Constant Settings
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
H1-01
H1-02
H1-03
H1-04
H1-05
H1-06
Multi-function input 1
(terminal 3)
Multi-function input 2
(terminal 4)
Multi-function input 3
(terminal 5)
Multi-function input 4
(terminal 6)
Multi-function input 5
(terminal 7)
Multi-function input 5
(terminal 8)
0 to 77
0 to 77
0 to 77
0 to 77
0 to 77
0 to 77
--
--
--
--
--
--
24
14
3 (0)
4 (3)
6 (4)
8 (6)
B
B
B
B
B
B
D
D
The factory settings in parentheses are for when the Unit is initialized for 3-wire control.
The following table shows the settings and section references for some common functions.
Function Setting Section
3-wire sequence (forward/reverse run command)
Multi-step speed references 1 to 3 and jog frequency reference
Accel/Decel time 1 and 2
Emergency stop
FJOG/RJOG commands
Terminal 13/14 switch
Timer function input
0
3 to 6
7 1A
15
12 13
1F
18
6.1.8
6.1.8
6.1.8
6.1.8
6.1.8
6.1.8
7.3.1
B
B
B
B
B
B
Local/Remote Selection (Setting: 1)
OFF Operate with the frequency reference and run command specified in b1-01 (the frequency reference source) and b1-02 (run source).
ON Operate with the frequency reference and run command set at the Digital Operator.
D
D
D With this setting, the multi-function input selects the input method for the frequency reference and run command.
The input method can be switched only when the Inverter is stopped.
The Digital Operator LOCAL/REMOTE Key is disabled when this function has been set in a multifunction input.
Option Card/Inverter Selection (Setting: 2)
OFF
ON
The Inverter frequency reference is enabled.
The Option Card frequency reference is enabled.
D
D
D
With this setting, the multi-function input enables the frequency reference input from the Inverter itself or the one from Option Card. The frequency reference input can be switched only when the Inverter is stopped.
Be sure that b1-01 (the frequency reference source selector) has been set to 0 (Operator) or 1 (external terminal). Only the frequency reference from the Option Card will be enabled if b1-01 is set to 3 (Option PCB).
Setting 2 can’t be selected if the AI-14B is being used and constant F2-01 (AI-14 Input Selector) is set to 0.
External Baseblock NO (Setting: 8)
OFF
ON
Normal operation
Baseblock
External Baseblock NC (Setting: 9)
OFF
ON
Baseblock
Normal operation
D
D
With either of these settings, the multi-function input controls baseblock operation.
Baseblock is an interruption of the Inverter output. The motor coasts while the baseblock command is being input.
- 32
D
D
The output frequency is retained internally, so the same frequency will be output again when the baseblock command is cleared. The output frequency will change in a step pattern when the output resumes, so take some safety precaution such as turning OFF the run command -- especially if the baseblock command was input when the motor was operating at high speed. (When the run command is turned OFF, the internally retained output frequency is reset to zero.)
After a baseblock command is cleared, the voltage will be restored in the voltage recovery time set in
L2-04.
OFF ON
Run/stop command
Input
Baseblock command
Cleared
Frequency reference
The retained output frequency is output in a step pattern.
Output frequency
Coasting
Fig
7.17
Baseblock Command
Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold (Setting: A)
OFF Normal operation or restart acceleration/deceleration.
ON Pause acceleration/deceleration and maintain the present frequency.
D
D
D
D
With this setting, the multi-function input pauses acceleration or deceleration and maintains (holds) the output frequency.
Acceleration/deceleration is restarted when the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold input is turned
OFF.
The motor will be stopped if a stop command is input while the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold input is ON.
When constant d4-01 (the frequency reference hold function selector) is set to 1, the held frequency will be stored in memory. This stored frequency will be retained even after a power loss and the motor will be restarted at this frequency when a run command is input again.
Run/stop command
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF ON OFF ON
Acceleration/deceleration ramp hold
Frequency reference
7 d4-01 = 1
Output frequency d4-01 = 0
Fig
7.18
Hold Hold
Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold
D
D
When d4-01 is set to 1, the held output frequency will be retained. To operate at this frequency even after the Inverter is stopped, input the run command with the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold input
ON.
When d4-01 is set to 0, the output frequency will be held at zero if the run command is input with the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold input ON.
OH2 Alarm Signal (Setting: B)
OFF
ON
Normal operation
Normal operation (The warning message “OH2” will be displayed on the Digital Operator.)
D The message “OH2” will be displayed on the Digital Operator while the multi-function input is ON and the display will revert to its previous status when the input is turned OFF. (It isn’t necessary to reset the alarm.) The Inverter will continue operation without detecting a fault.
- 33
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.5 External Terminal Functions: H
D With this setting, a temperature sensor can be connected to the multi-function input to display a warning message when the temperature rises too high.
Multi-function Analog Input Selection (Setting: C)
OFF
ON
Disables the multi-function analog input (terminal 16).
Enables the multi-function analog input (terminal 16).
D
D
With this setting, the multi-function input can be used to enable or disable the multi-function analog input.
Turning the input OFF has the same effect as setting H3-05 (the multi-function analog input selector for terminal 16) to 1F.
Speed Control Integral Reset (Setting: E)
OFF Operates with PI-control speed control loop.
ON Operates with P-control speed control loop. (The speed control integral values are reset by the integral time constant.)
D It is possible to switch between these speed control modes during operation.
Up and Down Commands (Settings: 10 and 11)
Up command
Down command
Operation
ON
OFF
Acceleration
OFF
ON
Deceleration
ON
ON
Hold
OFF
OFF
Hold
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
With these settings, the multi-function inputs can be used to control the Inverter’s output frequency.
When using this function, be sure to set both the up command (setting 10) and the down command
(setting 11) for 2 multi-function inputs. An OPE03 option fault will occur if only one of these commands is set or if an acceleration/deceleration ramp hold input (setting A) is set at the same time.
Be sure to set constant b1-02 (the run command source selector) to 1 (external terminal). The up/down function won’t operate with any other b1-02 setting.
The frequency up/down commands operate according to the normal acceleration/deceleration times in C1-01 to C1-08.
The upper and lower limits for the output frequency with the up/down commands are determined by the following settings: x Upper limit = Maximum output frequency (E1-04) Reference upper limit (d2-01) 100 x Lower limit = Maximum output frequency (E1-04) Reference lower limit (d2-02) 100
When frequency reference (voltage) terminal 13 or frequency reference (current) terminal 14 is being used as a frequency reference input, the greatest frequency value becomes the lower limit.
When the up/down function is being used, the output frequency will be accelerated to the lower limit if a run command is input.
When the up/down function and jog frequency reference are both assigned to multi-function inputs, an ON jog frequency reference input has the highest priority.
Multi-step speed references 1 to 8 are all disabled when the up/down function has been set.
The output frequency held by the up/down function will be stored in memory if d4-01 (the frequency reference hold function selector) is set to 1. This output frequency will be retained even after a power loss, and operation will be restarted at this frequency the next time that a run command is input. The stored output frequency will be cleared from memory if the up or down command is turned ON while the run command is OFF (see “Reference frequency reset” in Figure 7.19) .
- 34
Output frequency
Upper limit
Accelerates to lower limit
Lower limit
Same frequency d4-01 = 1 d4-01 = 0
Forward/Stop
Up command
Down command
ON
ON
ON
Reference frequency reset
Speed Agree signal ON
Power supply
ON ON
The Speed Agree signal remains ON while the run command is ON and the motor is not accelerating or decelerating.
Fig
7.19
Timing Chart for Up and Down Commands
Fault Reset (Setting: 14)
OFF
ON
Normal operation
Resets faults when input goes from OFF to ON. (Normal operation when no fault has occurred.)
D
D
D
D
With this setting, the multi-function input resets faults that have occurred.
When a fault has occurred, be sure to find out what kind of fault occurred, take steps to correct the cause of the fault, and restart the Inverter. It is possible to damage the Inverter by repeatedly resetting a fault without correcting the cause.
To resume operation after a fault has occurred, turn the run command OFF, turn the fault reset input from ON to OFF, and then turn the run command ON again. A fault cannot be reset while the run command is ON.
If a fault hasn’t occurred, turning the fault reset ON and OFF will have no effect on operation.
Motor Switch Command (Motor 2 Selection, Setting: 16)
D CLOSED: Motor 2 constants used.
Operation
Motor Switch command
(CLOSED for motor 2)
U , V , W
(T1 , T2 , T3)
Multi-function input
Note Use an external sequence to switch between M1 and M2 and to confirm the motor selection status.
M1
IM Motor 1 (main motor)
M2
IM
Motor 2 (auxiliary motor)
7
Motor selection monitor
(CLOSED for motor 2)
Multi-function output
- 35
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.5 External Terminal Functions: H x x x x
The control method, V/f characteristics, and motor constants recorded in the Inverter can be switched by setting “16” (motor switch command) for a constant from H1-01 to 06 (multi-function inputs), and then inputting a signal while the motor is stopped.
The current motor selection can be monitored at a multi-function output terminal by setting “1C”
(motor selection monitor) for a constant from H2-01 to 03 (multi-function outputs).
Set the Basic (3) or Advanced (4) access level in the initialize setting A1-01 (access level).
The constants being used will changed as shown in the following table for the motor switch command.
Motor Switch command OPEN (motor 1) CLOSED (motor 2)
Control method
A1-02 (control method in initialize settings)
E3-01 (motor 2 control method)
V/f characteristics E1-04 to 13 (V/f characteristics)
E4-01 to 07 ( motor 2 V/f characteristics)
Motor constants
Motor selection monitor
E2-01 to 09 (motor constants)
OPEN
E5-01 to 06 (motor 2 motor constants)
CLOSED
D The timing chart for switching between motor 1 and motor 2 is shown below.
OFF ON
Motor switch command
M1 operation
ON OFF
Motor switching contactor
OFF ON
M2 operation
OFF
Motor selection monitor
Approx.
200 ms
Approx.
50 ms
ON
Forward (reverse) command
(Approx. 500 ms for control with a PG)
OFF ON
Fig
7.20
Turn ON the Forward (reverse) command only after confirming the status of the motor selection monitor.
Timing Chart for Switching from Motor 1 to Motor 2
Constants Write Enable (Setting: 1B)
OFF
ON
Write-protects all constants except for frequency monitor.
Allows constants specified in Initialize mode to be changed.
D With this setting, the multi-function input can be used to write-protect the Operator constants. When the input is OFF, the Operation mode frequency can be monitored and the frequency can be changed but other changes are prohibited.
Trim Control Increase and Decrease (Settings: 1C and 1D)
Trim Control Increase
ON OFF
OFF ON Trim Control Decrease
Output frequency Reference frequency
+ trim control level
(d4-02)
Reference frequency -trim control level
(d4-02)
ON
ON
Reference frequency
OFF
OFF
Reference frequency
D
D
D
The trim control increase function adds the level in d4-02 to the analog frequency reference.
The trim control decrease function subtracts the level in d4-02 to the analog frequency reference.
These functions are effective when the frequency reference is input from an analog input. These functions must both be set at the same time or an OPE03 fault will occur. The analog frequency reference won’t be changed when both the trim control increase and decrease inputs are ON. The output frequency will be zero when the trim control decrease input is ON and the result of the subtraction is less than zero.
Analog Frequency Reference Sample/Hold (Setting: 1E)
D The analog input value will become the frequency reference 100 ms after the multi-function input closes.
- 36
CLOSED
Sample/hold command
Analog input
100 ms
CLOSED
100 ms
CLOSED
100 ms
2C
2D
2E
2F
28
29
2A
2B
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
Fig
7.21
Frequency reference
Analog Frequency Reference Sample/Hold
D
D
The analog frequency reference sample/hold function is valid only for terminals 13, 14, and 16 or for the analog inputs from the AI-14U or AI-14B.
An OPE03 fault will occur if two or more of the following signals turn ON at the same time: acceleration/deceleration ramp hold command (0A), up/down commands (10 or 11), trim control increase/decrease commands (1C or 1D), and the analog frequency reference sample/hold command.
External Faults (Settings: 20 to 2F)
D
D
With this setting, the multi-function input can be used to stop the Inverter or output an alarm when a malfunction or fault occurs in a peripheral device.
There are 16 external fault inputs available with all 16 combinations of the following variables. Select the setting with the desired combination.
x Input level: Normally open or normally closed x x
Detection method: Always or During operation only
Operation selection: Deceleration to stop, Coast to stop, Emergency stop, or Continue opera tion
Table
7.6
External Fault Settings
Input level Detection method
Setting NO contact
NC contact
Always
During operation
Deceleration to stop
(Fault)
Operation selection
Coast to stop (Fault)
Emergency stop
(Fault)
Continue operation
(Alarm)
D
D
For the input level, select whether you want a fault to be detected when the input signal is ON (normally open input) or OFF (normally closed input).
For the detection method, select whether you want faults to be detected any time that the Inverter is
ON or only during operation.
7
- 37
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.5 External Terminal Functions: H
D
D
For the operation selection, select the processing method that you want to be performed when a fault has been detected.
x Deceleration to stop: A fault is output and the output stopped in the selected deceleration time.
x x
Coast to stop: A fault is output and the Inverter output is cut off.
Emergency stop: A fault is output and the output stopped in the emergency stop time (C1-09).
x Continue operation: An alarm is output and operation continues.
When an alarm is going to be output externally, be sure to set one of the multi-function outputs (H2-01,
02, and 03) to alarm (setting 10).
D An external fault setting cannot be set in more than one multi-function input.
D Unlike other constant settings, the external fault settings have an input procedure, as shown in the following diagrams.
Setting Procedure
1.
When setting an external fault function, press the Enter Key when “External Fault” is displayed to bring up the “Input Level” display.
DATA
ENTER
External Fault Input level
ESC
Detection method
Operation
Selection
Fig
7.22
Setting Procedure for External Fault Function
2.
Press the Increment Key to switch displays as follows:
“Detection Method” o
“Operation Selection” o
“Input Method”
- 38
3.
Press the Enter Key at the desired constant to select that constant.
At this point, the Increment and Decrement Keys can be pressed to scroll to the available settings for the selected constant. Press the Enter Key to select the displayed constant setting.
(Press the Escape Key to cancel the operation without changing the constant setting.)
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
Input level NO Contact Set constant
ESC
NC Contact
Detection method
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Always
DATA
ENTER
Set constant
During operation
Operation selection
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Deceleration to Stop
Coast to Stop
DATA
ENTER
Set constant
Emergency
Stop
Fig
7.23
Continue operation
Procedure to Change Constant Settings
7
- 39
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.5 External Terminal Functions: H
DC Injection Braking Command (Setting: 60)
OFF Normal operation
ON Applies DC injection braking if the Inverter is stopped. (Applies initial excitation when flux vector control is being used.)
D
D
D DC injection braking is used to prevent the motor from rotating due to inertia or external forces when the Inverter is stopped.
DC injection braking is performed if the DC injection braking input is ON while the Inverter is stopped.
If a run command or jog command (jog, forward jog, or reverse jog) is input, the DC injection braking will be cleared and motor operation will be started.
Run command
OFF
ON
OFF ON DC injection braking command
Output frequency
DC braking
DC braking
Fig
7.24
E1-09 Min. output frequency b2-01 Zero speed level
Timing Chart for DC Injection Braking Command
External Speed Search 1 (Settings: 61)
OFF Normal operation
ON Starts a speed search from the maximum output frequency.
External Speed Search 2 (Settings: 62)
OFF
ON
Normal operation
Starts a speed search from the set frequency (from the current reference frequency when the external search command turn ON).
D
D
D
Either one of the external search functions can be set, but not both.
The speed search function can be used to operate the motor without tripping when switching operation from a commercial power supply and the Inverter or starting a coasting motor.
The speed search will begin after the minimum baseblock time (L2-03) has elapsed when the run command is input after the external search command has been turned ON.
Run command OFF ON
External search command
OFF ON
5 ms min.
Maximum output frequency or set frequency
Deceleration time set in b3-03.
Frequency reference that was set.
Output frequency
Fig
7.25
Minimum baseblock time
Timing Chart for the External Search Command
- 40
0
1
2
3
4
5
31
37
40
41
1F
20
30
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
11
13
14
15
16
E
F
10
B
C
D
8
9
6
7
A
Setting value
Speed Control (ASR) Proportional Gain Switch (Setting: 77)
OFF The gain is set according to the values in C5-01, C5-03, and C5-07.
ON The gain is set to the value in C5-03 (ASR proportional gain 2).
J
D
D
With this setting, the multi-function input switches the proportional gain used in speed control (ASR).
The integral time is not changed.
Refer to 6.3.6 Speed Control (ASR) Structure for more details on constants C5-01, C5-03, and C5-07.
Multi-function Output Settings: H2
The settings and functions for the multi-function outputs are listed in Table 7.7.
Table
7.7
Multi-function Output Functions
Function
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Flux vector
During run ON: run command is ON or voltage is being output)
Zero-speed
Frequency agree 1: (Detection width L4-02)
Desired frequency agree 1 (ON: Output frequency = r L4-01, detection width in L4-02)
Frequency (Four) detection 1 (ON: +L4-01 output frequency --L4-01, detection width in L4-02)
Frequency (Four) detection 2
(ON: Output frequency +L4-01 or output frequency % --L4-01, detection width in L4-02)
Inverter operation ready READY: After initialization, no faults
During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection
During baseblock (ON: during baseblock)
Frequency reference selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator)
Run command selection (ON: Run command from Operator)
Overtorque detection 1 NO (NO contact: Overtorque detection at ON)
Loss of frequency reference (Effective when operation selection is “1” for L4-05 frequency reference missing)
Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault)
Fault (ON: Faults other than CPF00, CPF01 have occurred.)
Not used. (Do not set.)
Minor fault (ON: Alarm displayed)
Fault reset command active
Frequency agree 2 (Detection width: L4-04)
Desired frequency agree 2 (ON: Output frequency = L4-03, detection width in L4-04)
Frequency detection 3 (ON: Output frequency
%
--L4-03, detection width in L4-04)
Frequency detection 4 (ON: Output frequency --L4-03, detection width in L4-04)
Overtorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Ttorque detection at OFF)
Overtorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact: Torque detection at ON)
Overtorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF)
During reverse run (ON: During reverse run)
During baseblock 2 (OFF: During baseblock)
Motor selection (ON: During motor 1 selection)
Regenerating (ON: Regenerating)
Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled)
Motor overload (OL1) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: Temperature exceeds L8-02 setting)
During torque limit (current limit) (ON: During torque limit)
During speed limit. (ON: During speed limit)
During run 2 (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base block, DC injection braking, initial excitation, operation stop.
Zero--speed 2 (ON: Zero--speed, not included during Y/ winding change)
Motor selection (ON: During motor 2 selection)
7
- 41
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.5 External Terminal Functions: H
Constant Settings
User
Constant
Number
H2-01
H2-02
H2-03
Name
Multi-function input
(terminal 9-10)
Multi-function input
(terminal 25)
Multi-function input
(terminal 26)
Change during
Operation
Range
0 to 41
0 to 41
0 to 41
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
-0 B B
--
--
1
2
B
B
B
B
D The following table shows the settings and section references for functions that are described in more detail in this chapter.
Function Setting Section
Frequency Agree 1
Desired Frequency Agree 1
Frequency Detection 1
Frequency Detection 2
4
5
2
3
7.3.6
Overtorque Detection 1 (NO) B
Overtorque Detection Settings: L6-01 to L6-06 in
7.3.6
Loss of Frequency Reference
Timer Function Output
Frequency Agree 2
Desired Frequency Agree 2
Frequency Detection 3
Frequency Detection 4
Overtorque Detection 1 (NC)
Overtorque Detection 2 (NO)
Overtorque Detection 2 (NC)
15
16
17
18
19
C
12
13
14
7.3.6
7.3.6
D i S i L6 01 L6 06 i
D Refer to Table 7.7 Multi-function Output Functions for information on the following functions.
Function Setting
Inverter Operation Ready
DC Bus Undervoltage
During Baseblock
Frequency Reference Selection
Run Command Selection
Braking Resistor Fault
Fault
Minor Fault
Fault Reset Command Active
During Reverse Run
During Baseblock 2
Regenerating
Restart Enabled
During Torque Limit (Current Limit)
During Speed Limit
11
1A
1B
1D
1E
30
31
A
D
E
10
8
9
6
7
- 42
During Run (Setting: 0)
OFF
ON
The run command is OFF and there is not output voltage.
The run command is ON or a voltage is being output.
During Run 2 (Setting: 37)
OFF
ON
The Inverter is not outputting a frequency. (Baseblock, DC injection braking, initial excitation, or stopped)
The Inverter is outputting a frequency.
D These outputs can be used to indicate the Inverter’s operating status.
Run command OFF ON
Baseblock command
OFF ON
Output frequency
During run 1 output OFF ON
During run 2 output
Fig
7.26
OFF ON
Timing Chart for “During RUN” Output
Zero-speed (Setting: 1)
OFF
ON
The output frequency is greater than the minimum output frequency (E1-09).
(With flux vector control, motor speed is greater than the zero speed level (b2-01).)
The output frequency is less than the minimum output frequency (E1-09).
(With flux vector control, motor speed is less than the zero speed level (b2-01).)
Output frequency
(Motor speed)
Minimum output frequency (E1-09)
(Zero speed level (b2-01) when flux vector control is being used.)
Zero-speed output
Fig
7.27
OFF ON
Timing Chart for Zero-speed
Motor Overload (OL1) Pre-alarm (Setting: 1F)
OFF
ON
The motor protection function’s electronic thermal value is less than 90% of the detection level.
The motor protection function’s electronic thermal value is greater than 90% of the detection level.
D
D
This output function is valid when the motor overload protection function is enabled (L1-01 =1).
This output can be used to warn of overheating before the protection function itself operates.
Inverter Overheat (OH) Pre-alarm (Setting: 20)
OFF
ON
The cooling fin temperature is less than the “OH Pre-Alarm Level” set in L8-02.
The cooling fin temperature exceeds the “OH Pre-Alarm Level” set in L8-02.
D This output function indicates that the temperature of the cooling fins reaches the temperature set in
L8-02 (the Inverter overheating alarm detection level).
Speed reference limit (Setting: 31)
OFF
ON
Other than ON condition
Enables the speed reference limit in the following conditions (During flux vector control mode):
1. Frequency reference Frequency reference upper limit (d2--01)
Frequency reference Frequency reference lower limit (d2--02)
Frequency reference Output frequency lower limit of the multi--function analog input
(Setting: 9)
2. The frequency reference is less than the Min. output frequency (E1--09), and b1--05 is set to
1, 2, ot 5.
7
- 43
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.5 External Terminal Functions: H
J
Multi-function Analog Input/Frequency Reference (Current): H3-05, H3-09
Constant Settings
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
10
11
12
13
14
15
9
A
6
7
2
5
0
1
Setting
H3-05
H3-09
Multi-function analog input (terminal 16)
Multi-function analog input (terminal 14)
0 to 1F
0 to 1F
--
--
0
1F
B
A
B
A
Table
Function
7.8
Auxiliary frequency reference (H3-05)
Frequency gain
Frequency bias
Accel/Decel change (reduction coefficient)
DC injection braking current
Overtorque detection level
Frequency reference lower limit level
Jump frequency
Forward side torque limit
Reverse side torque limit
Regeneration for torque limit
Torque reference/torque limit for speed control
Torque compensation bias
Forward/reverse torque limit
Disable analog input (H3-05)
Frequency Reference (H3-09)
Multi-function Input/Frequency Reference (Voltage) Function
Equivalent of 100% Input (10 V or 20 mA)
Control Method
Openloop
Vector
Flux
Vector
Maximum output frequency
Frequency reference (voltage) command value
Maximum output frequency (added to H3-03)
Accel/Decel times (C1-01 to C1-08)
Inverter rated output current
Motor rated torque
Maximum output frequency
Maximum output frequency
Motor rated torque
Motor rated torque
Motor rated torque
Motor rated torque
Motor rated torque
Motor rated torque
----
Maximum output frequency
D The analog input signal level, gain, and bias are set with the following constants.
Terminal 16 signal level selector H3-04 (0 to +10 V or 0 to r 10 V)
Terminal 16 input gain H3-06
Terminal 16 input bias
Terminal 14 signal level selector
Terminal 14 input gain
Terminal 14 input bias
H3-07
H3-08 (0 to +10 V, 0 to r 10 V, or 4 to 20 mA)
H3-10
H3-11
D
D
D
D
When a voltage input is being input to terminal 14, be sure to disconnect jumper wire J1 on the control
PC board.
The input resistance will be destroyed if a voltage input is used without disconnecting the jumper wire.
Set the time constant in constant H3-12 when adding a primary delay filter to an analog input. This filter time constant applies to all three of the analog inputs.
Settings 2 and D cannot be set at the same time. OPE07 will be detected.
- 44
Analog Input Characteristics
D
D
Analog input characteristics for a gain of 100.0% and a bias of 0.0% are shown for setting examples in Table 7.9.
To set over 100% for a 10 V input (e.g., 300%/10 V), set the gain to 300% in H3-06 for terminal 16 and H3-10 for terminal 14.
Table
7.9
Analog Input Characteristics
S Auxiliary Frequency Reference (Setting: 0)
S Frequency Bias (Setting: 2)
S PID Feedback (Setting: B)
S Frequency reference (H3-09 setting: 1F)
S Frequency Gain (Setting: 1)
S Output Voltage Bias (Setting: 4)
S DC Injection Braking Current (Setting: 6)
S Acceleration/Deceleration Time Gain (Setting: 5)
100 %
100 % 100 %
-10 V
0 10 V
-10 V 0 10 V
-10 V
10 %
0 1 V 10 V
When set to 1, the setting of H3-02 will be added to achieve the final gain.
--100 %
S DC Injection Braking Current (Setting: 6)
S Overtorque Detection Level (Setting: 7)
S Stall Prevention Level (Setting: 8) S Output Frequency Lower Limit (Setting: 9)
S Jump Frequency (Setting: A)
100 %
100 %
100 %
30 %
-10 V 0 10 V
-10 V 0 3 V 10 V
-10 V 0 10 V
Only the overtorque detection 1 output can be used when “7” is set to use overtorque detection for a multi-function output.
S Torque Reference (Setting: 13)
S Torque Compensation Bias (Setting: 14)
S Forward Torque Limit (Setting: 10)
S Reverse Torque Limit (Setting: 11)
S Regenerative Torque Limit (Setting: 12)
100 %
100 %
S Forward/Reverse Torque (Speed) Limit (Setting: 15)
100 %
7
-10 V
0 10 V -10 V 0 10 V 0 10 V
--100 % --100 %
- 45
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.5 External Terminal Functions: H
J
Multi-function Analog Output Settings: H4-01 to H4-07
Function Selection Constants: H4-01, H4-04
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
H4-01
H4-04
Monitor selection (terminal 21)
Monitor selection (terminal 23)
Range
1 to 35
1 to 35
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
--
--
2
3
B
B
B
B
D
D
The multi-function outputs can be set to monitor any of the U1 Inverter status items by setting the last two digits of the constant number (U1jj ).
Refer to page - 12 for a table listing all of these U1 settings.
Settings 4, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 25, 28 and 34 can’t be set and settings 29, 30, and 31 aren’t used.
Adjusting the Monitor Output: H4-02, -03, -05, -06
User
Constant
Number
H4-02
H4-03
H4-05
H4-06
Name
Gain (terminal 21)
Bias (terminal 21)
Gain (terminal 23)
Bias (terminal 23)
Change during
Operation
Range
0.00 to 2.50
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Multiple
1.00
B B
--10.0 to
+10.0
%
0.00 to 2.50
Multiple
--10.0 to
+10.0
%
0.0
0.50
0.0
B
B
B
B
B
B
D
D
For the output gain, set what multiple of 10 V will correspond to a 100% output of the monitored item.
For the output bias, set the amount that the output characteristic will be shifted vertically.
Set this amount as a percentage, with 10 V corresponding to 100%.
Output voltage
Gain u 10 V
10 V
0 V
0 %
Fig
7.28
Bias u 10 V
100
100 %
Monitor Output Adjustments
Monitored item
Multi-function Analog Output Signal Level: H4-07
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
H4-07
Analog output signal level selection
0 1
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
-0 B B
D Settings
Setting
0
1
0 to +10 V (Absolute value output)
0 to 10 V
Function
J
D
D
D
This signal level setting applies to analog outputs 1 and 2 (terminals 21 and 23).
When the 0 to r
10 V signal level is used to output speed values (frequency reference, output frequency, or motor speed), positive voltage indicates Inverter output in the forward direction and negative voltage indicates Inverter output in the reverse direction. (Assuming a bias setting of 0.0.)
There are some monitor items that are limited to the 0 to +10 V signal range even when the 0 to r 10 V signal level has been selected. Refer to Table 4.3 Status Monitor Items for details.
MEMOBUS Communications Settings: H5-01 to H5-05
Station Node Address: H5-01
D Set the Inverter node address.
- 46
Constant
Number
H5-01
Name
Station address
Change during
Operation
Range
0 to 20
Unit
Setting
-1F
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
A
Flux Vector
A
Baud Rate: H5-02
D Set the baud rate for MEMOBUS communications.
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Range
H5-02 Communication speed selection
0 to 3
D Settings
Setting
0
1
2
3
1200 bps
2400 bps;
4800 bps
9600 bps
Unit
Setting
-3
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
A
Flux Vector
A
Baud Rate
Communication Parity: H5-03
D Set the parity for MEMOBUS communications.
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
H5-03
Communication parity selection
0 to 2
D Settings
Setting
0
1
2
No parity
Even parity
Odd parity
Function
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
-0 A A
Stopping Method after Communications Error: H5-04
D Set the stopping method to used after a communications error is detected.
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
H5-04
Stopping method after communication error
0 to 3 -3 A A
D Settings
Setting
0
1
2
3
Function
Deceleration to stop (deceleration time:C1-02)
Coast to stop
Emergency stop (deceleration time:C1-09)
Continue operation (display only)
Communications Error Detection: H5-05
D Set whether or not to detect a communications timeout as a communications error.
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
H5-05
Communication error detection selection
0 1 -1 A A
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Do not detect as communications error.
Detect as communications error.
Function
7
- 47
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.6 Protective Functions: L
7.3.6 Protective Functions: L
J
Motor Protection Settings: L1-01, L1-02
Motor Protection Selection: L1-01
Constant
Number
Name
Change
Operation
L1-01
Motor protection selection
Setting
Range
0 1
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
-1 B B
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Disabled.
Enabled.
Function
D
D
D
D
D
This setting enables or disables the motor overload protection function.
The rated current setting (E2-01) is used as a basis for overload detection.
Disable the motor protection function (setting 0) when two or more motors are connected to a single
Inverter. Use another method to provide overload protection separately to each motor, such as connecting a thermal overload relay to the power line of each motor.
The motor protection function may not protect a motor when the power supply is turned ON and OFF frequently, because the thermal value is reset each time that the power is turned OFF.
If the Overload OL1 alarm (1F) is set in one of the multi-function outputs (H2-01 to H2-03), the output will be turned ON when the electronic thermal value reaches 90% of the overload detection level.
Motor Protection Time Constant: L1-02
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
L1-02
Motor protection time constant
Range
0.1 to 5.0
Unit
Minutes
Setting
1.0
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
B B
D
D
D
D
Normally it isn’t necessary to change this setting. (The factory setting is a 150%, 1 minute capacity.)
Set the electronic thermal protection operation time if a 150% overload is applied after operating continuously at the motor’s rated current (hot start).
When the motor’s overload capacity level is known, set the hot-start overload resistance level for the motor, but be sure to allow some margin for safety.
Decrease this setting when you want to detect an overload more quickly.
Electronic Thermal Time Characteristics
In this example, L1-02 is set to 1 minute, the motor is operating at 60 Hz, and general-purpose motor characteristics are used.
Operating time (minutes)
0.4
1
10
7
3
Cold start
0.1
0
Fig
7.29
Hot start
100 150 200
Motor Protection Operating Time
Motor current (%)
(E2-01 is 100%.)
- 48
J
Momentary Power Loss Settings: L2-01 to L2-05
Momentary Power Loss Detection: L2-01
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
L2-01
Momentary power loss detection
Range
0 to 2
Unit
Setting
-0
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
B B
D Settings
Setting
0
1
2
Function
Disabled. (An undervoltage fault is detected when there is a momentary power loss.)
Enabled. (Restarts if power is restored within the L2-02 time. An under-voltage fault is detected for a longer power loss.)
Enabled during CPU operation. (Restarts if power is restored while the CPU is operating. An undervoltage fault is not detected.)
D
D
D
This constant specifies the processing that is performed when a momentary power loss occurs.
When power loss ridethru is enabled (setting 1 or 2), operation will be restarted after a speed search if the power is restored within the allowed time interval.
When power loss ridethru is disabled (setting 0), an undervoltage fault will be detected if power is interrupted for more than 15 ms.
Momentary Power Loss Ridethru Time: L2-02
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
0.0 to 2.0
Unit s
Setting
0.7
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
B B
D
D
The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The factory setting shown in the table is for a 200
V class, 0.4 kW Inverter. (See page NO TAG.)
This setting is valid only when constant L2-01 is set to 1. Set the power loss ridethru time in seconds.
7
- 49
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.6 Protective Functions: L
Minimum Baseblock Time: L2-03
User
Constant
Number
L2-03
Name
Min. baseblock time
Change during
Operation
Range
0.0 to 5.0
Unit s
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
0.5
B B
D
D
D
D
D
The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The factory setting shown in the table is for a 200
V class, 0.4 kW Inverter. (See page NO TAG.)
This setting is used with the speed search and DC injection braking functions.
Set the time required for the leakage voltage to dissipate. Increase the setting if an overcurrent (OC) occurs when the speed search or DC injection braking function starts.
Set the baseblock time during winding change. Time for winding change varies according to the setting. (For example, lower the setting, and time for winding change is also reduced.) Overcurrent (OC) might occur if setting is too low.
This setting is valid for speed searches performed after a momentary power loss and regular speed searches.
Voltage Recovery Time: L2-04
Change
Constant
Number
L2-04
Name
Voltage recovery time
Operation
Setting
Range
0.0 to 5.0
Unit s
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
0.3
A A
D
D
D
Set the time allowed for the normal voltage to be restored after completion of the speed search.
For a 200 V class Inverter, this is the time in seconds for voltage to be restored from 0 VAC to 200 VAC.
For a 400 V class Inverter, this is the time in seconds for voltage to be restored from 0 VAC to 400 VAC.
This setting is valid for speed searches after a momentary power loss, regular speed searches, the voltage changes with energy-saving control, and the voltage changes with baseblock clearing.
Set the voltage recovery time after baseblock during winding change. Ovrevoltage (OV) might occur if setting is too low.
Undervoltage Detection Level: L2-05
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
L2-05
Undervoltage detection level
Setting
Range
Unit
150 to 210
(300 to 420) VDC
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
190
(380)
A A
D
D
D
The values in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters. (See page NO TAG.)
Normally it isn’t necessary to change this setting.
Use this constant when you want to add an AC reactor and lower the main circuit undervoltage detection level. Be sure to set a main circuit DC voltage value (V) that will detect a main circuit undervoltage.
KEB Deceleration Rate L2-06
Constant
Number
L2-06
Name
KEB deceleration rate
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
0.0 to 100.0
0.1
Setting
0.0
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
A A
D
D
D
D
The KEB function restores the operating conditions for momentary power loss by applying a frequency deceleration to create inertia energy when a power loss occurs, and thus avoid the power loss.
This function is normally used with film lines and other applications where multiple Inverters are connected to the main DC line. Synchronous deceleration for power loss prevents the line from stopping as the result of speed fluctuations.
The KEB operation is performed using a KEB command (setting of 65 or 66) for a multi-function input.
Applicable Capacities
200 V class Inverters: 0.4 to 15 kW
400 V class Inverters: 0.4 to 18.5 kW
- 50
Operation
D L2-06 = 0
The motor is automatically accelerated based on the emergency stop time (C1-09) so that the DC mainline voltage does not go below the UV level. The momentary power loss ridethru time (L2-02) is not used.
D L2-06 0
The motor is decelerated to the KEB frequency level using the momentary power loss ridethru time
(L2-02) and then is accelerated to the original frequency reference using acceleration time 1 (C1-01).
The KEB frequency level is calculated from the KEB frequency rate using the following equation.
KEB frequency level Output frequency before power loss [1 -- (setting of L2-06)/100)]%
Multi-function input terminal setting
( H1
-
01 to 06 = 65 or 66)
OFF ON OFF
Output frequency
L2
-
06
C1
-
01
Momentary power loss ridethru time (L2-02) Output frequency (1 --
L2-06
100%
)
J
Stall Prevention Function Settings: L3-01 to L3-06
D
D
A stall occurs if the rotor cannot keep up with the rotating magnetic field on the motor stator side when a large load is applied to the motor or a sudden acceleration/deceleration is performed.
In the Inverter, stall prevention functions can be set independently for accelerating, running, and decelerating. (Some functions are restricted depending on the control method.)
Stall Prevention Selection During Acceleration: L3-01
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
L3-01
Stall prevention selection during accel
0 to 2 --
Setting
1
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
B
D Settings
Setting
0
1
2
Function
Disabled. (Accelerate according to the settings. Stalls may occur with large loads.)
Enabled. (Stop acceleration if L3-02 setting is exceeded. Accelerate again when current recovers.)
Optimum acceleration (Adjust acceleration so that the L3-02 isn’t exceeded by much. Disregard the acceleration time setting.)
D
D
When setting 1 (enabled) is selected, acceleration is stopped if the motor current exceeds the acceleration stall prevention level. Acceleration is started again when the current falls below this level. The acceleration time can be longer than the setting depending on the load.
When setting 2 (optimum acceleration) is selected, acceleration is performed using the acceleration stall prevention level as a basis. In this case, the acceleration time is disregarded.
Stall Prevention Level During Acceleration: L3-02
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
L3-02
Stall prevention level during accel
0 to 200
Unit
%
Setting
150
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
B
D
D
D
This setting is valid when L3-01 is set to 1 or 2.
Normally it isn’t necessary to change this setting.
Decrease this setting when the motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity or stalling occurs when the motor is operated with the factory setting. The standard target setting is 2 to 3 times the motor’s rated current. (Set this current value as a percentage of the Inverter’s rated current, i.e.,
100% corresponds to the Inverter’s rated current.)
7
- 51
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.6 Protective Functions: L
Output current
L3-02 (Acceleration stall prevention level)
Time
Output frequency
The output frequency is controlled to prevent stalling.
Fig
7.30
Time
Acceleration Stall Prevention Function: L3-01 = 1
Stall Prevention Limit During Acceleration: L3-03
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
L3-03
Stall prevention limit during accel
0 to 100
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
% 50 A
D
D
D
Normally it isn’t necessary to change this setting.
Set this constant when a high-speed motor is being used in the high-speed range (the high frequency range above the base frequency).
The standard target setting is the motor’s rated current. Set this current value as a percentage of the
Inverter’s rated current, i.e., 100% corresponds to the Inverter’s rated current.
Acceleration stall prevention level
L3-02
(Acceleration stall prevention level)
L3-03
(Acceleration stall prevention limit)
Output frequency
E1-06
Base frequency (F
A
)
Note When the motor is used in the high-speed range, the acceleration stall prevention level is automatically lowered to provide smoother acceleration.
The acceleration stall prevention limit (L3-03) limits how much the acceleration stall prevention level is lowered so that it isn’t lowered any more than necessary.
Fig
7.31
Stall Prevention Limit During Acceleration
- 52
Stall Prevention Selection During Decel: L3-04
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
L3-04
Stall prevention selection during decel
0 to 3
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
-1 B B
D Settings
Setting
0
1
2
3
Function
Disabled. (Decelerate according to the settings. Main circuit overvoltage may occur if the deceleration time is too short.)
Enabled. (Stops deceleration if the main circuit voltage exceeds the overvoltage level. Decelerate again when voltage recovers.)
Optimum deceleration. (Decelerate as fast as possible judging from the main circuit voltage.
Disregard the deceleration time setting.)
Enabled (with braking resistor)
D
D
D
D
When setting 1 (enabled) is selected, the deceleration time is extended automatically so that a main circuit overvoltage doesn’t occur.
Always select setting 0 or 3 when a braking option (Braking Resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, or Braking Unit) is being used. If setting 1 or 2 is selected, the braking option won’t be used and the deceleration time can’t be shortened.
L3--04 cannot be set to 2 for open--loop vector control mode. (Settings can be made for SPEC: F and later)
L3-04 = 3 cannot be set to 2 for vector control modes.
Settings: Differences Between 0 and 3
D
D
When set to 0, the stall prevention cannot be used when decelerating.
When set to 3, disabled if over voltage (OV) occurs often in the main circuit, the deceleration time is automatically extended slightly. In other cases, deceleration occurs within the specified deceleration time. The actual deceleration time may be longer than the specified deceleration time, but a deceleration time that is lower than that when set to 0 is also possible.
When the setting for stall prevention during deceleration is set to 3, be sure to make adjustments according to the following procedure:
Adjusting the Settings
1.
Set the deceleration time according to the braking power and machine inertia.
2.
When the braking power or the machine inertia is unknown, set L3--04 to 0 and do a trial run to determine the minimum deceleration time. Then set L3--04 to 3.
3.
Lower the (setting for the) deceleration time to a value in the range where main circuit overvoltages
(OV) will not occur.
7
Output frequency
The deceleration time is controlled to prevent overvoltage.
Time
Fig
7.32
Deceleration time
(setting)
Deceleration Stall Prevention Function: L3-04 = 1
J
Frequency Detection Settings: L4-01 to L4-05
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
L4-01
L4-02
Speed agree detection level
Speed agree detection width
0.0 to 400.0
Hz
0.0 to 20.0
Unit
Hz
Setting
0.0
2.0
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
B
B
B
B
- 53
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.6 Protective Functions: L
Change during
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
A A L4-03
L4-04
Speed agree detection level (+/--)
Speed agree detection width (+/--)
--400.0 to
+400.0
0.0 to 20.0
Hz
Hz
0.0
2.0
A A
D
D
Set these constants when outputting one of the frequency agree or frequency detection signals from a multi-function output. Table 7.10 shows the relationship between these constants and the output signals.
Motor speed is detected at Flux Vector Control.
Table
7.10
Constants and Output Signals
Constant Related output settings Constant function
Speed Agree Level
(Absolute value)
Fref/Set Agree 1
Frequency Detection 1 >
Frequency Detection 2 <
Set the frequency (or motor speed) that you want to detect in Hz.
The set speed is an absolute value, so the speed is detected in forward or reverse.
Speed Agree Width
(Absolute value)
Fref/Fout Agree 1
Fref/Set Agree 1
Frequency Detection 1 >
Frequency Detection 2 <
Set the frequency (or motor speed) detection range in Hz.
Speed Agree Level
+/--
(Signed value)
Fref/Set Agree 2
Frequency Detection 3 >
Frequency Detection 4 <
Set the frequency (or motor speed) that you want to detect in Hz.
Set positive values for forward, negative values for reverse.
Speed Agree Width
+/--
(Signed value)
Fref/Fout Agree 2
Fref/Set Agree 2
Frequency Detection 3 >
Frequency Detection 4 <
Set the frequency(or motor speed) detection range in Hz.
D Set the corresponding setting in the multi-function output (H2-01, H2-02, or H2-03) to output the desired Fref/Fout Agree signal, Fref/Set Agree signal, or Frequency Detection signal.
Function Setting
Fref/Fout Agree 1
Fref/Set Agree 1
Frequency Detection 1
Frequency Detection 2
Fref/Fout Agree 2
Fref/Set Agree 2
Frequency Detection 3
Frequency Detection 4
13
14
15
16
2
3
4
5
Frequency Detection Operation: L4-05
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
L4-05
Operation when frequency reference is missing
Range
0 1
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
-0 A A
D The frequency reference is considered lost when the frequency reference voltage drops by 90% for more than 400 ms.
- 54
Related constant
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Function
Stop. (Operate according to the frequency reference value.)
Continue operation at 80% speed. (Continue operation with a speed that is 80% of the value when the frequency reference was lost.)
Fref/Fout Agree 1
D Timing Chart for Frequency Detection Operation
L4-01: Speed Agree Level
L4-02: Speed Agree Width
L4-03: Speed Agree Level +/--
L4-04: Speed Agree Width +/--
Fref/Fout Agree 2
L4-02
Frequency reference
Output frequency or motor speed
L4-04
Fref/Fout
Agree
Frequency reference
Output frequency or motor speed
L4-02 L4-02
Fref/Fout Agree 2 OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 13)
Fref/Set Agree 2
Fref/Fout Agree 1 OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 2)
Fref/Set Agree 1
L4-02
L4-01
Output frequency or motor speed
Fref/Set
Agree
L4-01
L4-02
Fref/Set Agree 1 OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 3)
Frequency Detection 1
L4-02
L4-01
Output frequency or motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
Detection
Freq. Detection 1
ON
(Multi-function output setting = 4)
Frequency Detection 2
OFF
L4-02
L4-01
Output frequency or motor speed
Freq. Detection 2 OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 5)
L4-01
L4-02
Output frequency or motor speed
Fref/Set Agree 2 OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 14)
Frequency Detection 3
Output frequency or motor speed
Freq. Detection 3 ON OFF
(Multi-function output setting = 15)
Frequency Detection 4
Output frequency or motor speed
Freq. Detection 4 OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 16)
L4-04
L4-04
L4-03
L4-03
L4-04
L4-03
7
- 55
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.6 Protective Functions: L
J
Fault Restart Settings: L5-01, L5-02
Number of Auto Restart Attempts: L5-01
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
L5-01
Number of auto restart attempts
Range
0 to 10
Unit
Setting
--0
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
B B
IMPORTANT
S The Inverter might be damaged when using the fault restart function too frequently.
S Understanding that the Inverter might be damaged, be sure to take the following precautions:
Always set up a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB).
Set up a sequence that will stop peripheral equipment when an Inverter fault occurs.
D
D
The fault restart function automatically restarts the Inverter even when an internal fault occurs during
Inverter operation. Use this function only when continuing operation is more important than possibly damaging the Inverter.
The fault restart function is effective with the following faults. With other faults, the protective operations will engage immediately without attempting to restart operation.
S OC (Overcurrent) S PF (Main circuit voltage fault) S OL1 (Motor overload)
S GF (Ground fault)
S PUF (Fuse blown)
S OV (Main circuit overvoltage)
S UV1 (Main circuit undervoltage)
S LF (Output open-phase) S OL2 (Inverter overload)
S RF (Braking resistor overheated) S OL3 (Overtorque)
S RR (Braking transistor fault) S OL4 (Overtorque)
D
D
The fault restart count is cleared in the following cases: x When operation is normal for 10 minutes after a fault restart is performed.
x x
When the fault reset input is received after the protection operation has been activated and the fault confirmed.
When the power is turned OFF and then ON again.
When one of the multi-function outputs (H2-01, H2-02, or H2-03) is set to 1E (Restart Enabled), the output will be ON while the fault restart function is in progress.
Auto Restart Operation Selection: L5-02
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
L5-02
Auto restart operation selection
Range
0 1
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
-0 B B
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Function
Do not output fault restart. (The fault contact does not operate.)
Output fault restart. (The fault contact operates.)
J
Overtorque Detection Settings: L6-01 to L6-06
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
L6-01
L6-02
L6-03
L6-04
L6-05
L6-06
Torque detection selection 1
Torque detection level 1
Torque detection time 1
Torque detection selection 2
Torque detection level 2
Torque detection time 2
0 to 4
0 to 300
0.0 to 10.0
0 to 4
0 to 300
0.0 to 10.0
--
% s
--
% s
0
150
0.1
0
150
0.1
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
B
B
B
A
A
A
B
B
B
A
A
A
D The overtorque detection function detects an excessive mechanical load from an increase in the output current (or output torque).
- 56
D
D
The settings in the torque detection selection constants (L6-01 and L6-04) determine whether overtorque conditions will be detected and what kind of processing will be performed if a overtorque condition is detected.
L6-01/L6-04 Settings
Setting Function Display
0 Overtorque detection 1 Overtorque output 2
1
2
Overtorque detection disabled
Detect only during speed agree. Continue operation even after detection. (Minor fault)
Detect overtorque at any time. Continue operation even after detection. (Minor fault)
“OL3” blinks
“OL3” blinks
“OL4” blinks
“OL4” blinks
3
4
Detect only during speed agree. Stop output after detection. (Fault )
Detect overtorque at any time. Stop output after detection. (Fault)
“OL3” lights
“OL3” lights
“OL4” lights
“OL4” lights
D
D
D When overtorque detection is enabled, be sure to set the overtorque detection level (L6-02 or L6-05) and the overtorque detection time (L6-02 or L6-05). An overtorque condition is detected when the current exceeds the overtorque detection level for longer than the overtorque detection time.
The overtorque detection level is set as a percentage of the motor rated torque.
Any of the following functions can be set in a multi-function output (H2-01, H2-02, or H2-03) to indicate fact that an overtorque condition has been detected.
S Setting B: Overtorque detection 1 (NO)
S Setting 17: Overtorque detection 1 (NC)
S
S
Setting 18: Overtorque detection 2 (NO)
Setting 19: Overtorque detection 2 (NC)
Motor current
(Output torque)
L6-02 or L6-05
Overtorque Detection 1 (N.O.) or Overtorque Detection 2
(N.O.)
L6-03 or
L6-06
ON
L6-03 or
L6-06
ON
*
The overtorque detection is cleared when the current drops about 5% of the
Inverter’s rated current (or the motor’s rated torque).
Fig
7.33
Timing Chart for Overtorque Detection
J
Hardware Protection Settings: L8-01 to L8-03, L8-05, L8-07
Protection Selection for Internal DB Resistor: L8-01
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
L8-01
Protect selection for internal DB resistor
0 to 3
D Settings
Setting
0
1
2
3
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
-0 B B
Function
Disabled. (Select 0 when a braking resistor isn’t being used or a Braking Resistor Unit is being used.)
Enabled. (Protects the braking resistor from overheating.)
3%ED
10%ED
7
- 57
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.6 Protective Functions: L
Inverter Overheating (OH) Pre-alarm Settings: L8-02 L8-03
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
50 to 110 95 A A
L8-03
Operation selection after overheat pre-alarm
0 to 3 -3 A A
D
D
D
Constant L8-02 specifies the detection temperature in q
C for the Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm function. An overheat pre-alarm occurs when the temperature of the cooling fins reaches this level.
Constant L8-03 specifies the processing that will be performed when an overheat pre-alarm occurs.
Apart from this setting, cooling fin overheating (OH1) is detected as a protection function at 105 _ C.
Settings
Setting Function
0 Decelerates to a stop in the deceleration time set in C1-09. (Protection operation: Fault contacts operate)
1
2
Coast to stop. (Protection operation: Fault contacts operate)
Emergency stop in the emergency-stop time set in C1-09. (Protection operation: Fault contacts operate)
3 Continues operation. (Alarm: Monitor display only.)
Input Open-phase Protection Selection: L8-05
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
L8-05
Input open-phase protection selection
0 1
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
-0 A A
D
D
This function detects changes in the main circuit DC voltage which indicate a power supply openphase, large imbalance in the power supply voltage, or deterioration of the main circuit capacitor.
Settings
Setting Function
0
1
Disabled.
Enabled. (Detects input power supply open-phase, 3-phase imbalance, or deterioration of the main circuit capacitor.)
Output Open-phase Protection Selection: L8-07
D This function detects an Inverter output open-phase.
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
L8-07
Output open-phase protection selection
0 1
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
-0 A A
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Function
Disabled.
Enabled. (Detects an output open-phase at under 10% of the Inverter’s rated output current.)
D False open-phase detections may occur when the motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity. In this case, disable the detection function by setting L8-07 to 0.
- 58
Carrier Frequency Reduction Selection: L8--17 (fot SPEC: F)
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
L8-17
Carrier frequency reduction selection 2
0 to 3 -1 A
D Settings
Setting
2
3
0
1
No carrier frequency reduction.
With carrier frequency reduction.
For factory adjustments.
For factory adjustments.
Function
D
D
If metallic noise (carrier noise) from the motor is a problem when carrier frequency is reduced (less than 6 Hz), set L8--17 to 0 (no carrier frequency reduction), and L8--19 (OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds) to 1 (enabled).
Do not L8--17 and L8--19 to 0 at the same time when using V/f control open loop vector control.
OL2 characteristics Selection at Low Speeds: L8--19 (for SPEC: F)
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting
L8-19
OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds
0 1 -0
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
A A
D Settings
Setting
0
1
OL2 characteristics at low speeds disabled.
Function
OL2 characteristics at low speeds enabled.
D
D
D When using OL2 to trip at low speeds (less than 6 Hz) despite a light load, set L8--17 to 1 (with carrier frequency reduction) and L8--19 (OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds) to 0 (disabled).
However, do not set 18--19 to 0 for 400 V class, 185 to 300 kW Inverters.
Do not L8--17 and L8--19 to 0 at the same time when using V/f control open loop vector control.
Reduce the carrier frequency (C6--01) to 2 kHz when continuously operating at low speeds with heavy loads when using flux vector control.
7
- 59
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.7 Operator Constants: o
7.3.7 Operator Constants: o
J
Operator Display Selection: o1-01 to o1-05
Constant Number Display Selection: o1-01
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation o1-01
Constant No. display selection
Setting
Range
4 to 35
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
-6 B B
D
D
D In operation mode, the frequency reference, output frequency, output current, and output voltage can be monitored immediately if the factory settings are being used. One of these four values, the output voltage, can be changed to a different value.
When you want to monitor a value other than the output voltage, set that number in constant o1-01.
Use the last two digits from the “U1 Monitor” list (U1jj ) to select a value. Refer to Table 4.3.
Monitor Selection After Power Up: o1-02
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation o1-02
Monitor selection after power up
Range
1 to 4
Unit
--
Setting
1
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
B B
D
D
D
D
When the power is turned on, the frequency reference will appear in the Unit’s data display if the factory settings are being used.
Any one of the four values monitored at startup (frequency reference, output frequency, output current, or the value set in constant o1-01) can be selected to appear when the power is turned ON.
Change the setting of constant o1-02 to display an item other than the frequency reference at startup.
Settings
Setting Function
3
4
1
2
The frequency reference is displayed at start-up.
The output frequency is displayed at start-up.
The output current is displayed at start-up.
The value set in constant o1-01 is displayed at start-up.
Frequency Units of Reference Setting and Monitor: o1-03
D Set the unit for frequency setting and monitoring.
Change
User
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range o1-03
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
0 to 39999
Unit
--
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
0 B B
D Settings
Setting
0
1
2 to 39
40 to 39999
Unit
0.01 Hz
0.01% r/min 0 to 3999 r/min = 120 frequency reference Hz o1-03 number of motor poles
Use the 5th digit of o1-03 to specify the decimal point.
5th digit = 0:
5th digit = 1:
5th digit = 2:
5th digit = 3: .
.
.
The 1st to 4th digits of o1-03 determine the frequency setting
Ex 1: To set the 100% speed to 200.0, set o1-03 to 12000.
200.0 will be displayed for 100%, 120 will be displayed for 60%.
Ex 2: To set the 100% speed to 65.00, set o1-03 to 26500.
65.00 will be displayed for 100%, 39.00 will be displayed for 60%.
Frequency Units of Constant Setting: o1-04
D This constant can be used to change the setting unit for V/f pattern constants to r/min.
- 60
Constant
Number o1-04
Name
Frequency units of constant setting
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Unit of setting: Hz
Unit of setting: r/min
Change during
Operation
Range
0 1
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
-0 B
Unit
Constant Number Display Selection: o1-05
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation o1-05
Constant No. display selection
Range
0 1
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
-0 A A
Function
Display constant number
Display constant number (address) set for MEMOBUS communications
J
Key Function Settings/Other Settings: o2-01 to o2-08
LOCAL/REMOTE Key Enable/Disable: o2-01
Change
User
Constant
Number
Name
Operation o2-01
LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/disable
Range
0 1
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
-1 B B
D
D
This constant enables or disables the LOCAL/REMOTE Key (the Operation Mode Selector Key) on the Digital Operator.
Settings
Setting Function
0
1
Disabled. (Cannot change between local and remote.)
Enabled. (Pressing the LOCAL/REMOTE Key switches control of operation between the Operator and the sources specified in constants b1-01 and b1-02.)
STOP Key During Control Circuit Terminal Operation: o2-02
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Setting o2-02
STOP Key during control circuit terminal operation
0 1 -1
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
B B
D
D
This constant enables or disables the STOP on the Digital Operator
Settings
Setting Function
0 Disabled. (The STOP Key is disabled when the run command is input from an external terminal.)
1 Enabled. (The STOP Key is enabled at all times during operation.)
User Constant Initial Value: o2-03
Constant
Number
Name
Change
Operation o2-03
User constant initial value
Range
0 to 2
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
-0 B B
D This constant is used to record or clear the user constant defaults.
7
- 61
7
Advanced Operation
7.3.7 Operator Constants: o
D
D
Once the user defaults have been recorded, constant A1-03 can be used to initialize the Inverter constants to these defaults.
Settings
Setting Function
0
1
2
No change. (Retain current settings.)
Record user defaults. (Record the current constant settings as user defaults.)
Clear user defaults. (Clear the recorded user defaults.)
D The Digital Operation display will return to 0 after the settings have been made.
kVA Selection: o2-04
Constant
Number o2-04
Name kVA selection
Change during
Operation
Range
0 to FF
Unit
--
Setting
0
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
B B
D
D
D The setting range and factory setting depend on the Inverter capacity. The settings shown in the table are for a 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverter. (See page NO TAG.)
Do not change this constant setting; it is used by the manufacturer to identify the Inverter model.
Use this setting only the the control PC board has been replaced.
Frequency Reference Setting Method Selection: o2-05
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit o2-05
Frequency reference setting method selection
0 1 --
Setting
0
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
A A
D
D
D
This constant determines whether it is necessary to press the Enter Key when changing the frequency reference with the Digital Operator’s frequency reference monitor; it cannot be changed during operation.
When o2-05 is set to 1 (DATA/ENTER Key input not required.), the frequency reference changes simultaneously with the Digital Operator’s value.
Settings
Setting Function
0
1
DATA/ENTER Key input required.
DATA/ENTER Key input not required.
- 62
Operation Selection when Digital Operator is Disconnected: o2-06
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector o2-06
Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected
0 1 -0 A A
D
D
This constant specifies whether to stop operation when the Digital Operator is disconnected.
Settings
Setting Function
0
1
Disable Operator detection. (Continue operation when the Digital Operator is disconnected.)
Enable Operator detection. (Detect an OPR fault when the Digital Operator is disconnected, stop the Inverter output, and operate the fault contact.)
Cumulative Operation Time Settings: o2-07 o2-08
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
Range o2-07
Cumulative operation time setting
0 to 65535 o2-08
Cumulative operation time selection
0 1
Unit
Setting
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector h
--
0
0
A
A
A
A
D
D
D
Set the initial elapsed time in constant o2-07. The elapsed operating time will start from this value.
Constant o2-08 determines whether the elapsed operating time is the time that the Inverter is on or the time that the Inverter is running.
Settings
Setting Function
0
1
Inverter power-on time. (Counts the elapsed time from start-up until power is turned off.)
Inverter running time. (Counts the elapsed time that there is an Inverter output.)
7
- 63
Advanced Operation
7.4.1 Winding Change Function
7.4
Optional Functions
7.4.1 Winding Change Function
Winding change motors can be connected in two different ways, Y (low speed) - and (high speed) - windings.
The base frequency of the Y-winding is lower than that of -winding, providing higher torque at low speeds. For the -winding, high speeds are possible.
By switching between the two winding connections, a wide constant power range can be obtained, beneficial for driving the spindle of a lathe or a milling machine.
U V W
7
U
X Y Z
6 Lead Motor Winding
Power
Y--Winding
X--Y--Z
V W
Y--Winding (Y--Connection)
Low Speed, High Torque
U Z
0
0
Power
Y--base
Freq.
Y--max winding change done in this area
Power high torque at low speed
X
V Y
W
Fig
7.34
Y--Winding
0
0 Y--base
Y- and - Windings
--Winding
Freq.
Y--max
--Winding
0
0
A
Y--base
Speed
Fig
Wind Constant Power Range:
A: B = up to 1: 12
7.35
Motor
Speed
B
--max.
Speed
Output Performance of Winding Change
- 64
50%
0%
0
Hz
V
Fig 7.36 shows motor constant change sequence during winding change.
Fout
Speed Search
Deceleration TIme b3-03
The ramp time is dependent on the accek timesetting.
Output Voltage
Voltage recovety time
L2--04.
Torque Limit
64 ms
Total base block me
2nd motor constant calculation time
RUN Commatd
Motor 1
Minimum base block time
L2--03
During speed search
Motor 2
Note When the flux vector control mode is selected, the torque reference increases from zero within 64msec.
(For open loop vector mode, torque reference increases
50% of the torque limit. )
Fig
7.36
Winding Change Sequence
D
D
When selecting a motor for winding change application with a MC5 drive, it is necessary to check the base and maximum frequencies, no-load voltage at base and maximum frequencies, leak inductance, full load rated current, etc. for both Y- and -windings.
Heavy cutting during winding change may cause the winding change to malfunction and/or stall the system.
7
- 65
7
Advanced Operation
7.4.2 Wiring for Winding Change
Minimum Baseblock Time: L2-03
User
Constant
Number
L2-03
Name
Min. baseblock time
Change during
Operation
Range
0.0 to 5.0
Unit s
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
0.5
B B
D
D
D
D
D
The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The factory setting shown in the table is for a
200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverter. (See page NO TAG.)
This setting is used with the speed search and DC injection braking functions.
Set the time required for the leakage voltage to dissipate. Increase the setting if an overcurrent (OC) occurs when the speed search or DC injection braking function starts.
Set the baseblock time during winding change. Time for winding change varies according to the setting. (For example, lower the setting, and time for winding change is also reduced.) Overcurrent (OC) might occur if setting is too low.
This setting is valid for speed searches performed after a momentary power loss and regular speed searches.
Voltage Recovery Time: L2-04
Change
Constant
Number
L2-04
Name
Voltage recovery time
Operation
Setting
Range
0.0 to 5.0
Unit s
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
0.3
A A
D
D
D
Set the time allowed for the normal voltage to be restored after completion of the speed search.
For a 200 V class Inverter, this is the time in seconds for voltage to be restored from 0 VAC to 200 VAC.
For a 400 V class Inverter, this is the time in seconds for voltage to be restored from 0 VAC to 400 VAC.
This setting is valid for speed searches after a momentary power loss, regular speed searches, the voltage changes with energy-saving control, and the voltage changes with baseblock clearing.
Set the voltage recovery time after baseblock during winding change. Ovrevoltage (OV) might occur if setting is too low.
Speed Search Deceleration Time: b3-03
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation b3-03
Speed search deceleration time
Range
0.1
10.0
Unit s
Setting
2.0
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
A
D Set output frequency deceleration time during speed search. (Set the time to decelerate from the max.
output frequency to OHz.)
7.4.2 Wiring for Winding Change
J
The VS-626MC5 offers two different types of winding changes, external winding change and auto- winding change. W-winding and -winding can be set independently using constants for motor 1 and 2.
External Winding Change Method
In this method, an external signal is given to one of the multi-function inputs (set as “80H”) to start the winding change. The external signal is given from the CNC.
MC Answerback error detection : P1-03
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
P1-03
MC Answerback error detection
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
0.20 to 1.00
sec 0.20
A A
D
D
This constant determines the waiting time for the MC (Magnetic Contactor) answerback error detection.
Setting is valid when one of the multi-function digital inputs (H1-01 to H1-06) has been set to 81 or
82.
Motor constant selection: P1-04
Change
Constant
Number
P1-04
Name
Motor constant selection
Operation
Range
0 1
Unit
--
Setting
1
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
A
Flux Vector
A
D Select the motor constants allocated for the types of winding to be used.
- 66
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Function
Motor 1 constants (E1, E2) are used for Y-winding, and motor 2 constants (E3, E4, E5) are used for -winding
Motor 2 constants (E3, E4, E5) are used for Y-winding, and motor 2 constants (E1, E2) are used for -winding
Fig 7.37 shows a wiring example of external winding change.
1 230 V
3
230 V
From CNC
R
S
T
Winding change
Common
7
8
11
VS--626MC5
U
V
W
9
10
0 V 24 V
+24 VDC
Supply
17 18
2
4
6
13
14
15
16
HV--75AP3
Megnetic Contactor
Dual Winding
Motor
U Z
X
V Y
W
MC Answerback
B1-02 = 4
H1-05 = 80
H1-06 = 82
H2-01 = 41
A1-02 = 2
E3-01 = 2
Fig
7.37
Sample Wiring for External Wiring Change
(Open Loop Vector Control Mode)
J
D
D
To use the external winding change method, set the multi-function digital input used for receiving the winding change signal to “80.” This setting enables the selection of Motor 1 constants (E1 and E2) when the input is open and Motor 2 constants (E4 and E5) when the input is closed.
When using the external winding change method, Auto-Winding constants (P1-01 and P1-02) are not valid.
Auto-Winding Change Method
This method can be used when the multi-function digital input is not set to “80.”
The selection of the motor 1 and motor 2 is conducted internally by preset constants, such as winding change frequency (P1-01) and winding change hysteresis ( P1-02).
Winding change frequency: P1-01
Change
User
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
P1-01
Winding change frequency
Setting
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
0.0 to 400.0
Hz 0.0
A A
D Sets winding change frequency when auto-winding change metod is used. Set P1-01 lower than the max. frequency of the Y-winding.
7
- 67
7
Advanced Operation
7.4.2 Wiring for Winding Change
3
230 V
R
S
T
8
11
Winding change hysteresis: P1-02
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
P1-02
Winding change hysteresis
Range
0.0 to 20.0
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
-5.0
A A
D Sets the hysteresis of the winding change frequency.
MC Answerback error detection: P1--03
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
P1-03
MC Answerback error detection
Range
Unit
Setting
0.20 to 1.00
sec 0.20
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
A A
D This constant determines the waiting time for the MC (Magnetic Contactor) answerback error detection. Constant setting is valid when one of the multi-function digital inputs (H1-01 to H1-06) has been set to 81 or 82.
Motor constant selection: P1-04
User
Constant
Number
P1-04
Name
Motor constant selection
Change during
Operation
Range
0 1
Unit
--
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
1 A A
D Select the motor constants allocated for the types of winding to be used.
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Function
Motor 1 constants (E1 E2) are used for Y-winding, and motor 2 constants (E3 E4 E5) are used for -winding
Motor 2 constants (E3 E4 E5) are used for Y-winding, and motor 2 constants (E1 E2) are used for -winding
Figure 7.38 shows a wiring example of auto-winding change
1 230 V
Dual Winding
Motor
U Z
VS--626MC5
U
V
W
26
PG--X2
Card
(Option)
27
0 V 24 V
+24 VDC
Supply
MC Answerback
17 18
2
4
6
13 X
14
15
16
HV--75AP3
Megnetic Contactor
X V Y
W
X PG
B1-02 = 4
H1-06 = 82
H2-03 = 41
P1-04 = 1
A1-02 = 3
E3-01 = 3
Fig
7.38
Sample Wiring for Auto-winding Change
- 68
Figure 7.39 shows the sequence of auto-winding change method.
Max. Output frequency
P1-01 Winding change frequency
P1--02
Winding change hysteresis
10 V
Analog frequency reference
0 V
Y winding winding Y winding
Run Command
Fig
7.39
Auto-winding change sequence
7.4.3 Setting/Adjusting the Winding Change Constants
J
Winding Change Constants: P1-01 to P1-05
Winding change frequency: P1-01
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
P1-01
Winding change frequency
Range
Unit
Setting
0.0 to 400.0
Hz 0.0
Valid Access Levels
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
A A
D Sets winding change frequency when auto-winding change method is used. Set P1-01 lower than the max. frequency of the Y (low speed) -winding.
Winding change hysteresis: P1-02
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
P1-02
Winding change hysteresis
Setting
Range
0.0 to 20.0
Unit
--
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
5.0
A A
D Sets the hysteresis of the winding change frequency.
7
- 69
7
Advanced Operation
7.4.3 Setting/Adjusting the Winding Change Constants
MC Answerback error detection: P1-03
User
Constant
Number
Name
Change during
Operation
P1-03
MC Answerback error detection
Range
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
0.20 to 1.00
sec 0.20
A A
D This constant determines the waiting time for the MC (Magnetic Contactor) answerback error detection. Constant setting is valid when one of the multi-function digital input constants (H1-01 to H1-06) has been set to 81 or 82.
Motor constant selection: P1-04
Change
Constant
Number
P1-04
Name
Motor constant selection
Operation
Setting
Range
0 1
Unit
--
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
1 A A
D Select the motor constants allocated for the types of winding to be used.
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Function
Motor 1 constants (E1 E2) are used for Y-winding, and motor 2 constants (E3 E4 E5) are used for -winding
Motor 2 constants (E3 E4 E5) are used for Y-winding, and motor 2 constants (E1 E2) are used for -winding
Programming mode valid/invalid during run: P1-05
Change
Constant
Number
Name
Operation
Setting
Range
P1-05
Programming mode valid/invalid during run
0 1
Unit
Valid Access Levels
Factory
Setting Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
-1 A A
D Settings
Setting
0
1
Disabled
Enabled
Function
D
D
When set to 1, it is possible to select programming mode by pressing MENU or ESC key. Motor coast to a stop when winding change is performed while in programming mode.
If set to 0, stopping during a free run can be prevented, but the program mode cannot be selected while running.
- 70
8
User Constants
This chapter lists all user constants that can be used in the Programming and
Initialize modes.
8.1
Initialize Mode Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2
Programming Mode Constants . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1 Application Constants: b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.2 Autotuning Constants: C
8.2.3 Reference Constants: d
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.4 Motor Constant Constants: E
8.2.5 Options Constants: F
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.6 Terminal Constants: H
8.2.7 Protection Constants: L
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.8 Operator Constants: o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.9 Winding Change Constants: P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.10 Factory Settings that Change with the Control
Method (A1-02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.11 Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter
Capacity (o2-04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 3
8 4
8 4
8 - 7
8 1 2
8 1 4
8 - 18
8 - 21
8 - 26
8 - 32
8 - 34
8 - 35
8 - 36
8
- 1
8
User Constants
Number
J
User Constant Descriptions
Name
Description
Display
Language selection for digital operator display
Used to select the language displayed on the Digital Operator
0: English
A1-00
Select Language
This constant is not changed by the initialize operation.
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
0 1 1 Q Q - 19
S Constant Number: The constant number.
S Name: The constant name.
S Display:
S Description:
The constant name displayed on the Digital Operator.
Details of the constant function or setting value.
S Setting Range:
S Factory Setting:
The constant setting range.
The factory setting value (each control method has its own factory setting.
Therefore the factory setting changes when the control method is changed.)
See page - 34 for factory settings by control method.
S Change during Indicates whether or not the constant can be changed while in the Inverter is in operation.
S
S
Control Method:
Page:
Changes possible during operation.
Changes not possible during operation.
B
A
Indicates which control methods and which access levels can be set and referenced.
Q Items which can be set and referenced in Quick-Start only.
Items which can be set and referenced in Quick-Start and Basic.
Items which can be set and referenced on all access levels; Quick-
Start, Basic, and Advanced.
Items which cannot be set or referenced in that control method.
Reference page for more detailed information on the constant.
- 2
8.1
Initialize Mode Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Display
Description
A1-00
Language selection for digital operator display
Used to select the language displayed on the Digital Operator
0: English
Select Language
Constant access level
This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.
Used to set the constant access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Displays only
Operation mode and Initialize mode)
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
0 1 1 Q Q - 19
Access Level
User setting constant
(Constants A2-01 to A2-32 only can be set/read.)
2: Quick-Start : Q
3: Basic : B
4: Basic : A
Used to select the control method for the Inverter
A2-32
User Param 1 to 32
Initialize
3: Flux vector
This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation.
Used to initialize the constants using the specified method.
0: No initializing
1110: Initializes using the User
Init Constants
Password 1
Enter Password
Password 2
Select Password
User setting constant
User Param 1 to 32
2220: Initializes using a two-wire sequence. (Initializes to the factory setting.)
3330: Initializes using a three-wire sequence.
Password input when a password has been set in A1-05. This function write-protects some constants of the Initialize mode.
to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32 constants can no longer be changed. (Programming mode constants can be changed.)
Used to set a four digit number as the password.
This constant is not usually dis-
(A1-04) is displayed, hold down the Reset/Select Key and press the Menu Key and the password will be displayed.
Used to set the constant numbers that can be set/read. Maximum 32.
Effective when the access level t t U P
(1). Constants set in constants
A2-01 to A2-32 can be set/read in the Programming mode.
3330
0 to
9999
9999 b1-01 to o2-08
----
8
- 3
8
User Constants
8.2.1 Application Constants: b
8.2
Programming Mode Constants
8.2.1 Application Constants: b
Number
J
Operation Mode Selections: b1
Name
Description
Display
Setting Factory
Range Setting g during
Operation
Reference selection
Used to set the input method for the frequency reference.
0: Digital Operator
Reference Source
Operation method selection log inputs).
2: Transmission
3: Option Card
Used to set the source of the run command.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminals (sequence inputs).
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
- 7 b1-05 b1-07
Run Source
Stopping method selection
3: Option Card
4: MEMOBUS transmission (for
CP--717)
5: Winding change sequence
Used to set the stopping method used when a stop command is in-
Stopping Method
Prohibition of reverse operation
Reverse Oper
0: Ramp to stop
Operation selection for setting of E1-09 or less
Zero-Speed Oper
Read sequence input twice
Cntl Input Scans
Operation selection after switching to remote mode
LOC/REM RUN Sel
Used to set the method of operation when the frequency reference input is less than the minimum output frequency (E1-09).
0: Run at frequency reference
(E1-09 not effective).
1: STOP (Frequencies below
E1-09 in the coast to stop state.)
2: Run at min. frequency. (E1-09)
3: Run at zero speed (Frequencies below E1-09 are zero)
This function is only available in with flux vector control.
Used to set the responsiveness of the control inputs (forward/reverse and multi-function inputs.)
0: Two scans every 2 ms (Use when connecting transistor out-
)
1: Two scans every 5 ms (Use when connecting contact outputs or switches.)
Used to set the Operation mode by switching to the Remote mode using the Local/Remote Key.
0: Run signals that are input during mode switching are disregarded. (Input Run signals after switching the mode.)
1: Run signals become effective immediately after switching to the Remote mode.
0 3
0 1
0
0 A
A
A
- 25
- 9
- 4
Name
Display
Run command selection in PRG mode
RUN CMD at PRG
Used to set the Operation mode in program mode.
0: Can operate.
1 C (Di bl d h
Digital Operator selects run command (when b1--02 = 0).
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Number b2-01
J
DC Braking: b2
Name
Display
Description
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
Zero speed level (DC injection braking starting frequency)
Used to set the frequency which starts DC injection braking (the initial excitation for flux vector control) in units of 0.1 Hz when deceleration to stop is selected.
DCInj Start Freq
DC injection braking current
DCinj Current
DC injection braking time at start
DCInj Time @ Start
DC injection braking time at stop
DCInj Time @ Stop
Magnetic flux compensation volume
Field Comp @ Start
0.0 to
E1-09 becomes the DC injection braking starting frequency. Only with flux vector control is b2-01 used.
Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.
flux vector control depends on the E2-03 setting.
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking (initial excitation for flux vector control) at start in units of 1 second.
0.00 to restart it. When the set value is 0,
DC injection braking at start is not performed.
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking (initial excitation for flux vector control) at stop in units of 1 second.
0.00 to stop command is input. When the set value is 0.00, DC injection braking at stop is not performed.
Used to set the magnetic flux compensation in % units, with the no-0 to 500 load current as 100%.
0.5
B B
- 18
- 18
- 26
- 18
8
- 5
8
User Constants
8.2.1 Application Constants: b
Number
J
Speed Search: b3
Name
Display
Description
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
Speed search selection at start
SpdSrch at Start
Speed search operating current
Sets the speed search function to start when the run command is input.
0: Disabled (Starts from the minimum output frequency.)
1: Enabled (Speed search is started from the maximum frequency.
In a control method with PG, the motor starts at the frequency of motor rotation when the run command is input.)
Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.
SpdSrch Current
Speed search deceleration time
When restarting is not possible with the set value, reduce the value.
Sets the output frequency deceleration time during speed search in
1-second units.
0.1 to
10.0
SpdSrch Dec Time the maximum output frequency to 0 Hz.
* When the control method is changed, the Inverter reverts to factory settings. (The open loop vector control factory settings will be displayed.)
- 6
8.2.2 Autotuning Constants: C
Constant
Number
J
Acceleration/Deceleration: C1
Name
Description
Display
Acceleration time 1
Accel Time 1
Deceleration time 1
Decel Time 1
Acceleration time 2
Accel Time 2
Deceleration time 2
Decel Time 2
Acceleration time 3
Accel Time 3
Deceleration time 3
Decel Time 3
Acceleration time 4
Accel Time 4
Deceleration time 4
Decel Time 4
Emergency stop time
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to the maximum output frequency, in 1-second units.
Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum output frequency to 0, in 1-second units.
The acceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/decel time 1” is set to ON.
The deceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/decel time 1” is set to ON.
The acceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/decel time 2” is set to ON.
The deceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/decel time 2” is set to ON.
The acceleration time when the multi-function input accel/decel time 1” and “accel/decel time 2” are set to ON.
The deceleration time when the time 1” and “accel/decel time 2” are set to ON.
The deceleration time when the multi-function input “Emergency
6000.0
10.0
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
- 10
- 16
- 10
- 16
- 10
- 16
- 16
- 10
- 16
- 10
- 16
- 16
- 10
- 16
- 16
Fast Stop Time
Accel/decel time setting unit
Acc/Dec Units
This function can be used a stopped method when a fault has been detected.
0: 0.01-second units
Accel/decel time switching frequency
Acc/Dec SW Freq
Sets the frequency for automatic acceleration/deceleration switching.
Below set frequency: Accel/decel time 4
Above set frequency: Accel/decel time 1
The multi-function input “accel/ decel time 1” or “accel/decel time 2” take priority.
0.0 to
400.0
* The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will differ according to the setting for C1-10 (the unit for acceleration/deceleration time.) When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for acceleration/deceleration times becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
8
- 7
8
User Constants
8.2.2 Autotuning Constants: C
J
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
Consta nt
Number
Name
Display
Description
C2-01
C2-02
C2-04
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
SCrv Acc @ Start
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
SCrv Acc @ End
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start
SCrv Dec @
Start
All sections of the S-curve characteristic set, the accel/decel times will increase by only half of the S-curve characteristic times at start and end.
mand
Output frequency
C1-02
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end
SCrv Dec @ End
Time ting
Range ry Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
0.0 to
2.50
0.0 to
2.50
0.00 to
0.00 to
0.20
0.20
0.00
A
A
A
A
A
A
- 21
- 21
- 21
Number
C3-04
J
Motor Slip Compensation: C3
Name
Description
Display
Slip compensation gain
Slip Comp Gain
Slip compensation primary delay time
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
Used to improve speed accuracy when operating with a load.
Usually setting is not necessary.
When actual speed is low, increase the set value.
When actual speed is high, decrease the set value.
In flux vector control mode this function becomes gain to compensate for slip caused by temperature variation.
Slip compensation primary delay time is set in ms units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust when slip compensation responsiveness is low, or speed is
0.0 to
2.5
0 to
- 15
Slip Comp Time
When responsiveness is low, decrease the set value.
When speed is not stabilized, increase the set value.
Slip compensation limit
Slip Comp Limit
Sets the slip compensation limit as
Slip compensation selection during regeneration
Slip Comp Regen
Flux calculation method
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When the slip compensation during regeneration function has been activated, as regeneration capacity increases momentarily, it may be necessary to use a braking option (braking resistor,
Braking Resistor Unit or Braking
Unit.)
Used to set the flux calculation method.
0: Flux is calculated based on the output frequency after com-
0 1 0 A - 23
Flux Select
1: Flux is calculated based on the output frequency before compensation.
- 8
Name
Display
Output voltage limited operation selection
Output V Limit
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (The motor magnetic flux automatically decreases when output voltage is saturated.)
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
* When the control method is changed, the Inverter reverts to factory settings. (The open loop vector control factory settings will be displayed.)
J
Torque Compensation: C4
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting Factory
Range Setting g during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Torque compensation gain
Sets torque compensation gain as a ratio.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust in the following circumstances:
S When the cable is long; increase the set value.
S When the motor capacity is small-
0.00 to
Torq Comp Gain
Torque compensation time constant
Torq Comp Time
(Max. applicable motor capacity), increase the set values.
S When the motor is oscillating, decrease the set values.
Adjust the output current range at minimum speed rotation so that it does not exceed the Inverter rated output current.
The torque compensation delay time is set in ms units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust in the following circumstances:
S Wh n th motor is oscill tin in crease the set values.
S When the responsiveness of the motor is low, decrease the set values.
0 to
C4-03
C4-04
Start torque compensation (forward rotation)
F TorqCmp @ Start
Start torque compensation (reverse rotation)
R TorqCmp @ Start
Sets start torque compensation with
0 to 200
Sets start torque compensation with --200.0
0.0
0.0
A
A
Start torque constant
TorqCmp Delay T
Sets start torque constant in ms u ts.
When set to 0 to 4 ms, the filter will be invalid.
Page
- 9
- 9
* When the control method is changed, the Inverter reverts to factory settings. (The open loop vector control factory settings will be displayed.)
8
- 9
8
User Constants
8.2.2 Autotuning Constants: C
Consta nt
Number
J
Speed Control (ASR): C5
Name
Display
Description ting
Range ry Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
ASR proportional
(P) gain 1
ASR P Gain 1
ASR integral (I) time 1
ASR I Time 1
ASR proportional
(P) gain 2
ASR P Gain 2
Sets the proportional gain of the speed loop
Sets the integral time of the speed loop (ASR)
Usually setting is not necessary.
Set to change the rotational speed gain.
P , I P = C5-01
I = C5-02
0.00 to
0.000
to
10.000
20.00
0.500
0.00 to
300.00
20.00
*
ASR integral (I) time 2
ASR I Time 2
ASR primary delay time
ASR Delay Time
ASR switching frequency
ASR Gain SW
Freq
ASR integral (I) limit
ASR I Limit
For V/f control with PG
P = C5-03
I = C5-04
0.000
0 C5-07 E1-04 Motor speed
(Hz)
Sets the filter time constant; the time from the speed loop to the torque command output, in
10.000
0.000
0.500
Usually setting is not necessary.
Sets the frequency for switching between
Proportion Gain 1, 2 and Integral Time 1, 2 in
400.0
The multi-function input “ASR Gain SW” takes priority.
Set to a small value to prevent any radical output frequency.
0 to
0.500
*
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (The open loop vector control factory settings are given.)
J
Carrier Frequency: C6
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting Factory
Range Setting g during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Carrier Frequency
Upper Limit
Carrier Freq Max
Set the carrier frequency upper lim-
2.0 to
5.0
*2
15.0
Page
* 1. The setting range and the factory setting of the Inverter will differ depending on its capacity and control method. (The value for the 200 V class 0.4 kW Inverter in open loop vector control mode is given.) (See page - 35.)
* 2. For a 400 V Inverter, if the carrier frequency is set to a value higher than the factory setting, the Inverter overload “OL2” detection value will decrease.
- 10
Number
C8-09
C8-30
J
Factory Tuning: C8
Name
Description
Display
AFR gain
AFR Gain
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Sets the internal speed feedback detection control section as a ratio.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust in the following circumstances:
S When hunting occurs, increase 0.00 to the set values.
10.00
S When responsiveness is low, decrease the set values.
Change the responsiveness in 0.05
units at a time, checking after each change.
Speed feedback detection control
(ARF) time
AFR Time
Carrier frequency selection during autotuning
Carrier in tune
S Increase setting if hunting occurs.
S p poor.
0: Carrier frequency is set to
2.0 kHz.
1: Carrier frequency is set to a value as set in C6-01.
2: Carrier frequency is set to 5 kHz.
0 to
2000
0 to 2
50
2
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
A
A
----
----
8.2.3 Reference Constants: d
Number
J
Preset Reference: d1
Name
Description
Display
Frequency reference
1
Reference 1
Frequency reference
2
Reference 2
Frequency reference
3
Reference 3
Frequency reference
4
Reference 4
Frequency reference
5
Reference 5
Frequency reference
6
Reference 6
Frequency reference
7
Reference 7
Frequency reference
8
Reference 8
Jog frequency reference
Jog Reference
Sets the frequency reference in the units used in o1-03 (frequency refry setting unit for o1-03 is Hz.
The frequency reference when the multi function input multi step speed reference 1” is ON.
The frequency reference when the speed reference 2” is ON.
The frequency reference when the multi function input multi step speed reference 1, 2” is ON.
The frequency reference when the speed reference 3” is ON.
The frequency reference when the multi function input multi step speed reference 1, 3” is ON.
The frequency reference when the speed reference 2, 3” is ON.
The frequency reference when the multi function input multi step speed reference 1, 2, 3” is ON.
The frequency reference when the multi-function inputs, “Jog frequencommand,” and “RJOG command” are ON.
Setting Factory
Range Setting g during
Operation
0 to
400 00
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
8
- 11
8
User Constants
8.2.3 Reference Constants: d
Number
J
Reference Limits: d2
Name
Description
Display
Frequency reference upper limit
Ref Upper Limit
Frequency reference lower limit
Ref Lower Limit
Sets the output frequency upper mum output frequency.
Sets the output frequency lower limit as a percentage of the maxi mum output frequency.
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
0.0 to
0.0 to
Constant
Number
J
Jump Frequencies: d3
Name
Display
Description
Setting Factory
Range Setting g during
Operation
Jump frequency 1
Jump Freq 1
Set the center values of the jump frequencies in Hz.
This function is disabled by setting the jump frequency to 0 Hz.
Always ensure that the following Jump frequency 2
Jump Freq 2 d3-01 d3-02 d3-03
Operation in the jump frequency range is prohibited but during ac-
Jump frequency 3
Jump Freq 3
Jump frequency width hl i h jump.
Sets the jump frequency bandwidth
Jump Bandwidth
The jump frequency will be the jump frequency r d3-04.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
20.0
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
Constant
Number d4-01
J
Reference Frequency Hold: d4
Name
Description
Display
Frequency reference hold function selection
MOP Ref Memory
+ -- Speed limits
Trim Control Lvl
Sets whether or nor frequencies on hold will be recorded.
0: Disabled (when operation is stopped or the power is turned on again starts at 0.)
1: Enabled (when operation is stopped or the power is turned on again starts at the previous hold frequency.)
This function is available when the multi--function inputs “accel/ decel Ramp Hold” or “up/down” commands are set.
Sets the increase/decrease frequency for analog frequency references as a percentage of the maximum
This function is available when the multi--function inputs “Trim
Clt Increase” or “Trim Clt Decrease” is set.
Setting Factory
Range Setting g during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
0 1 0 A A - 25
- 12
Consta nt
Number
8.2.4 Motor Constant Constants: E
J
V/f Pattern: E1
Name
Display
Input voltage setting
Input Voltage
Motor selection
Motor Selection
Description ting
Range ry Setting during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
Sets the Inverter input voltage in units of 1 V.
This setting is used as the reference value for f nctions s ch s th prot ction f nc tions.
0: Standard fan-cooled motor (general-purpose motor)
1: Standard blower-cooled motor (Inverterexclusive motor)
2: Special motor (vector--exclusive motor)
This setting is used as the reference value for functions such as the protection functions.
155 to
*1
200 - 17
- 27
Max. output frequency
Max Frequency
Max. voltage
Max Voltage
Base frequency
Base Frequency
Mid. output frequency
Mid Frequency A
Mid. output frequency voltage
Mid Voltage A
Min. output frequency
Min Frequency
Min. output frequency voltage
Min Voltage
Mid. output frequency 2
Mid Frequency B
Mid. output frequency voltage 2
Mid Voltage B
Base voltage
Base Voltage
E1-05
E1-13
VMIN t lt
E1-09
(V)
E1-07
Frequency
( Hz )
E1-06 E1-04
In this case, the setting for E1-08 will be disregarded.
E1 04 (FMAX) E1 06 (FA) E1 07
(FB) E1-09 (FMIN)
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the output range when using flux vector control.
Normally, this setting is not required.
40.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
255.0
*1
400.0
0.0 to
0.0 to
*1
0.0 to
0.0 to
*1
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
55.0
*1
0.0 to
*1
*1
11.0
0.5
2.0
0.0
0.0
*4
- 5
- 12
- 12
- 25
- 12
- 12
* 1. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for the 400 V class Inverter are double.
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (The open loop vector control factory setting is given.)
* 3. E1-11 and E1-12 are disregarded when set to 0.0.
* 4. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
J
Motor Setup: E2
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Description
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
Motor rated current
Motor Rated FLA
Sets the motor rated current in 1 A units.
These set values will become the protection, torque limits.
These values will automatically be set if they were set during autotuning.
0.32 to
6.40
*2
*1
- 13
8
- 13
8
User Constants
8.2.4 Motor Constant Constants: E
Name
Display
Motor rated slip
Motor Rated Slip
Motor no-load current
No-Load Current
Number of motor poles
Number of Poles
Motor line-to-line resistance
Term Resistance
Sets the motor rated slip in Hz units.
These set values will become the l f li pensation.
These values will be automatically set during autotuning.
Sets the motor no-load current in 1 u ts.
These values will be automatically set during autotuning.
Sets the number of motor poles.
Motor leak inductance
Leak Inductance
Motor iron-core saturation coefficient 1
Saturation Comp 1
Motor iron-core saturation coefficient 2
Saturation Comp 2
Motor mechanical loss
Mechanical Loss
0.00 to
20.00
1500.0
be set during autotuning.
Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance in : units.
Th s l s ill b tom tic l ly set during autotuning.
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage
0.000 to
65.000
0.0 to
30.0
These values will be automatically set during autotuning.
Sets the motor iron-core saturation coefficient at 50% of magnetic flux.
l s ill b tom tic l ly set during autotuning.
Sets the motor iron-core saturation coefficient at 75% of magnetic flux.
Th s l s ill b tom tic l ly set during autotuning.
Sets motor mechanical loss as a percentage of motor rated output
(W).
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust in the following circumstances:
S When torque loss is large due to motor bearing.
S When the torque loss in the pump or fan is large.
The set mechanical loss will compensate for torque.
0.00 to
0.50
0.00 to
0.0 to
*1
*1
9.842
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
- 13
- 13
- 7
- 7
- 7
- 15
- 7
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW are given. See page
- 35.
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter’s rated output current. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
J
Motor 2 Control Method: E3
Constant
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting Factory
Range Setting g during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
Motor 2 control method selection
Control Method
2: Open loop vector
- 14
J
Motor 2 V/f Pattern: E4
Consta nt
Number
Name
Display
E4-05
E4-07
Motor 2 max. output frequency
V/F2 Max Freq
Motor 2 max.
voltage
V/F2 Max Voltage
Motor 2 max.
voltage frequency
V/F2 Base Freq
Motor 2 mid. output frequency 1
V/F2 Mid Freq
Motor 2 mid. output frequency voltage 1
V/F2 Mid Voltage
Motor 2 min. output frequency
V/F2 Min Freq
Motor 2 min. output frequency voltage
V/F2 Min Voltage
Description
Output voltage (V)
VMAX
VC
VMIN
E4-06
Frequency
( Hz )
E4-04 E4-03 E4-01 li t th l f E4 04 d
E4-06. In this case, the setting for
E4-05 will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner:
( ) ( ) E4-04
(FB) E4 06 (FMIN) ting
Range ry Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
40.0 to
0.0 to
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
0.0 to
11.0*
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
2.0*
A
A
* When the control method is changed, the Inverter reverts to factory settings. (The open loop vector control factory settings are given.)
----
----
8
- 15
8
User Constants
8.2.4 Motor Constant Constants: E
Number
J
Motor 2 Setup: E5
Name
Description
Display
Motor 2 rated current
Motor 2 rated FLA
Motor 2 rated slip
Motor 2 Slip Freq
Motor 2 no-load current
Motor 2 No-load 1
Motor 2 number of poles
Motor 2 # Poles
Motor 2 line-to-line resistance
Motor 2 term Ohms
Motor 2 leak inductance
Motor 2 Leak
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Sets the motor rated current in 1 A units.
These set values will become the reference values for motor protection, torque limits.
These values will automatically be set if they were set during autotuning.
Sets the motor rated slip in Hz units.
These set values will become the f f li pensation.
These values will be automatically set during autotuning.
Sets the motor no-load current in 1
A units.
l s ill b tom tic l ly set during autotuning.
Sets the number of motor poles.
These values will automatically be set during autotuning.
Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance in : units.
l s ill b tom tic l ly set during autotuning.
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of the motor rated voltage.
These values will be automatically set during autotuning.
0.32 to
*2
20.00
0.00 to
0.000 to
0.0 to
*1
*1
1.20
9.842
18.2
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW are given. See page
- 35.
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter’s rated output current. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
- 16
8.2.5 Options Constants: F
Number
J
PG Option Setup: F1
Name
Display
Description
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
PG constant
Sets the number of PG (pulse gen-
PG Pulse/Rev
Operation selection at
PG open circuit
Sets the number of pulses per motor revolution.
Sets the PG disconnection stopping method.
0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration stop using deceleration time 1,
C1-02.)
0 to
60000
PG Fdbk Loss Sel
Operation selection at overspeed
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the fast-stop time, C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (PGO is displayed, and continues operation.)
Sets the stopping method when an overspeed (os) fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration stop using deceleration time 1,
C1-02.)
PG Overspeed Sel
Operation selection at deviation
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the fast-stop time, C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (OS is displayed, and continues operation.)
Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation (DEV) fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration stop using deceleration time 1,
C1-02.)
PG Deviation Sel
PG rotation
PG Rotation Sel
PG division rate (PG pulse monitor)
PG Output Ratio
Overspeed detection level
PG Overspd level
Overspeed detection delay time
PG Overspd Time
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the fast-stop time, C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV is displayed and continues operation.)
0: Phase A leads with forward run command. (Phase B leads with
1: Phase B leads with forward run command. (Phase A leads with reverse run command.)
Sets the division ratio for the PG speed control card pulse output.
Division ratio = (1+ n) /m (n=0,1 m=1 to 32)
F1--06 = n m
This constant is only effective when a PG-B2 is used.
The possible division ratio settings are: 1/32 % F1-06 % 1.
Sets the overspeed detection method.
F1 08 (set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency), which continue to exceed this frequency detected as overspeed faults.
0.0 to
* The setting range will change when the control method is changed. (The values for Open loop vector control is given.)
8
- 17
8
User Constants
8.2.5 Options Constants: F
Number
F1-10
F1-11
Name
Display
Excessive speed deviation detection level
PG Deviate Level
Excessive speed deviation detection delay time
PG Deviate Time
PG open-circuit detection time
PGO Time
Description
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
Sets the speed deviation detection method.
Any speed deviation above the of the maximum output frequency), which continues for the deviation detection time (F1-11) is detected as a speed deviation.
0 to 50
0.0 to
10 A - 24
0.5
A - 24 b t t l t d d the reference command speed.
Used to set the PG disconnection detection time. PGO will be deues beyond the set time.
0.0 to
Number
J
Other Options Setup: F2 through F9
F2: Analog Reference Card
F3: Digital Reference Card
F4: Analog Monitor Card
F5: DO-02 Digital Output Card
Name
Display
Description
F6: DO-08 Digital Output Card
F7: Pulse Monitor Card
F8: SI-F/G
F9: DOS/SI-B
Setting Factory
Range Setting during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
Bi-polar or uni-polar input selection
Sets the functions for channel 1 to 3 which are effective when the
AI-14B Analog Reference Card is used.
0: 3-channel individual (Channel
1: terminal 13, Channel 2: terminal 14, Channel 3: terminal
AI-14 Input Sel
Digital input option
DI Input
Channel 1 monitor selection
AO Ch1 Select
Channel 1 gain
AO Ch1 Gain
Channel 2 monitor selection
AO Ch2 Select
Channel 2 gain
AO Ch2 Gain
1: 3-channel addition (Addition values are the frequency reference)
When set to 0, select 1 for b1-01.
In this case the multi-function input “Option/Inverter selection” cannot be used.
Sets the Digital Reference Card input method.
0: BCD 1% unit
1: BCD 0.1% unit
2: BCD 0.01% unit
3: BCD 1 Hz unit
4 BCD 0 1 H it
5: BCD 0.01 Hz unit
6: BCD special setting (5-digit input)
7: Binary input
6 is only effective when the
DI-16H2 is used.
Effective when the Analog Monitor
Card is used.
Set the number of the monitor item to be output (U1)
Gain: lti l f 10 V f t
2.50
4, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 25, 28 cannot be set. 29 to 31 are not used.
When the AO-12 is used outputs f r
10 V ibl I hi case, set H4-07 (select multii l i l d l are possible.
t t f 0 t 10 V
0.00 to
2.50
- 18
F9-01
F9-03
Name
Display
Channel 1 output monitor bias
AO Ch1 Bias
Channel 2 output monitor bias
AO Ch2 Bias
Channel 1 output selection
DO-02 Ch1 Select
Channel 2 output selection
DO-02 Ch2 Select
Output mode selection
Sets the channel 1 item bias to tor card is used.
Set the channel 2 item bias to
100%/10 V when the analog moni tor card is used.
Effective when a Digital Output
Card is used.
tion output to be output.
Effective when a Digital Output
Card is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
--10.0 to
10.0
--10.0 to
0.0 to
37
0.0 to
37
DO-08 Selection
Frequency multiple selection
0: 8-channel individual outputs
1: Binary code output
Effective when the Pulse Monitor
Card is used.
Sets the number of output pulses.
0: 1F, 1: 6F, 2: 10F, 3: 12F, 4: 36F
PO-36F Selection
Optical option (SI-
F/G)
E-15 Det Sel
External fault input level from Optical option
E-15 Selection
External fault from
Optical option
EF0 Detection
Action for external fault from Optical option
EF0 Fault Act
Optical option trace sampling time
Trace Sample Time played in Hz.
Example: When 0 (1F) is set, and the output frequency is 60 Hz, 60 pulses per second are output.
(50% duty)
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2 Em r nc stop
3: Continue operation
0: NO contact
0: Always detect
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
3: Continue operation
0, 1
0 to 3
0 to
60000
0
1
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
B
B
B
B
----
----
8.2.6 Terminal Constants: H
J
Multi-function Inputs: H1
Number
Name
H1-01
H1-02
H1-03
Multi-function input 1
(terminal 3)
Multi-function input 2
(terminal 4)
Multi-function input 3
(terminal 5)
Terminal 3 Sel
Terminal 4 Sel
Terminal 5 Sel
Display
Setting Factory
Range Setting g during
Operation
0 to 77 24
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
B B - 32
0 to 77 14 B B
0 to 77 3 (0) * B B
- 32
- 32
8
- 19
8
User Constants
8.2.6 Terminal Constants: H
H1-04
H1-05
H1-06
Multi-function input 4
(terminal 6)
Multi-function input 5
(terminal 7)
Multi-function input 6
(terminal 8)
Terminal 6 Sel
Terminal 7 Sel
Terminal 8 Sel
0 to 77 4 (3) *
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
B B - 32
0 to 77 6 (4) * - 32
0 to 77 8 (6) *
B
B
B
B - 32
* The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire sequence.
Multi-function Input Functions value
Function
E
F
10
A
B
C
7
8
9
4
5
6
14
15
16
1A
11
12
13
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
0
1
2
3
64
65
66
60
61
62
77
80
20 to 2F
3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse run command)
Local/Remote selection (ON: Operator, OFF: Constant setting)
Option/Inverter selection (ON: Option card)
Multi-step speed reference 1
When H3-05 is set to “0,” this function is combined with “Master/auxiliary speed switch.”
Multi-step speed reference 2
Multi-step speed reference 3
Jog frequency reference (higher priority than multi-step speed reference)
Accel/Decel time 1
External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)
External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)
Accel/Decel ramp hold (ON: Accel/decel stopped, frequency on hold)
OH2 alarm signal input (ON: OH2 will be displayed)
Multi-function analog input selection (ON: Enable)
Speed control integral reset (ON: Integral control disabled)
Not used. (Do not input this setting.)
Up command (Always set with the down command)
Down command (Always set with the up command)
FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-09)
RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-09)
Fault reset (Reset when turned ON)
Emergency stop (ON: Deceleration to stop in emergency stop time C1-09)
Motor switch command (Motor 2 selection)
Accel/Decel time 2
Constants write enable (ON: All constants can be written-in. OFF: All constants other than frequency monitor are write protected.)
Trim control increase (ON: d4-02 frequencies are added to analog frequency references.)
Trim control decrease (ON: d4-02 frequencies are subtracted from analog frequency references.)
Analog frequency reference sample/hold
Frequency reference terminal 13/14 selection (ON: selects terminal 14)
External fault (Desired settings possible)
Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation
Stopping method: Deceleration to stop, coast to stop, emergency stop or continue operation.
DC injection braking command (ON: Performs DC injection braking)
External speed search command 1: Maximum output frequency (ON: speed search)
External speed search command 2: Set frequency (ON: speed search)
External speed search command 3
KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact)
KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact)
Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch (ON: C5-03)
Winding change
Control Methods
Open loop
Vector
Flux vector
Page
- 13
- 32
- 32
- 13
- 32
- 33
- 33
- 33
- 33
- 13
- 13
- 13
- 16
- 32
- 41
- 67
- 36
- 36
- 37
- 16
- 34
- 34
- 16
- 16
- 35
- 16
- 35
- 16
- 36
- 37
- 40
- 40
- 40
- 20
Control Methods
Open loop
Vector
Flux vector
81
82
MC answerback (N.C.)
MC answerback (N.O.)
J
Multi-function Outputs: H2
Constant
Number
Name
H2-01
H2-02
H2-03
Multi-function input
(terminal 9-10)
Multi-function input
(terminal 25-27)
Multi-function input
(terminal 26-27)
Terminal 9 Sel
Display
Terminal 25 Sel
Terminal 26 Sel
- 68
- 68
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to 37 0
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
B B - 42
B B 0 to 37
0 to 37
1
2 B B
- 42
- 42
Multi-function Output Functions value
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
18
19
1A
1B
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
D
E
F
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
30
31
37
8
9
A
6
7
B
Function
During run ON: run command is ON or voltage is being output)
Zero-speed
Frequency agree 1: (Detection width L4-02)
Desired frequency agree 1 (ON: Output frequency = r L4-01, detection width in L4-02)
Frequency (Four) detection 1 (ON: +L4-01 output frequency --L4-01, detection width in
L4-02)
Frequency (Four) detection 2
(ON: Output frequency +L4-01 or output frequency
%
--L4-01, detection width in L4-02)
Inverter operation ready READY: After initialization, no faults
During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection
During baseblock (ON: during baseblock)
Frequency reference selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator)
Run command selection (ON: Run command from Operator)
Overtorque detection 1 NO (NO contact: Overtorque detection at ON)
Loss of frequency reference (Effective when operation selection is “1” for L4-05 frequency reference missing)
Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault)
Fault (ON: Faults other than CPF00, CPF01 have occurred.)
Not used. (Do not set.)
Minor fault (ON: Alarm displayed)
Fault reset command active
Not used. (Do not set.)
Frequency agree 2 (Detection width: L4-04)
Desired frequency agree 2 (ON: Output frequency = L4-03, detection width in L4-04)
Frequency detection 3 (ON: Output frequency % --L4-03, detection width in L4-04)
Frequency detection 4 (ON: Output frequency --L4-03, detection width in L4-04)
Overtorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Ttorque detection at OFF)
Overtorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact: Torque detection at ON)
Overtorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF)
During reverse run (ON: During reverse run)
During baseblock 2 (OFF: During baseblock)
Motor selection (ON:During moter 1 selection)
Regenerating (ON: Regenerating)
Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled)
Motor overload (OL1) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: Temperature exceeds L8-02 setting)
During torque limit (current limit) (ON: During torque limit)
During speed limit. (ON: During speed limit)
During run 2 (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base block, DC injection braking, initial excitation, operation stop.)
Control Methods
Open loop
Vector
Flux vector
Page
- 43
- 43
- 54
- 54
- 54
- 54
- 56
- 54
NO TAG
NO TAG
- 54
- 54
- 54
- 54
- 56
- 56
- 56
- 56
- 43
- 43
- 43
- 43
8
- 21
8
User Constants
8.2.6 Terminal Constants: H
Control Methods
Open loop
Vector
Flux vector
40
41
Zero speed 2 (ON: Zero speed, not included during Y/ winding change)
Motor selection (ON:During moter 2 selection) - 41
Constant
Number
J
Analog Inputs: H3
Name
Display
Description
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
Signal level selection
(terminal 13)
Term 13 Signal
Gain (terminal 13)
Terminal 13 Gain
Bias (terminal 13)
Terminal 13 Bias
Signal level selection
(terminal 16)
Term 16 Signal
Multi-function analog input (terminal 16)
Terminal 16 Sel
Gain (terminal 16)
Terminal 16 Gain
Bias (terminal 16)
Terminal 16 Bias
Signal level selection
(terminal 14)
Term 14 Sel
Multi-function analog input (terminal 14)
Terminal 14 Sel
Gain (terminal 14)
0: 0 to 10V [11--bit + polarity
1: 0 to 10V
Sets the frequency when 10 V is inmum output frequency.
Sets the frequency when 0 V is inmum frequency.
0: 0 to 10V [11--bit + polarity
1: 0 to 10V
1000.0
--100.0
+100.0
Select from the functions listed in the following table. Refer to page
- 44.
Sets the input gain (level) when ter-
Set according to the 100% value on page - 44.
Sets the input gain (level) when ter-
Set according to the 100% value on page - 44
0: 0 to +10 V (Always cut jumper wire J1)
1: 0 to r 10 V (Always cut jumper wire J1)
2: 4 to 20 mA (10--bit input)
Set as for H3-05.
Cannot be set to 0. The 1F function ill b com “fr q nc r f erence.”
Sets the input gain (level) when terminal 14 is 10 V (20 mA).
0.0 to
1000.0
--100.0
+100.0
- 4
Terminal 14 Gain
Bias (terminal 14)
Terminal 14 Bias
Analog input filter time constant
Filter Avg Time page - 44.
If H3-09 = 1F the setting in
H3-02 is used.
Sets the input gain (level) when terminal 14 is 0 V (4 mA).
1000.0
page - 44.
If H3-09 = 1F the setting in
H3-03 is used.
Sets terminals 13, 14, 16 to primary delay filter time constant, in sec-
--100.0
to
+100.0
0.00 to
Effective for noise control etc.
- 22
H3-05 and H3-09 Settings
Setting Function Contents
1
2
5
6
7
9
A
10
11
12
13
14
15
H3-05: Auxiliary frequency reference
H3-09: “0” cannot be set
Frequency gain
Frequency bias
Accel/decel change (reduction coefficient)
DC injection braking current
Overtorque detection level
Frequency reference lower limit level
Jump frequency
Forward torque limit
Reverse torque limit
Regeneration torque limit
Torque reference/torque limit at speed control
Torque compensation bias
Forward/reverse side torque limit
H3-05: Not used (terminal 14: frequency reference)
H3-09: Frequency reference
Frequency reference (voltage) command value
Maximum output frequency (added to H3-03)
Set acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 to C1-08)
Inverter rated output current
Motor rated torque
Maximum output frequency
Maximum output frequency
Motor’s rated torque
Motor’s rated torque
Motor’s rated torque
Motor’s rated torque
Motor’s rated torque
Motor’s rated torque
Maximum output frequency
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
8
- 23
8
User Constants
8.2.6 Terminal Constants: H
Number
J
Analog Outputs: H4
Name
Display
Description
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Monitor selection (terminal 21)
Terminal 21 Sel
Gain (terminal 21)
Terminal 21 Gain
Bias (terminal 21)
Terminal 21 Bias
Monitor selection (terminal 23)
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1) from terminal 21.
4, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 25, 28 cannot be set and 29 to 31 are not used.
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage level gain.
S ts h th r th monitor it m o t put will be output in multiples of 10
V.
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/down parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V.
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1) from terminal 23.
0.00 to
2.50
+10.0
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
Terminal 23 Sel
Gain (terminal 23)
Terminal 23 Gain
Bias (terminal 23)
Terminal 23 Bias
Analog output signal level selection not be set and 29 to 31 are not used.
Sets the multi-function analog output 2 voltage level gain.
S ts h th r th monitor it m o t put will be output in multiples of 10
V.
Sets the multi-function analog output 2 voltage level bias.
2.50
parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V.
Sets the signal output level for multi-function outputs 1 and 2 (terminals 21, 23.)
0: 0 to +10 V output
+10.0
AO Level Select
The optional Analog Monitor
Card may also be used with this setting.
Number
J
MEMOBUS Communications: H5
Name
Display
Description
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Station address
Serial Comm Adr g during
Operation
Communication speed selection
Set the baud rate for 6CN MEMO-
BUS communications.
0: 1200 bps
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
----
H5-04
Serial Com Sel
Communication parity selection
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
Set the parity for 6CN MEMOBUS communications.
Serial Com Sel
Stopping method after communication error
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
Set the stopping method for communications errors.
0: Deceleration stop
Serial Fault Sel
2: Emergency stop
3: Continue operation
0 to 3 1 A A ----
- 24
Name
Display
Communication error detection selection
Serial Flt Dtct
Set whether or not a communications timeout is to be detected as a communications error.
0: Do not detect.
1: Detect
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
8.2.7 Protection Constants: L
Constant
Number
J
Motor Overload: L1
Name
Display
Description
Setting Factory
Range Setting g during
Operation
Motor protection selection
MOL Fault Select
Motor protection time constant
MOL Time Const
Sets whether the motor overload function is enabled or disabled at electric thermal overload relay.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
In some applications when the
Inverter power supply is turned even if this constant is set to 1,
(Enabled), protection may not be effective.
When several motors are connected to one Inverter, set to 0
(Disabled) and ensure that each motor is installed with a protection device.
Sets the electric thermal detection time in seconds units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
The factory setting is 150% overload for one minute.
When the motor’s overload resistance is known, set at the overload resistance when the motor is hot started.
0.1 to
5.0
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
Number
J
Power Loss Ridethrough: L2
Name
Description
Display
Momentary power loss detection
PwrL Selection
Momentary power loss ridethru time
PwrL Ridethru t
Min. baseblock time
0: Disabled (Undervoltage fault detection)
1: Enabled (Restarted when the power returns within the time for L2-02. When L2-02 is exceeded, undervoltage fault
2: Enabled while CPU is operating. (Restarts when power returns during control operations.
Does not detect undervoltage fault.
Sets the recovery time, when momentary power loss selection
(L2-01) is set to 1, in units of one second.
Sets the Inverter’s minimum baseblock time in units of one second, when the Inverter is restarted after power loss ridethrough.
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
0.0 to 0.7
0.0 to
5.0
*1
PwrL Baseblock t sidual voltage to dissipate.
When an overcurrent occurs when starting a speed search or
DC injection braking, increase the set values.
8
- 25
8
User Constants
8.2.7 Protection Constants: L
Name
Display
Voltage recovery time
Sets the time required to return to normal voltage at the completion of a speed search, in units of one second.
PwrL V/F Ramp t
Undervoltage detection level
PUV Det Level
KEB deceleration rate
KEB Frequency class Inverter to recover from 0
V to 200 VAC.
(For the 400 V class Inverter, the time from 0 V to 400 VAC.)
Sets the main circuit under voltage
(UV) detection level (main circuit
DC voltage) in V units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Insert an AC reactor to lower the main circuit undervoltage detection level.
Restores the operating conditions for momentary power loss by applying a frequency deceleration to create inertia energy when a power loss occurs, and thus avoid the power loss.
5.0
150 to
*2
0.0 to
100.0
190
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW are given. See page
- 35.
* 2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Value for a 400 V class Inverter is double.
J
Stall Prevention: L3
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting Factory
Range Setting during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Stall prevention selection during accel
StallP Accel Sel
Stall prevention level during accel
0: Disabled (Acceleration as set.
With a heavy load, the motor may stall.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration stopped when L3-02 level is exceeded.
Acceleration starts again when the current is returned.)
2: Intelligent acceleration mode
(Using the L3-02 level as a basis, acceleration is automatically adjusted. Set acceleration time is disregarded.)
Effective when L3-01 is set to 1 or
2.
Set as a percentage of Inverter rated
Page
StallP Accel Lvl
Stall prevention limit during accel
StallP CHP Lvl
Usually setting is not necessary.
The factory setting reduces the set values when the motor stalls.
Sets the lower limit for stall prevention during acceleration, as a percentage of the Inverter rated curth voltage frequency (E1-06.) i
Usually setting is not necessary.
- 26
Name
Display
Stall prevention selection during decel
StallP Decel Sel
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If deceleration time is too short, a main circuit overvoltage may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is stopped when the main circuit voltage exceeds the overvoltage level. Deceleration restarts when voltage is returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration mode cally adjusted so that in Inverter can decelerate in the shortest possible time. Set deceleration time is disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with braking resistor)
When a braking option (Braking
Resistor, Braking Resistor Unit,
Braking Unit) is used, always set to 0 (Disabled.)
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Number
L4-05
J
Reference Detection: L4
Name
Description
Display
Speed agree detection level
Spd Agree Level
Speed agree detection width
Spd Agree Width
Speed Agree detection level (+/--)
Spd Agree Lvl + --
Speed agree detection width (+/--)
Spd Agree Wdth + --
Operation when frequency reference is missing
Setting Factory
Range Setting during
Operation
Effective when “Desired frequency
(ref/setting) agree 1,” “Frequency detection 1,” “Frequency detection
,
0.0 to
400.0
Frequencies to be detected are set in Hz units.
Effective when “Frequency (ref/ out) agree 1,” “Desired frequency
(ref/setting) agree 1,” “Frequency t f lti f ti t t
Sets the frequency detection width in Hz units.
Effective when “Desired frequency
(ref/setting) agree 2,” “Frequency detection 3,” “Frequency detection
0.0 to
--400.0
to
+400.0
Frequency detection width is set in
Hz units.
Effective when “Frequency (ref/ out) agree 2,” “Desired frequency
(ref/setting) agree 1,” “Frequency
4”
, q y lti f ti t t
Frequency detection width is set in
Hz units.
0: Stop (Operation follows the frequency reference.)
1: Operation at 80% speed continues. (At 80% of speed before the frequency reference was
0.0 to
0 1 0
Ref Loss Sel
Frequency reference is lost: Frequency reference dropped over
90% in 400 ms.
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
A A - 54
8
- 27
8
User Constants
8.2.7 Protection Constants: L
Number
J
Fault Restart: L5
Name
Description
Display
Number of auto restart attempts
Num of Restarts
Auto restart operation selection
Sets the number of auto restart attempts.
Automatically restarts after a fault and conducts a speed search from the run frequency.
Sets whether a fault contact output is activated during fault restart.
0: Not output (Fault contact is not
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
Restart Sel 1: Output (Fault contact is activated.)
Number
J
Torque Detection: L6
Name
Description
Display
Torque detection selection 1
0: Overtorque detection disabled.
1: Detection during speed agree only/Operation continues after detection (Minor fault)
2: Detection during run/Operation continues after detection (Minor
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
Torq Det 1 Sel
3: Detection during speed agree only/Inverter output is shut off after detection (Fault)
4: Detection during run/Inverter output is shut off after detection
(Fault)
Torque detection level
1
Torq Det 1 Lvl
Torque detection time
1
Torq Det 1 Time
Torque detection selection 2
Torq Det 2 Sel
Torque detection level
2
Torq Det 2 Lvl
Torque detection time
2
Torq Det 2 Time
Vector control: Motor rated torque
Sets the torque detection time in
1-second units.
Setting procedure is the same as for
The following outputs are possible:
Torque detection selection 1:
Multi-function output “Torque
Torque detection selection 2:
Multi-function output “Torque
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 to
- 28
Consta nt
Number
J
Torque Limit: L7
Name
Description
Display
Forward torque limit
Torq Limit Fwd
Reverse torque limit
Torq Limit Rev
Forward regenerative torque limit
Torq Lmt Fwd
Rgn
Reverse regenerative torque limit
Torq Lmt Rev
Rgn d
Four individual regions can be set.
L7-04
Regenera-
Reverse
L7-02
L7-01
Regenera-
L7-03
Reverse side
Motor ting
Range ry Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Modes
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
0 to
0 to
0 to
Forwa
0 to
- 3
- 3
- 3
- 3
Constant
Number
L8-01
L8-03
J
Hardware Protection: L8
Name
Description
Display
Protect selection for internal DB resistor
(Type ERF)
DB Resistor Prot
Overheat pre-alarm level
OH Pre-Alarm Lvl
Operation selection after overheat prealarm
OH Pre-Alarm Sel
Input open-phase protection selection
Ph Loss In Sel
Output open-phase protection selection
Ph Loss Out Sel
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
0: Disabled (no overheating protection)
1: Enabled (overheating protec-
2: 3%ED
3: 10%ED
Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter overheat detection prealarm in q C.
cooling fin temperature reaches the set value.
Sets the operation for when the Inverter overheat pre-alarm goes ON.
0: Ramp to stop in deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time
3: Continue operation (Monitor display only.)
A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a minor fault will be given in setting 3.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Detects if input curp p p pp y cuit electrostatic capacitor deterioration occurs.)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Output open-phase detected at less than 5% of Inverter rated current.)
Output open-phase may be detected inadvertently when applied motor capacity is small for
Inverter capacity. In this case, set to 0 (Disabled.)
0 to 3
50 to
0 to 3
0
3
B
A
B
A
- 57
- 58
Ground protection selection
Gnd Det Sel
0: Disabled
8
- 29
8
User Constants
8.2.7 Protection Constants: L
L8-19
Name
Display
Carrier frequency reduction selection
0: No carrier frequency reduction
1: With carrier frequency reduction
2: For factory adjustments
3. For factory adjustments
L--Spd IGBT Prtct
OL2 characteristics seleciton at low speeds
OL2 Chara @ L--Spd i ) t d f th at low speeds (less than 6 Hz) t becomes a problem, set L8--17 to
0 and L8--19 to 1.
However, do not set L8--17 or
L8--19 to 0 when using open-loop vector control.
0: OL2 characteristics at low speeds disabled.
1: OL2 characteristics at low speeds enabled.
If using OL2 to trip at low speeds
(less than 6 Hz) even though the load is light, set L8--17 to 1 and
L8--19 to 0.
However, do not set L8--17 or
L8--19 to 0 when using open-loop vector control.
Do not set L8--19 to when using a 400 V class (185 to 300 kW)
Inverter.
0 1 0
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
A A - 59
- 30
8.2.8 Operator Constants: o
Consta
Number o1-03
J
Monitor Select: o1
Name
Description
Display
Monitor selection
Monitor Select
Monitor selection after power up
Power-On Monitor
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor ting
Range ry Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Set the number of the monitor item to be displayed in the earliest 4 monitor items.
(U1)
The output monitor voltage (factory setting) can be changed.
Sets the monitor item to be displayed when the power is turned on.
1: Frequency reference
2: Output frequency
3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for o1-01
Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the frequency reference and frequency monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum output frequency is 100%)
2 to 39:r/min units (Sets the motor poles.)
40 to 39999: User desired display
Set the desired values for
0 to
39999
0 B B
Page
- 7
Display Scaling
Set four digits without the decimal point
Set the position of the decimal point in the first digit.
Example: When the max. output frequency value is 200.0, set 12000
Set the V/f pattern setting units. (E1-04, 06,
09 set units)
0: Hz units o1-04
Frequency units of constant setting
Display Units
Constant No. display selection
Effective only in the flux vector control mode.
Set the Operator constant number display method.
Address Display
1: Display MEMOBUS communications register address
0 1 0 B - 13
8
- 31
8
User Constants
8.2.8 Operator Constants: o
Number o2-02
J
Multi-function Selections: o2
Name
Description
Display
LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/disable
Local/remote key
STOP key during control circuit terminal operation
Sets the Digital Operator Local/Remote Key
0: Disabled
1 E bl d (S it h b t
Digital Operator and the constant settings.) th
Sets the Stop Key in the run mode.
0: Disabled (When the run command is issued from and external terminal, the Stop Key is
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
0 1 1 B B - 61
Oper STOP Key
User constant initial value
1: Enabled (Effective even during run.)
Clears or stores user initial values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records the set constants as user initial values.)
User Defaults i iti l l )
When the set constants are recorded as user initial values,
1110 will be displayed in the Initialize mode (A1-03.) kVA selection
Inverter Model #
Frequency reference setting method selection
When the frequency reference is set on the Digital Operator frequency reference monitor, sets whether the
Enter Key is necessary.
0: Enter Key needed o2-05 0 1 0 A o2-06
Operator M.O.P.
Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected
Oper Detection
Cumulative operation time setting
Elapsed Time Set
Cumulative operation time selection
Elapsed Time Run
When set to 1, the Inverter accepts the frequency reference without Enter Key operation.
Sets the operation when the Digital
Operator is disconnected.
0: Disabled (Operation continues even if the Digital Operator is disconnected.)
1 E bl d (OPR i d t t d t
Digital Operator disconnection.
Inverter output is cut off, and fault contact is operated.)
Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units.
Operation time is calculated from the set values.
0: Cumulative time when the Inverter power is on. (All time while the Inverter power is on is accumulated.) )
1: Cumulative Inverter run time.
(Only Inverter output time is accumulated.)
0 1
0 to
65535
0 A
Initialize mode selection
Init Mode Sel
* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW are given.
A
A
- 61
- 63
- 32
8.2.9 Winding Change Constants: P
Constant
Number
J
Winding Change: P1
Name
Display
Description
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
Winding Change frequency
Changeover freq
Winding change hysteresis
Frequency Width
Answerback error detectioon
Ansback Det Time
Winding change frequency from Ywinding and -winding
Time setting of MC
Motor constant selection
Wye Winding sel
Programming mode valid/invalid during run
Program Mode @
RUN
Constant setting for Y-winding
Selecting motor 1/motor 2
0: Motor 1 constants (E1, E2) are used for Y-winding, and motor
2 constants (E3, E4, E5) are used for -winding
1: Motor 2 constants (E3, E4, E5) are used for Y-winding, and motor 2 constants (E1, E2) are used for -winding
MENU and ESC key valid/invalid during run
1: Enabled
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
0.20 to
- 67
- 68
- 68
- 66
- 70
Number
J
PG Orientation: P3
Name
Description
Display
Main Axis Zero Point
Position Origin
Position Control Gain
(H)
Position Gain H
Positioning Completion Detection Width
ORE Set Pulse
Positioning Completion Cancel Width
ORE Reset Pulse
Orientation Speed
ORT Speed
Gear Ratio (H) h l d i b f l
Sets the position control proportional gain when a high-speed gear
OFF) or when high-speed winding is selected (CHW is OFF).
Sets the detection width for outputting the completion signal as a axis approaches the command stop position.
Sets the positioning completion cancel width as a number of pulses ter the completion signal is output.
Sets the speed applied until changtion.
Sets the gear ratio determined by
Gear Ratio H
Gear Direction
Gear Direction
Dither Level
Dither Level
Gear Ratio = Load axis speed Motor speed
Sets the rotation direction of the motor axis and load axis.
0: Same
1: Reverse
Setting Factory
Range Setting
Change during
Operation
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Flux Vector
Page
1 to 99 5 pulses
60 to
600
0.0500
to
1.5000
10
400
/ i
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
8
- 33
8
User Constants
8.2.10 Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)
8.2.10 Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)
stant
No.
Name
Display
Speed search selection at start
SpfSrch at Start
Slip compensation gain
Slip Comp gain
Range
Unit
Factory Setting
Open Loop Vector
A1-02=2
Flux Vector
A1-02=3
E4--01 Max Frequency
E4--02 Max Voltage
E4--03 Max Voltage Frequency
Mid. output frequency
E4-04 Mid Frequency A
Mid. output frequency voltage
E4-05 Mid voltage A
Min. output frequency
E4-06 Min Frequency
Note Values in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters.
(0.0 to 510.0) (22.0)
- 34
8.2.11 Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
J
200 V Class Inverters
Constant
No.
Name o2-04
Inverter Capacity kVA selection
C6-01 Carrier frequency upper limit
Carrier frequency upper limit range
E2-01
(E5-01)
E2-02
(E5-02)
E2-03
(E5-03)
E2-05
(E5-05)
E2-06
(E5-06)
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
L2-03 Min. baseblock time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time
Unit kW
1 kHz kHz
A
Hz
A
% sec sec sec
0.4
0
15.0
15.0
1.90
2.90
1.20
9.842
18.2
0.7
0.5
0.3
E2-01
(E5-01)
E2-02
(E5-02)
E2-03
(E5-03)
E2-05
(E5-05)
E2-06
(E5-06)
Constant
No.
Name o2-04
Inverter Capacity kVA selection
C6-01 Carrier frequency upper limit
Carrier frequency upper limit range
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
L2-03 Min. baseblock time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time
Unit kW
1 kHz kHz
A
Hz
A
% sec sec sec
15
8
15.0
15.0
53.0
1.60
15.2
0.138
17.2
2.0
0.7
0.3
0.75
1
15.0
15.0
3.30
2.50
1.80
5.156
13.8
1.0
0.5
0.3
18.5
9
15.0
15.0
65.8
1.67
15.7
0.101
20.1
2.0
1.0
0.6
1.5
2
15.0
15.0
6.20
2.60
2.80
1.997
18.5
1.0
0.5
0.3
22
A
10.0
10.0
77.2
1.70
18.5
0.079
19.5
2.0
1.0
0.6
Factory Setting
2.2
3
15.0
15.0
8.50
2.90
3.00
1.601
18.4
1.0
0.5
0.3
Factory Setting
30
B
10.0
10.0
105.0
1.80
21.9
0.064
20.8
2.0
1.0
0.6
14.00
2.73
4.50
0.771
19.6
2.0
0.5
0.3
37
C
10.0
10.0
3.7
4
15.0
15.0
131.0
1.33
38.2
0.039
18.8
2.0
1.0
0.6
45
D
10.0
10.0
5.5
5
15.0
15.0
19.60
1.50
5.10
0.399
18.2
2.0
1.0
0.6
2.0
0.7
0.3
160.0
1.60
44.0
0.030
20.2
55
E
10.0
10.0
7.5
6
15.0
15.0
26.60
1.30
8.00
0.288
15.5
2.0
1.0
0.6
2.0
0.7
0.3
190.0
1.43
45.6
0.022
20.5
1.70
11.2
0.230
19.5
2.0
0.7
0.3
11
7
15.0
15.0
39.7
75
F
10.0
10.0
260.0
1.39
72.0
0.023
20.0
2.0
1.0
0.6
8
- 35
8
User Constants
8.2.11 Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
J
400 V Class Inverters
E2-01
(E5-01)
E2-02
(E5-02)
E2-03
(E5-03)
E2-05
(E5-05)
E2-06
(E5-06)
Constant
No.
Name o2-04
Inverter Capacity kVA selection
C6-01 Carrier frequency upper limit *
Carrier frequency upper limit range
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
L2-03 Min. baseblock time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time
Unit kW
1 kHz kHz
A
Hz
A
% sec sec sec
0.4
20
15.0
15.0
1.00
2.90
0.60
38.198
18.2
1.0
0.5
0.3
0.75
21
15.0
15.0
1.60
2.60
0.80
22.459
14.3
1.5
22
15.0
15.0
3.10
2.50
1.40
10.100
18.3
Factory Setting
2.2
23
15.0
15.0
4.20
3.00
1.50
6.495
3.333
18.7
3.7
24
15.0
15.0
7.00
2.70
2.30
19.3
4.0
25
15.0
15.0
7.00
2.70
2.30
3.333
19.3
5.5
26
15.0
15.0
9.80
1.50
2.60
1.595
18.2
7.5
27
12.5
15.0
13.30
1.30
4.00
1.152
15.5
1.0
0.5
0.3
1.0
0.5
0.3
1.0
0.5
0.3
2.0
0.5
0.3
2.0
0.7
0.3
2.0
0.7
0.3
Constant
No.
Name o2-04
Inverter Capacity kVA selection
C6-01 Carrier frequency upper limit
Carrier frequency upper limit range
E2-01
(E5-01)
E2-02
(E5-02)
E2-03
(E5-03)
E2-05
(E5-05)
E2-06
(E5-06)
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
Momentary power loss ridethru time
Min. baseblock time
Voltage recovery time
Unit kW
1 kHz kHz
A
Hz
A
% sec sec sec
15
29
12.5
15.0
26.5
1.60
7.6
0.550
17.2
2.0
0.7
0.3
18.5
2A
12.5
15.0
32.9
1.67
7.8
0.403
20.1
2.0
1.0
0.6
22
2B
10.0
15.0
38.6
1.70
9.2
0.316
23.5
2.0
1.0
0.6
Factory Setting
30
2C
10.0
15.0
52.3
1.80
10.9
0.269
20.7
2.0
1.0
0.6
37
2D
10.0
10.0
65.6
1.33
19.1
0.155
18.8
2.0
1.0
0.6
45
2E
7.0
10.0
79.7
1.60
22.0
0.122
19.9
2.0
1.0
0.6
* When frequency upper limit is set higher than the factory setting with the inverter of 7.5kW or more, inverter rated current should be reduced. Contact your YASKAWArepresentative for details.
55
2F
6.0
10.0
95.0
1.46
24.0
0.088
20.0
2.0
1.0
0.6
2.0
0.7
0.3
75
30
6.0
10.0
2.0
1.0
0.6
11
28
12.5
15.0
19.9
1.70
5.6
0.922
19.6
2.0
0.7
0.3
130.0
1.39
36.0
0.092
20.0
- 36
9
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasure for the
VS-626MC5 and motor problems and countermeasures.
9.1
Protective and Diagnostic Functions . . . . . . .
9.1.1 Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.2 Minor Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.3 Operation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 2
9 2
9 6
9 8
9.2
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.1 If Constant Constants Cannot Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.2 If the Motor Does Not Operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.3 If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed . . . . .
9.2.4 If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.5 If the Motor Does Not Operate According to Reference9 11
9.2.6 If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed
Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.7 If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed
Rotation in Open-loop Vector Control Mode . . . . . . . . .
9.2.8 If Motor Deceleration is Slow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.9 If the Motor Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.10 If There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.11 If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the
Inverter is Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.12 If There is Mechanical Oscillation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.13 If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is
Stopped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.14 If 0 V is Detected When the Fan is Started, or Fan
Stalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.15 If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.16 Winding change error has occurred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 9
9 9
9 9
9 11
9 11
9 11
9 11
9 12
9 12
9 12
9 13
9 13
9 13
9 1 3
9 14
9 14
9
- 1
9
Troubleshooting
9.1.1 Fault Detection
9.1
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
9.1.1 Fault Detection
Fault Display
OC
Overcurrent
GF
Ground Fault
PUF
DC Bus Fuse Open
SC
Short Circuit
OV
UV1
DC Bus Undervolt
UV2
CTL PS Undervolt
UV3
MC Answerback
When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator, the fault contact output operates, and the Inverter output is shut OFF causing the motor to coast to a stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults, and the selected stopping method will be used with these faults.)
D
D
When a fault has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the fault.
Use one of the following methods to reset the fault after restarting the Inverter: x Turn ON the fault reset signal.
x
(A multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-06) must be set to 14 (Fault Reset).)
Press the RESET Key on the Digital Operator.
x Turn the main circuit power supply off and then on again.
Table
9.1
Fault Displays and Processing
Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Overcurrent
The Inverter output current exceeded the overcurrent detection level.
(200% of rated current
S A short-circuit or ground fault occurred at the Inverter output. (A short or ground fault can be caused by motor burn damage, worn insulation, or a damaged cable.)
S The load is too large or the acceleration/deceleration time is too short.
S A special-purpose motor or motor with a capacity too large for the Inverter is being used.
S A magnetic switch was switched at the Inverter output.
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
Ground Fault
The ground fault current at the Inverter output exceeded approximately
50% of the Inverter rated output current.
Fuse Blown
The fuse in the main circuit is blown.
A ground fault occurred at the Inverter output.
(A ground fault can be caused by motor burn damage, worn insulation, or a damaged cable.)
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
Load Short-circuit
The Inverter output or load was shortcircuited.
Main Circuit Overvoltage
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
200 V class: Approx. 400 V
400 V class: Approx. 800 V
The output transistor has failed because of a short-circuit or ground fault at the Inverter output.
Check whether there is a short-circuit between the following terminals. A short-circuit will damage the output transistor:
B1 ( ¨ 3) l
U, V, W
© l U, V, W
A short-circuit or ground fault occurred at the Inverter output. (A short or ground fault can be caused by motor burn damage, worn insulation, or a damaged cable.)
The deceleration time is too short and the regenerative energy from the motor is too large.
The power supply voltage is too high.
Replace the Inverter after correcting the cause.
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
Increase the deceleration time or connect a braking resistor (or Braking
Resistor Unit).
Decrease the voltage so it’s within specifications.
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The main circuit DC voltage is below the undervoltage detection level
(L2-05).
200 V class: Approx. 190 V
400 V class: Approx. 380 V
S An open-phase occurred with the input power supply.
S A momentary power loss occurred.
S The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose.
S The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too large.
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
Control Power Fault
The control power supply voltage dropped.
Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault
A fault occurred in the inrush prevention circuit.
-- --
-- --
S Try turning the power supply off and on.
S Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur.
S Try turning the power supply off and on.
S Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur.
- 2
9.1Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Fault Display
PF
Input Pha Loss
LF
OH OH1
RH
Dyn Brk Resistor
RR
Dyn Brk Transistr
Motor Overloaded
Inv Overloaded
OL3
Overtorque Det 1
OL4
Overtorque det 2
OS i
Main Circuit Voltage Fault
The main circuit DC voltage oscillates unusually (not when regenerating).
This fault is detected when L8-05 is set to “Enabled.”
Output Open-phase
An open-phase occurred at the Inverter output.
This fault is detected when L8-07 is set to “Enabled.”
Cooling Fin Overheating
The temperature of the Inverter’s cooling fins exceeded the setting in
L8-02 or 105 q C.
Inverter internal cooling fan stopped
(18.5kW or more)
Installed Braking Resistor Overheating
The braking resistor is overheated and the protection function set with
L8-01 has operated.
Internal Braking Transistor Fault
The braking transistor is not operating properly.
Motor Overload
The motor overload protection func-
Inverter Overload
Overspeed i
Meaning h i i F1 08 f l setting in F1-09.
l l
The Inverter overload protection function has operated based on the l l i h l l
Overtorque 1
There has been a current greater than the setting in L6-02 for longer than the setting in L6-03.
Overtorque 2
There has been a current greater than the setting in L6-05 for longer than the setting in L6-06.
h
PG Disconnection Detected h
The PG is disconnected.
The Inverter is outputting a frequency, but PG pulses aren’t being input.
Probable Causes
S An open-phase occurred in the input power supply.
S A momentary power loss occurred.
S The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose.
S The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too large.
S The voltage balance between phases is bad.
S There is a broken wire in the output cable.
S There is a broken wire in the motorwinding.
S The output terminals are loose.
The motor being used has a capacity less than 5% of the Inverter’s maximum motor capacity.
Corrective Actions
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
Check the motor and Inverter capacity.
The ambient temperature is too high.
There is a heat source nearby.
The Inverter’s cooling fan has stopped.
Inverter internal cooling fan has stopped (18.5kW or more).
Install a cooling unit.
Remove the heat source.
your Yaskawa representative.)
The deceleration time is too short and the regenerative energy from the motor is too large.
S Reduce the load, increase the deceleration time, or reduce the motor speed.
S Change to a Braking Resistor Unit.
-- --
The load is too heavy. The acceleration time, deceleration time, and cycle time are too short.
The V/f characteristics voltage is too high.
The motor’s rated current setting
(E2-01) is incorrect.
The load is too heavy. The acceleration time, deceleration time and cycle time are too short.
The V/f characteristics voltage is too high.
S Try turning the power supply off and on.
S Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur.
Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the motor’s rated current setting (E2-01).
Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
The Inverter capacity is too low.
-- --
-- --
Replace the Inverter with one that has a larger capacity.
S Make sure that the settings in L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
S Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
S Make sure that the current setting in
L6-05 and time setting in L6-06 are appropriate.
S Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
Overshooting/Undershooting are occurring.
Adjust the gain again.
The reference speed is too high.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren’t appropriate.
Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
Check the settings in F1-08 and
F1-09.
There is a break in the PG wiring.
The PG is wired incorrectly.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
Fix the wiring.
Power isn’t being supplied to the PG.
Supply power to the PG properly.
-- --
Check for open circuit when using brake (motor).
- 3
9
9
Troubleshooting
9.1.1 Fault Detection
Fault Display
DEV d D i i
Meaning
Excessive Speed Deviation
The speed deviation has been greater than the setting in F1-10 for longer
Probable Causes
The load is too heavy.
The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short.
The load is locked.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 aren’t appropriate.
Corrective Actions
Reduce the load.
Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time.
Check the mechanical system.
Check the settings in F1-10 and
F1-11.
Check for open circuit when using brake (motor).
CF
Out of Control
MCANS
Winding Change
OPR
Oper Disconnect
-- --
Control Fault
The torque limit was reached continuously for 3 seconds or longer during a deceleration stop during open-loop vector control.
MC answerback error
Anwerback signal is not received within the time set by constant P1-03.
-- --
H1 fault setting
MC is not excited.
Wiring is faulty.
Magnetic contactor is faulty.
properly.
Operator Connection Fault
The Operator was disconnected during operation started by a run command from the Operator.
External fault input from Transmission Option Card.
External fault (Input terminal 3)
-- --
-- --
Check the motor constants.
Reset the constant setting.
Excite the magnetic contactor.
Fix the wiring.
Replace the magnetic contactor.
Check the Operator connection.
EFO
Opt External Flt
EF3
External Fault 3
EF4
EF5
EF6
EF7
EF8
CPF00
COM-ERR (OP&INV)
CPF01
COM-ERR (OP&INV)
CPF02
CPF03
CPF04
CPF05
CPF06
CPF20
Option A/D Error
External fault (Input terminal 4)
External fault (Input terminal 5)
External fault (Input terminal 6)
External fault (Input terminal 7)
External fault (Input terminal 8)
Operator Communications Error 1 bli h d i hi 5 after the power was turned on.
d
Operator Communications Error 2
After communications were estabwith the Digital Operator for more than 2 seconds.
Baseblock circuit error
EEPROM error
CPU internal A/D converter error
CPU external A/D converter error
Option Card connection error
Option Card A/D converter error
An “external fault” was input from a
Check the Trsansmission Option Card and transmission signal.
S Reset external fault inputs to the lti f ti i t p
S Remove the cause of the external fault.
The Digital Operator’s connector isn’t connected properly.
The Inverter’s control circuits are faulty.
The Digital Operator isn’t connected properly.
The Inverter’s control circuits are faulty.
Disconnect the Digital Operator and then connect it again.
Replace the Inverter.
Disconnect the Digital Operator and then connect it again.
Replace the Inverter.
-- --
The control circuit is damaged.
-- --
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
The control circuit is damaged.
-- --
The control circuit is damaged.
-- --
The control circuit is damaged.
The Option Card is not connected properly.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Turn off the power and insert the Card again.
The Inverter or Option Card is faulty.
Replace the faulty component.
The Option Card is not connected properly.
Turn off the power and insert the Card again.
The Option Card’s A/D converter is faulty.
Replace the Option Card.
- 4
9.1Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Fault Display
CPF21
Option CPU down
CPF22
Option Type Err
CPF23
Option DPRAM Err
Meaning
Transmission Option Card self diagnostic error
Transmission Option Card model code error
Transmission Option Card
DPRAM error
Probable Causes
Option Card fault.
Corrective Actions
Replace the Option Card.
9
- 5
9
Troubleshooting
9.1.2 Minor Fault Detection
9.1.2 Minor Fault Detection
Minor fault display
EF (blinking)
External Fault
UV (blinking)
DC Bus Undervolt
OV (blinking)
Overvoltage
OH (blinking) i k O
OH2 (blinking)
Over Heat 2
OL3 (blinking)
Overtorque Det 1
OL4 (blinking)
Overtorque Det 2
OS (blinking)
Speed Deviation
Minor faults are a type of Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault contact output and are automatically returned to their original status once the cause of the minor fault has been removed.
The Digital Operator display blinks and the minor fault is output from the multi-function outputs (H2-01 to
H2-03).
Take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.
Table
9.2
Meaning
Minor Fault Displays and Processing
Probable causes Corrective Actions
Forward/Reverse Run Commands
Input Together
Both the forward and reverse run commands have been ON for more than 0.5 s.
-- --
Check the sequence of the forward and reverse run commands.
Since the rotational direction is unknown, the motor will be decelerated to a stop when this minor fault occurs.
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The following conditions occurred when there was no Run signal.
S The main circuit DC voltage was below the undervoltage detection level (L2-05).
S The surge current limiting contactor opened.
S The control power supply voltage when below the CUV level.
Main Circuit Overvoltage
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
200 V class: Approx. 400 V
400 V class: Approx. 800 V
Cooling Fin Overheating
The temperature of the Inverter’s
See causes for UV1 UV2 and UV3 faults.
The power supply voltage is too high.
The ambient temperature is too high.
There is a heat source nearby.
L8-02.
The Inverter cooling fan has stopped.
See corrective actions for
UV1 UV2 and UV3 faults.
Decrease the voltage so it’s within specifications.
Install a cooling unit.
Remove the heat source.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact your Yaskawa representative.)
Inverter Overheating Pre-alarm
An OH2 alarm signal (Inverter overheating alarm signal) was input from a multi-function input.
Overtorque 1
There has been a current greater than the setting in L6-02 for longer than the setting in L6-03.
Overtorque 2
There has been a current greater than the setting in L6-05 for longer than the setting in L6-06.
-- --
Clear the multi-function input’s overheating alarm input.
Overspeed i i F1 08 f l setting in F1-09.
h h
The PG is disconnected.
The Inverter is outputting a frequency, but PG pulses aren t being input.
Excessive Speed Deviation
The speed deviation has been greater than the setting in F1-10 for longer
-- --
-- --
S Make sure that the settings in L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
S Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
S Make sure that the current setting in
L6-05 and time setting in L6-06 are appropriate.
S Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
Overshooting/undershooting are occurring.
Adjust the gain again.
The reference speed is too high.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren’t appropriate.
Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
Check the settings in F1-08 and
F1-09.
There is a break in the PG wiring.
The PG is wired incorrectly.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
Fix the wiring.
Power isn’t being supplied to the PG.
Supply power to the PG properly.
The load is too large.
Reduce the load.
The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short.
Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time.
The load is locked.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 aren’t appropriate.
Check the mechanical system.
Check the settings in F1-10 and
F1-11.
- 6
9.1Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Minor fault display
EF3 (blinking)
External Fault 3
EF4 (blinking)
EF5 (blinking)
EF6 (blinking)
EF7 (blinking)
EF8 (blinking)
CE
MEMOBUS Com Err
BUS
Option Com Err
CALL
Serial Com Call
E-15
Si-F/G Com Err
EF0
Opt External Flt
Meaning
External fault (Input terminal 3)
External fault (Input terminal 4)
External fault (Input terminal 5)
External fault (Input terminal 6)
External fault (Input terminal 7)
External fault (Input terminal 8)
Communications Error
Normal reception was not possible for 2 s after received control data.
Option Card Transmission Error
A communications error occurred in a mode where the run command or a frequency reference is set from an
Transmission Option Card.
SI-B Communications Error
Control data was not normally received when power was turned ON.
SI-F/G Communications Error Detected
A communications error occurred in a mode where run or a frequency reference is set from an Transmission
Option Card and E-15 is set to continue operation.
DDS/SI-B External Error Detected
An external error ware received from an Option Card when EF0 was set to continue operation.
Probable causes
An “external fault” was input from a multi-function input.
-- --
-- --
-- --
-- --
-- --
S
S
Corrective Actions
Reset external fault inputs to the ti i t
Remove the cause of the external fault.
Check the communications devices and signals.
Check the Transmission Card and signals.
Check the communications devices and signals.
Check the communications signals.
Remove the cause of the external error.
9
- 7
9
Troubleshooting
9.1.3 Operation Errors
9.1.3 Operation Errors
Display
OPE01 kVA Selection
OPE02
Limit
After the constants have been set, an operation error will occur if there is an invalid setting or a contradiction between two constant settings.
It won’t be possible to start the Inverter until the constants have been set correctly. (The minor fault output and fault contact output will not operate, either.)
When an operation error has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the errors.
Table
9.3
Meaning
Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings
Incorrect settings
Incorrect Inverter capacity setting
The Inverter capacity setting doesn’t match the Unit. (Contact your Yaskawa representative.)
Constant setting range error The constant setting is outside of the valid setting range.
OPE03
Terminal
OPE05
Sequence Select
OPE06
PG Opt Missing
Multi-function input selection error
Option Card selection error
One of the following errors has been made in the multi-function input (H1-01 to
H1-06) settings:
S The same setting has been selected for two or more multi-function inputs.
S An up or down command was selected independently. (They must be used together.)
S The up/down commands (10 and 11) and Accel/Decel Ramp Hold (A) were selected at the same time.
S Speed Search 1 (61, maximum output frequency) and Speed Search 2 (62. set frequency) were selected at the same time.
S External Baseblock NO (8) and External Baseblock NC (9) were selected at the same time.
S The Terminal 13/14 Switch (1F) was selected, but the terminal 14 function selector
(H3-09) wasn’t set to frequency reference (1F).
The Option Card was selected as the frequency reference source by setting b1-01 to
3, but an Option Card isn’t connected.
Control method selection error
OPE07
Analog Selection
OPE08
Elevator Table
OPE10
V/f Ptrn Setting
OPE11
CarrFrg/On-Delay
OPE12
ERR
EEPROM R/W Err
Multi-function analog input selection error
Constant selection error
V/f data setting error
Constant setting error
Winding change sequence error
EEPROM write error
Flux vector control was selected by setting A1-02 to 3, but a PG Speed Control Card isn’t connected.
S The same setting (other than 1F) has been selected for H3-05 and H3-09.
S An A1-14B Analog Reference Card is being used and F2-01 is set to 0, but a multifunction input (H1-01 to H1-06) has been set to Option/Inverter Selection (2).
A setting has been made that is not required in the current control method.
Ex.: A function used only with flux vector control was selected for open-loop vector control.
Constants E1-04, E1-06, E1-07, and E1-09 do not satisfy the following conditions:
S E1-04 (FMAX) E1-06 (FA) E1-07 (FB) E1-09 (FMIN)
One of the following constant setting errors exists.
S The carrier frequency upper limit (C6-01) > 5 KHz and the carrier frequency lower limit (C6-02) 5 KHz.
S The carrier frequency gain (C6-03) > 6 and (C6-01) > (C6-02).
S Upper/lower limit error in C6-01 to 03 or C8-15.
One of the following errors exists.
S Multi-function digital input is set to 80 (winding change) and 16 (Motor 2 selection) at the same time.
S Multi-function digital input is set to 81 and 82 at the same time.
S Multi-function digital input is set to 81, or b1--02 is not set to 5 when P1-01 is not 0.
A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM.
S Try turning the power supply off and on again.
S Try setting the constants again.
- 8
9.2Troubleshooting
9.2
Troubleshooting
Due to constant setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started up. If that should occur, use this section as a reference and apply the appropriate measures.
If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer to 9.1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions.
9.2.1 If Constant Constants Cannot Be Set
J
The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement Keys are pressed.
1. Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)
D
D
If the constant A1-04 (Password 1) and A1-05 (Password 2) numbers are different, the constants for the initialize mode cannot be changed. Reset the password.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (select password) by pressing the Reset/Select Key and the Menu Key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Then reset the password. (Input the reset password in constant A1-04.)
2. Constant write enable is input.
D This occurs when “constant write enable” (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function input. If the constant write enable input is OFF, the constants cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set the constants.
J
3. The Inverter is operating (drive mode).
D There are some constants that cannot be set during operation. Turn the Inverter off and then make the settings.
OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.
J
D This is a constant setting error. The set value for the constant is wrong. Refer to 9.1.3 Operation Errors and correct the setting.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.
D This is a Digital Operator communications error. The connection between the Digital Operator and the
Inverter may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator and then re-install it.
9.2.2 If the Motor Does Not Operate
J
The motor does not operate when the Run Key on the Digital Operator is pressed.
IMPORTANT
If the Inverter is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the Menu Key to display the operation mode, and enter the drive mode by pressing the Enter Key.
1. The operation method setting is wrong.
D If constant b1-02 (run source) is set to “1” (control circuit terminal), the motor will not operate when the
Run Key is pressed. Either press the Local/Remote Key* to switch to Digital Operator operation or set constant b1-02 to “0” (Digital Operator).
The Local/Remote Key is enabled (set value: 1) or disabled (set value: 2) by means of constant o2-01.
It is enabled when the drive mode is entered.
2. The frequency reference is too low.
D If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (minimum output frequency), the Inverter will not operate.
Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency. (Related constant: b1-05)
3 There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
D If multi-function analog inputs H3-05 and H3-09 are set to “1” (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is input, then the frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct.
4. Frequency reference 2 is specified with multi-step speed operation, and auxiliary frequency reference is not input.
D If multi-function analog input H3-05 is set to “0” (auxiliary frequency reference), and if multi-step speed reference is used, the auxiliary frequency reference will be treated as frequency reference 2. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value (terminal 16) are correct.
9
- 9
9
Troubleshooting
9.2.2 If the Motor Does Not Operate
J
5. A digital setting was made for frequency reference 2 for multi-step speed operation, but
“1F” was not set for a multi-function analog input (H3-05).
D
D
The auxiliary frequency reference is treated as frequency reference 2 when the multi-step speed references are used and “0” (auxiliary frequency reference) is set for the multi-function analog input (H3-05).
Make sure that “1F” is set for the multi-function analog input (H3-05) and that the setting of frequency reference 2 is appropriate.
The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
NOTE
If the Inverter is not in operation mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the Menu Key to display the drive mode, and enter the drive mode by pressing the Enter Key.
1. The operation method selection is wrong.
D
D
If constant b1-02 (run source) is set to “0” (Digital Operator), the motor will not operate when an external operation signal is input. Set b1-02 to “1” (control circuit terminal) and try again.
Similarly, the motor will also not operate if the Local/Remote Key has been pressed to switch to Digital
Operator operation. In that case press the Local/Remote Key* again to return to the original setting.
The Local/Remote Key is enabled (set value: 1) or disabled (set value: 2) by means of constant o2-01.
It is enabled when drive mode is entered.
2. A 3-wire sequence is in effect.
D
D
D
The input method for a 3-wire sequence is different than when operating by forward/stop and reverse/ stop (2-wire sequence). When 3-wire sequence is set, the motor will not operate even when an input terminal suitable for forward run/stop and reverse run/stop is turned ON.
When using a 3-wire sequence, refer to the timing chart on page - 13 and input the proper signals.
When using a 2-wire sequence, set multi-function inputs H1-01 through H1-06 to a value other than 0.
3. The frequency reference is too low.
D If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (minimum output frequency), the Inverter will not operate.
Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency. (Related constant: b1-05)
4. There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
D If multi-function analog inputs H3-05 and H3-09 are set to “1” (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is input, then the frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct.
5. Frequency reference 2 is specified with multi-step speed operation and auxiliary frequency reference is not input.
D If multi-function analog input H3-05 is set to “0” (auxiliary frequency reference) and if multi-step speed reference is used, the auxiliary frequency reference will be treated as frequency reference 2. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value (terminal 16) are correct.
J
6. A digital setting was made for frequency reference 2 for multi-step speed operation, but
“1F” was not set for a multi-function analog input (H3-05).
D
D
The auxiliary frequency reference is treated as frequency reference 2 when the multi-step speed references are used and “0” (auxiliary frequency reference) is set for the multi-function analog input (H3-05).
Make sure that “1F” is set for the multi-function analog input (H3-05) and that the setting of frequency reference 2 is appropriate.
The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.
D The load may be too heavy. The Inverter has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost function, but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too heavy. Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
- 10
9.2Troubleshooting
9.2.3 If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed
D The motor output wiring is faulty. When the Inverter T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W) are properly connected to the motor T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W), the motor operates in a forward direction when a forward run command is executed. The forward direction depends on the manufacturer and the motor type, so be sure to check the specifications. Switching two wires among the T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W) will reverse the direction of rotation.
9.2.4 If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow
J
The torque limit has been reached.
J
D When a torque limit has been set in constants L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that limit.
This can cause the torque to be insufficient, or the acceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suitable.
If the torque limit has been set by multi-function analog inputs H3-05 and H3-09 (set value: 10 to 13), check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.
J
D If the value set for L3-02 (stall prevention level during acceleration) is too low, the acceleration time will be too long. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during running is too low.
J
D If the value set for L3-06 (stall prevention level during running) is too low, the speed will drop before outputting torque. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
Autotuning not performed during vector control.
D Vector control is not effective without autotuning. Perform autotuning for motor unit separately.
9.2.5 If the Motor Does Not Operate According to Reference
J
The motor runs faster than reference.
1. The frequency reference bias setting is wrong (the gain setting is wrong).
D The frequency reference bias set in constant H3-03 is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
2. Frequency bias is set for multi-function analog inputs.
D When “2” (frequency bias) is set for multi-function analog inputs H3-05 and H3-09, a frequency corresponding to the input voltage (current) is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable.
3. A signal is being input to the frequency reference (current) terminal 14.
D When “1F” (frequency reference) is set for constant H3-09 (multi-function analog input terminal 14), a frequency corresponding to the terminal 14 input voltage (current) is added to the frequency reference.
Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable.
9.2.6 If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision
D The slip compensation limit has been reached. With the slip compensation function, compensation cannot be carried out beyond the slip compensation limit set in constant C3-03. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
9.2.7 If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in Open-loop
Vector Control Mode
D
D
The motor’s rated voltage is high.
The Inverter’s maximum output voltage is determined by its input voltage. (For example, if 200 VAC is input, then the maximum output voltage will be 200 VAC.) If, as a result of vector control, the output voltage reference value exceeds the Inverter output voltage maximum value, the speed control accuracy will decrease. Either use a motor with a low rated voltage (i.e., a special motor for use with vector control) or change to flux vector control.
9
- 11
9
Troubleshooting
9.2.8 If Motor Deceleration is Slow
9.2.8 If Motor Deceleration is Slow
J
The deceleration time is long even when control resistance is connected.
J
1. “Stall prevention during deceleration enabled” is set.
D When control resistance is connected, set constant L3-04 (stall prevention selection during deceleration) to “0” (disabled) or “3” (deceleration stall prevention with braking resistor). When this constant is set to
“1” (enabled, the factory-set default), control resistance is not used.
2. The deceleration time setting is too long.
D Check the deceleration time setting (constants C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08).
3. Motor torque is insufficient.
D If the constants are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, then the motor’s power is limited. Consider increasing the motor capacity.
4. The torque limit has been reached.
D
D
When a torque limit has been set in constants L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that limit.
This can cause the deceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suitable.
If the torque limit has been set by multi-function analog inputs H3-05 and H3-09 (set value: 10 to 13), check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable.
If the Vertical-axis Load Drops When Brake is Applied
D
D
D
D
The sequence is incorrect.
The Inverter goes into DC injection braking status for 0.5 seconds after deceleration is completed. (This is the factory-set default.)
To ensure that the brake holds, set frequency detection 2 (H2-01 = 5) for the multi-function contact output terminals (9-10) so that the contacts will OPEN when the output frequency is greater than L4-01 (3.0 to
5.0 Hz). (The contacts will close below L4-01.)
There is hysteresis in frequency detection 2 (L4-02 2.0 Hz) . Change the setting to approximately
0.5 Hz if there are drops during stop. Do not use the “running” signal (H2-01 = 0) for the brake ON/OFF signal.
9.2.9 If the Motor Overheats
J
The load is too big.
J
D If the motor load is too heavy and the motor is used with the effective torque exceeding the motor’s rated torque, the motor will overheat. Some motor rating are given for short period performance and are not continuous ratings. Reduce the load amount by either lightening the load or lengthening the acceleration/ deceleration time. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
The ambient temperature is too high.
J
J
D The motor rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will burn out if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating temperature is exceeded. Lower the motor’s ambient temperature to within the acceptable ambient operating temperature range.
The withstand voltage between the motor phases is insufficient.
D When the motor is connected to the Inverter output, a surge is generated between the Inverter switching and the motor coil. Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the Inverter’s input power supply voltage (i.e., 1,200 V for 400 V class). Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor phases that is greater than the maximum surge voltage. In particular, when using a 400 V class Inverter, use a special motor for Inverters.
Autotuning not performed during vector control.
D Vector control is not effective without autotuning. Perform autotuning for motor unit separately.
9.2.10 If There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio
D x x x x
If noise is generated by Inverter switching, implement the following countermeasures: x Lower the Inverter’s carrier frequency (constant C6-01). This will help to some extent by reducing the amount of internal switching.
Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter’s power supply input area.
Install an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter’s power supply output area.
Use metal tubing. Electric waves can be shielded by metal, so encase the Inverter with metal (steel).
Ground the Inverter and motor.
x Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring.
9.2.11 If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run
D The Inverter performs internal switching, so there is a certain amount of leakage current. This may cause the ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit, with an operating time of 0.1 s or more), or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures (i.e., one designed
- 12
9.2Troubleshooting
for use with Inverters). It will also help to some extent to lower the Inverter’s carrier frequency (constant
C6-01).
In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.
9.2.12 If There is Mechanical Oscillation
J
The machinery is making unusual sounds.
J
1. There may be resonance between the mechanical system’s characteristic frequency and the carrier frequency.
D If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery is oscillating with a high-pitched whine, it may indicate that this is occurring. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with constants C6-01 to C6-03.
2. There may be resonance between a machine’s characteristic frequency and the output frequency of the Inverter.
D To prevent this from occurring, either use the jump frequency functions in constants d3-01 to d3-04 or install rubber padding on the motor base to reduce oscillation.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with open-loop vector control.
J
D
D
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting constants
C4-02 (torque compensation time constant), C8-08 (AFR gain), and C3-02 (slip compensation primary delay time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting.
Vector control is not effective without autotuning. Perform autotuning for motor unit separately.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with flux vector control.
J
D
D
D
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Adjust the various types of speed control loop (ASR) gain. (For details, refer to page - 34.)
If the mechanical system’s resonance point coincides with the Inverter’s operating frequency and the oscillation cannot be eliminated in this way, increase the ASR primary delay time (constant C5-06) and then try adjusting the gain again.
Vector control is not effective without autotuning. Perform autotuning for motor unit separately.
Autotuning not performed during vector control.
D Vector control is not effective without autotuning. Perform autotuning for motor unit separately, or set control method selection (A1--02) to V/f control.
9.2.13 If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped
D The DC injection braking is insufficient. If the motor continues operating at low speed, without completely stopping, and after a deceleration stop has been executed, it means that the DC injection braking is not decelerating enough. Adjust the DC injection braking as follows: x Increase the constant b2-02 (DC injection braking current) setting.
x Increase the constant b2-04 (DC injection braking time at stop) setting.
9.2.14 If 0 V is Detected When the Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls
D
D
Generation of 0 V and stalling can occur if the fan is turning when it is started. The DC injection braking is insufficient when starting.
This can be prevented by slowing fan rotation by DC injection braking before starting the fan. Increase the constant b2-03 (DC injection braking time at start) setting.
9
- 13
9
Troubleshooting
9.2.15 If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference
9.2.15 If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference
J
The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range.
J
D
D
When the jump frequency function is used, the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency range.
Check to be sure that the jump frequency (constants d3-01 to d3-03) and jump frequency width (constant d3-04) settings are suitable.
The frequency reference upper limit has been reached.
D
D
The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula:
Maximum output frequency (E1-04) u
Frequency reference upper limit (d2-01) / 100
Check to be sure that the constant E1-04 and d2-01 settings are suitable.
9.2.16 Winding change error has occurred
J
T he motor does not perform winding change.
J
D
D
D
D
D
D
Magnetic contactor excitation is not performed properly. Check power supply to magnetic contactor.
Magnetic contactor is wired incorrectly. Check the wiring and correct the cause.
Magnetic contactor is not working. Replace the magnetic contactor with a new one.
The winding change signals are not received properly (When winding change is selected. ) Check the constant settings.
Winding change frequency (P1-01) and winding change hysteresis (P1-02) are not set properly. Adjust the constant settings.
Max. output frequency (E1-04) and Motor 2 max. output frequency are not set properly. Adjust the settings.
C licking sound from magnetic contactor
J
D One of the following constants is not set properly : Min. baseblock time (L2--03) , Voltage recovery time
(L2-04), Speed search deceleration time (b3--03), or Acceleration time (C1--01). Check the constants and adjust the settings.
OV (Overvoltage) is detected during winding change.
J
D Voltage recovery time (L2-04) is set too low. Verify the setting.
O C (Overcurrent) is detected during winding change.
D Either Min. baseblock time (L2-03) or Voltage recovery time (L2-04) is set too low. Verify the settings.
- 14
10
Maintenance and Inspection
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the
VS-626MC5.
10.1 Maintenance and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.1 Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.2 Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.3 Periodic Maintenance of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 3
10 3
10 3
10 3
10
- 1
10
Maintenance and Inspection
WARNING
D Do not touch the Inverter terminals. Some of the terminals carry high voltages and are extremely dangerous.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
D Always have the protective cover in place when power is being supplied to the Inverter. When attaching the cover, always turn OFF power to the Inverter through the MCCB.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
D After turning OFF the main circuit power supply, wait until the CHARGE indicator light goes out before performance maintenance or inspections.
The capacitor will remain charged and is dangerous.
D Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel. Remove all metal objects, such as watches and rings, before starting work. Always use grounded tools.
Failure to heed these warning can result in electric shock.
CAUTION
D A CMOS IC is used in the control board. Handle the control board and CMOS IC carefully. The
CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly.
The CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly .
D Do not change the wiring, or remove connectors or the Digital Operator, during operation.
Doing so can result in personal injury.
- 2
10.1 Maintenance and Inspection
The maintenance period of the Inverter is as follows:
Maintenance Period: Within 18 months of shipping from the factory or within 12 months of being delivered to the final user, whichever comes first.
10.1.1 Daily Inspection
Check the following items with the system in operation.
D
D
D
D
The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.
There should be no abnormal heat generation.
The ambient temperature should not be too high.
The output current value shown on the monitor display should not be higher than normal.
D The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally.
10.1.2 Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
Always turn OFF the power supply before beginning inspection. Confirm that the LED indicators on the front cover have all turned OFF, and then wait until at least one minute (or at least three minutes for Inverters of 30 kW or more) has elapsed before beginning the inspection. Be sure not to touch terminals right after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in electric shock.
Table
10.1
Item
External terminals,
Periodic Inspections
Inspection
Are all screws and bolts tight?
Corrective Procedure
Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
nectors, etc.
Cooling fins
PCBs
Are connectors tight?
Are the fins dirty or dusty?
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the PCBs?
Reconnect the loose connectors.
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of
39.2 10 4 to 58.8 10 4 Pa (4 to 6 kg cm
2
).
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of
39.2 10 4 to 58.8 10 4 Pa (4 to 6 kg cm
2
).
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Cooling fan
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or has the total operating time exceeded
20,000 hours?
Replace the cooling fan.
Power elements
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the elements?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of
39.2 10
4 to 58.8 10
4
Pa (4 to 6 kg cm
2
).
Smoothing capacitor
Are there any irregularities, such as discoloration or odor?
Replace the capacitor or Inverter.
10.1.3 Periodic Maintenance of Parts
The Inverter is configured of many parts, and these parts must be operating properly in order to make full use of the Inverter functions.
Among the electronic components, there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage conditions. In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, it is necessary to perform period inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
Periodic inspection standards vary depending the Inverter’s installation environment and usage conditions.
The Inverter’s maintenance periods are noted below. Keep them as reference.
Table
10.2
Part
Cooling fan
Smoothing capacitor
Breaker relays
Fuses
Aluminum capacitors on
PCBs
Part Replacement Guidelines
Standard Replacement Period
2 to 3 years
5 years
10 years
5 years
Replacement Method
Replace with new part.
Replace with new part. (Determine need by inspection.)
Determine need by inspection.
Replace with new part.
Replace with new board. (Determine need by inspection.)
Note Usage conditions are as follows:
Ambient temperature: Yearly average of 30 q C
Load factor: 80% max.
Operating rate: 12 hours max. per day
10
- 3
11
Specifications
This chapter describes the basic specifications of the VS-626MC5 and specifications for options and peripheral devices.
11.1 Standard Inverter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2 Specifications of Options and Peripheral
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 2
11 6
11
- 1
Specifications
11
11.1 Standard Inverter Specifications
Model number
CIMR-MC5A
Max. applicable motor output (kW)
Rated output capacity (kVA)
Rated output current
(A)
Max. output voltage
(V)
Rated output frequency (Hz)
Voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
Po
Allowable voltage fluctuation
Allowable frequency fluctuation
Control method
Torque characteristics
Speed control range
Speed control accuracy
Speed control response
Torque limits
Torque accuracy
Frequency control range
Frequency accuracy teristics)
Table
11.1
200 V Class Inverters
20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037 2045 2055 2075
0.4
1.2
3.2
0.75
2.3
6
1.5
3.0
8
2.2
4.2
11
3.7
6.7
17.5
5.5
9.5
25
7.5
13
33
11
19
49
3-phase, 200 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
+10%, --15%
5%
15
24
64
18.5
30
80
Sine wave PWM
150% at 1 Hz (150% at 0 r/min with PG).
2
1: 100 (1: 1000 with PG)
*2
0.2% ( r 0.02% with PG) *2
22
37
96
3-phase, 200 to 230 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
Up to 400 Hz (available by programming)
30
50
130
37
61
160
45
70
183
55
85
224
75
110
300 resolution
Output frequency resolution
Overload capacity
Frequency setting signal
Acceleration/Deceleration time
Braking torque
Motor protection
Instantaneous overcurrent protection
Fuse blown protection
Overload protection
Overvoltage protection
Pr
Undervoltage protection
Momentary power loss ridethru
Cooling fin overheating
Stall prevention
Grounding protection
Charge indicator (internal LED)
5 Hz (30 Hz with PG)
*2
Provided (4 quadrant steps can be changed by Ccnstant settings.)
5%
0.1 to 400 Hz
Digital references: 0.01% (--10 to +40 )
Analog references: 0.1% (25 10 )
Digital references: 0.01 Hz
Analog references: 0.03 Hz/60 Hz (11 bits + sign)
0.001 Hz
150% of rated current for one minute
--10 to 10 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA
0.01 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
Approximately 20%
Protection by electronic thermal overload relay.
Stops at approx. 200% of rated output current.
Stops for fuse blown.
Stops in one minute at approx. 150% of rated output current.
Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approx. 410 V.
Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approx. 190 V.
Stops for 15 ms or more. By selecting the momentary power loss mode, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s.
Protection by thermistor.
Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, or running.
Protection by electronic circuits. (Overcurrent level)
Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more.
- 2
Model number
CIMR-MC5A
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
En Storage temperature
Application site
Altitude
Vibration
20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7 25P5
--10 q
27P5 to 40
10 q q
2011 2015
C (Enclosed wall-mounted type) to 45 q C (Open chassis type)
90 % RH max.
2018 2022 2030
--20 to +60
Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
1000 m max.
10 to 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s 2 (1G) max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s 2 (0.2G) max
2037
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and
Inverter, be sure that the Inverter’s rated current is applicable for the motor’s rated current.
* 2. Tuning is sometimes required.
2045 2055 2075
- 3
11
Specifications
11
Table
11.2
400 V Class Inverters
Frequency setting resolution
Output frequency resolution
Overload capacity
Frequency setting signal
Acceleration/Deceleration time
Braking torque
Motor protection
Instantaneous overcurrent protection
Fuse blown protections
Overload protection
Overvoltage protection
Pr
Undervoltage protection
Momentary power loss ridethru
Cooling fin overheating
Stall prevention
Grounding protection
Charge indicator (internal LED)
Model number
CIMR-MC5A
Max. applicable motor output (kW)
Rated output capacity (kVA)
Rated output current
(A)
Max. output voltage
(V)
Rated output frequency (Hz)
Voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
Po
Allowable voltage fluctuation
Allowable frequency fluctuation
Control method
Torque characteristics
Speed control range
Speed control accuracy
Speed control response
Torque limits
Torque accracy
Frequency control range
Co Frequency accuracy
(temperature characteristics)
40P4
0.4
1.4
1.8
40P7
0.75
2.6
3.4
41P5
1.5
3.7
4.8
42P2
2.2
4.7
6.2
43P7
3.7
6.1
8
45P5
5.5
11
14
47P5
7.5
14
18
4011
11
21
27
4015
15
26
34
3-phase, 380 to 460 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
5 Hz (30 Hz with PG)*
4018
18.5
2
Provided (4 quadrant steps can be changed by constant settings.)
5%
0.1 to 400 Hz
Digital references: 0.01% (--10 to +40 )
Analog references: 0.1% (25
Digital references: 0.01 Hz
10 )
Analog references: 0.03 Hz/60 Hz (11 bits + sign)
0.001 Hz
150% of rated current for one minute
--10 to 10 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA
Stops for fuse burnout.
31
41
2
4022
22
37
48
Up to 400 Hz (available by programming.)
3-phase, 380 to 460 VAC, 50/60 Hz
+10%, --15%
5%
Sine wave PWM
150% at 1 Hz (150% at 0 r/min with PG).
1: 100 (1: 1000 with PG)* 2
0.2% ( 0.02% with PG)*
4030
30
50
65
0.01 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
Approximately 20%
Protection by electronic thermal overload rerlay.
Stops at approx. 200% of rated output current.
Stops in one minute at approx. 150% of rated output current.
Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approx. 820 V.
Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approx. 380 V.
Protection by thermistor.
Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, or running.
Protection by electronic circuits. (Overcurrent level)
Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more.
4037
37
61
80
4045
45
73
96
4055
55
98
128
4075
75
130
165
Stops for 15 ms or more. By selecting the momentary power loss mode, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s.
- 4
Model number
CIMR-MC5A
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
En Storage temperature
Application site
Altitude
Vibration
40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P7 45P5 47P5 4011 4015
--10 to 40 (Enclosed wall-mounted type)
--10 to 45 (Open chassis type)
90% RH max.
4018 4022 4030
--20 to +60
Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
1000 m max.
10 to 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s 2 {1G} max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s 2 {0.2G} max
4037
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and
Inverter, be sure that the Inverter’s rated current is applicable for the motor’s rated current.
* 2. Tuning is sometimes required.
4045 4055 4075
- 5
11
Specifications
11
11.2 Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
Purpose
Protect Inverter wiring
Name
MCCB or Ground
Fault Interrupter
Prevents burning when a
Braking Resistor is used.
Contains switching surge
Isolates I/O signals
Improve the input power factor of the Inverter
Magnetic Contactor
Surge Absorber
Isolator
DC Reactor
AC Reactor
Enable stop ping the machine in a set
Inverter externally
Braking Unit frequencies
Digital Operator
Connection Cable
Controls an Inverter system
Provides Inverter momentary power loss recovery time
VS System Module
Momentary Power
Loss Recovery Unit
Frequency Meter
Frequency Setter
Frequency Setter
Knob
The following options and peripheral devices can be used for the VS-626MC5. Select them according to the application.
Table
11.3
Model (Code)
NF *1
Options and Peripheral Devices
Descriptions
Always connect a breaker to the power supply line to protect Inverter wiring. Use a ground fault interrupter suitable for high frequencies.
Power supply
Reduce the affects of radio and control device noise
Input Noise Filter
Output Noise Filter
Braking Resistor
Braking Resistor
Unit
VS Operator * 2
(small plastic Operator)
VS Operator
(Standard steelplate Operator)
Output Voltmeter
HI- E
DCR2-
DGP
UZDA-
UZBA-
Single-phase: LNFB-
3-phase: LNFD- HF
LF-
ERF-150WJ
(R00 )
LKEB-
(75600-K
CDBR-
(72600-R
0)
0)
JVOP-95
(73041-0905X- )
JVOP-96
(73041-0906X- )
1 m cable: (72616-W5001)
3 m cable: (72616-W5003)
JGSM-
P00 0
(73600-P00 0)
DCF-6A
RV30YN20S (2 k )
CM-3S
SCF-12NH
Install to prevent the braking resistor from burning out when one is used. Always attach a surge absorber to the coil.
Absorbs surge from the magnetic contactor and control relays. Connect surge absorbers to all magnetic contactors and relays near the Inverter.
Isolates the I/O signals of the Inverter and is effective against inductive noise.
Used to improve the input power factor of the Inverter. All
VS-626MC5 Inverters of 18.5 kW or higher contain built-in
DC reactors. These are optional for Inverters of 15 kW or less. Install DC and AC reactors for applications with a large power supply capacity (600 kVA or higher).
Reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power supply line and to reduce noise flowing from the inverter into the power supply line. Connect as close to the Inverter as possible.
Reduces noise generated by the Inverter. Connect as close to the Inverter as possible.
Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to reduce deceleration time (use rate: 3% ED).
Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to reduce deceleration time (use rate: 10% ED).
Used with a Braking Resistor Unit to reduce the deceleration time of the motor.
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation control to be performed by analog references from a remote location (50 m max.).
Frequency counter specifications: 60/120 Hz, 90/180Hz
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation control to be performed by analog references from a remote location (50 m max.).
Frequency counter specifications: 75 Hz, 150 Hz, 220 Hz
Extension cable to use a Digital Operator remotely.
Cable length: 1 m or 3 m
A system controller that can be match to the automatic control system to produce an optimum system configuration.
Handles momentary power losses for the control power supply (maintains power for 2 s).
Measures the output voltage externally and designed for use with a PWM Inverter.
MCCB or ground fault interrupter
Magnetic contactor
AC reactor to improve power factor
Input-line noise filter
VS-626MC5
Ground
Output-line noise filter
Magnetic contactor
626MC5
Braking resistor
DC reactor to improve power factor
Correct frequency reference input, fre quency meter, ammeter scales
Performs winding change
Variable Resistor
Board for Frequency Reference
Frequency Meter
Scale Correction
Resistor
Magnetic contactor for winding selection
2 k : (ETX003270)
20 k: (ETX003120)
RH000850
HV-75AP3
HV-150AP3
Connected to the control circuit terminals to input a frequency reference.
Calibrates the scale of frequency meters and ammeters.
Install to perform winding change.
Motor
* 1. Use a ground fault interrupter with a current sensitivity of 200 mA minimum and an operating time of 0.1 s minimum to prevent operating errors. The interrupter must be suitable for high-frequency operation.
* 2. The suffixes of the model and code numbers of VS Operators indicate frequency meters are shown in the following table.
Model No.
Code No.
Frequency Meter Specifications
JVOP-95 1
JVOP-95 2
JVOP-96 1
73041-0905X-01
73041-0905X-02
73041-0906X-01
TRM-45 3 V 1 mA 60/120 Hz
TRM-45 3 V 1 mA 90/180 Hz
DCF-6A 3 V 1 mA 75 Hz
Ground
- 6
Model No.
JVOP-96 2
JVOP-96 3
Code No.
73041-0906X-02
73041-0906X-03
Frequency Meter Specifications
DCF-6A 3 V 1 mA 150 Hz
DCF-6A 3 V 1 mA 220 Hz
Type
Sp
Name
The following Option Cards are available.
Analog Reference Card
AI-14U
Analog Reference Card
AI-14B
Table
11.4
Code No.
73600-C001X
73600-C002X
Option Cards
Descriptions
Used to set high-accuracy, high-resolution analog speed references.
S Input signal levels: 0 to +10 VDC 20 k 1 channel
4 to 20 mA DC 250 1 channel
S Input resolution: 14 bits 1/16384
Used to set high-accuracy, high-resolution analog speed references.
S Input signal level: 0 to 10 VDC 20 k
4 to 20 mA DC 500 3 channels
S Input resolution: 13 bits + sign 1/8192
Digital Reference Card
DI-08
Digital Reference Card
DI-16H2
73600-C003X
73600-C016X
Used to set frequency references in 2-digit BCD or 8-bit binary.
S Input signal: 8 bits binary
2 digits BCD + SIGN signal + SET signal
S Input voltage: +24 V insulated
S Input current: 8 mA
Used to set 16-bit digital speed references.
S Input signal: 16 bits binary
4 digits BCD + SIGN signal + SET signal
S Input voltage: +24 V insulated
S Input current: 8 mA
Used to set frequency references with 16 or 12 bits (switchable).
RS-232C/485/422 Interface
Card
SI-K2
73600-C015X
Used to convert RS-232C to RS-485 or RS-422.
Supports baud rates up to 9.6 kbps.
Analog Monitor Card
AO-08
Analog Monitor Card
AO-12
Pulse Monitor Card
PO-36F
Digital Output Card
DO-08
2C-Relay Output Card
DO-02C
73600-D001X
73600-D002X
73600-D003X
73600-D004X
73600-D007X
Manual No.
TOE-C736-
30.13
TOE-C736-
30.14
TOE-C736-
30.15
TOE-C736-40.7
TOE-C736-40.6
Converts analog signals to monitor the Inverter’s output status
(output frequency, output current, etc.) to absolute values and outputs them.
S Output resolution: 8 bits 1/256
S Output voltage: 0 to +10 V not insulated
S Output channels: 2 channels
Output analog signals to monitor the Inverter’s output status (output frequency, output current, etc.).
S Output resolution: 11 bits 1/2048 + sign
S Output voltage: 10 to +10 V not insulated
S Output channels: 2 channels
TOE-C736-
30.21
TOE-C736-
30.22
Used to output pulse-train signals according to the output frequency of the Inverter
S Output pulse: 1F, 6F, 10F, 12F, 36F F: Output frequency
S Output voltage: +12 V 10% insulated
S Output current: 20 mA max.
TOE-C736-
30.23
Outputs isolated digital signals to monitor the Inverters operating status (alarm signals, zero speed detection, etc.)
S Output form: Photocoupler output, 6 channels
48 V 50 mA max.
Relay contact outputs, 2 channels
250 VAC: 1 A max., DC 30V: 1 A max.
Provides two multi-function outputs (DPDT relay contacts) in addition to those provided by the Inverter.
TOE-C736-
30.24
TOE-C736-40.8
11
- 7
Specifications
Type
B
P
Name
PG-B2
PG-X2
Table 11.4
Code No.
73600-A013X
73600-A015X
Synchronous Phase Control
Card
SP-A2
73600-A016X
Optional Cards (Continued)
Descriptions
S Used for flux vector control.
S A-, B-phase input (complimentary input)
S Maximum input frequency: 32767 Hz
S Pulse monitor output: Open-collector
(PG power supply output: +12 V, 200 mA max.)
Used for flux vector control.
S A-, B-, Z-phase pulse (differential pulse) input
S Maximum input frequency: 300 kHz
S Input: Conforms to RS-422
S Pulse monitor output: RS-422
(PG power supply output: +5 or +12 V, 200 mA max.)
Connector to Inverter to enable synchronized startup control with the motor. An external voltage detection transformer
(CPT005845) is required.
Manual No.
TOE-C736-40.2
TOE-C736-40.4
TOE-C736-40.5
11
- 8
12
Appendix
This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter, motor, and peripheral devices and also provides lists of constants.
12.1 Inverter Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.1
Selection
12.1.2
Installation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.3
Settings
12.1.4
Handling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2 Motor Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.1
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor
12.2.2
Using the Inverter for Special Motors
. .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.3
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers,
Belts, and Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3 Peripheral Device Application Precautions . .
12.4 Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.1 Using a Braking Resistor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.2 Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit . . . . .
12.4.
3 Using Two Braking Units in Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.
4 Using Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel
12.4.
5 Using a JVOP-95j , -96j VS Operator
. . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
12.4.
6 Using an Open-collector Transistor for Operation
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.
7 Using Open-collector, Contact Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5 User Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 1 4
12 1 4
12 1 5
12 5
12 6
12 8
12 8
12 8
12 - 11
12 1 2
12 1 3
12 2
12 2
12 2
12 3
12 3
12 4
12 4
12 5
12
- 1
12
Appendix
12.1.1 Selection
12.1 Inverter Application Precautions
12.1.1 Selection
J
Installing Reactors
A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a phase capacitor. Excessive peak current can destroy the convertor section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor (optional) to improve the power supply power factor.
DC reactors are built into 200 V class Inverters of 18.5 to 75 kW and 400 V class Inverters of 18.5 to75 kW.
If a thyrister convertor, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or
AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.
Power supply capacity
(kVA)
4000
600
0
DC or AC reactor
Required
DC or AC reactor
Not required
60
Inverter capacity (kVA)
400
J
J
Inverter Capacity
When connecting special motors or multiple motors in parallel to an Inverter, select the Inverter capacity so that the rated output current of the Inverter is 1.1 times the sum of all the motor rated currents.
Initial Torque
The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted by the overload current ratings of the
Inverter that is driving the motor. The torque characteristics are generally less than those required when starting using a normal commercial power supply. If a large initial torque is required, select an Inverter with a somewhat larger capacity or increase the capacity of both the motor and the inverter.
Emergency Stop
J
Although the Inverter’s protective functions will stop operation when a fault occurs, the motor will not stop immediately. Always provide mechanical stop and protection mechanisms on equipment requiring an emergency stop.
J
Options
Terminals B1 B2 ©¨ 1 ¨ 2 ¨ 3 are for connecting only the options specifically provided by Yaskawa. Never connect any other devices to these terminals.
12.1.2 Installation
J
J
Installation in Enclosures
Either install the Inverter in a clean location not subject to oil mist, air-bourne matter, dust, and other contaminants, or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel space so that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not go beyond the allowable temperature. Do not install the Inverter on wood or other combustible materials.
Installation Direction
Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other horizontal surface.
- 2
12.1.3 Settings
J
J
Upper Limits
The Digital Operator can be used to set high-speed operation up to a maximum of 400 Hz. Incorrect settings can be dangerous. Use the maximum frequency setting functions to set upper limits. (The maximum output frequency is factory-set to 60 Hz.)
DC Injection Braking
The motor can overheat if the DC injection braking voltage or braking time is set to a large value.
J
Acceleration/Deceleration Times
The motor’s acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor, the load torque, and the load’s inertial moment (GD 2 /4). If the stall prevention functions are activated during acceleration or deceleration, increase the acceleration or deceleration time. The stall prevention functions will increase the acceleration or deceleration time by the amount of time the stall prevention function is active.
To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times, increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter.
12.1.4 Handling
J
Wiring Check
J
The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U, V, or W.
Check wring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and sequences carefully.
Magnetic Contactor Installation
J
J
Do not start and stop operation frequently with a magnetic contactor installed on the power supply line. Doing so can cause the Inverter to malfunction.
Inspections
The internal capacitors in the Inverter require time to discharge after the power supply is turned OFF. Do not start inspections until the CHARGE indicator goes out.
Wiring UL/C-UL Inverters
Always use closed-loop connectors when wiring Inverters that meet UL or C-UL standards. Always use the crimp tool specified by the manufacturer of the closed-loop connectors.
12
- 3
12
Appendix
12.2.1 Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor
12.2 Motor Application Precautions
12.2.1 Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor
When a standard motor is operated with the Inverter, power loss is slightly higher than when operated with a commercial power supply. In addition, cooling effects also diminish in the low-speed range, resulting in an increase in the motor temperature. Therefore, the motor torque should be reduced in the low-speed range.
The following graph shows the allowable load characteristics of a standard motor.
If 100% torque is continuously required in the low-speed range, use a special motor for use with inverters.
Torque
(%)
100
82
70
60
50
25% ED (or 15 minutes)
40% ED (or 20 minutes)
60% ED (or 40 minutes)
Continuous
0
3 6 20 60
Frequency (Hz)
If the input voltage is high (440 V or higher) or the wiring distance is long, the motor insulation voltage must be considered. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
J
High-speed Operation
J
When using the motor at a high speed (60 Hz or more), problems may arise in dynamic balance and bearing durability. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
Torque Characteristics
J
The motor may require more acceleration torque when the motor is operated with the Inverter than when operated with a commercial power supply. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the motor to set a proper V/f pattern.
Vibration
The Inverter uses a high carrier PWM to reduce motor vibration. When the motor is operated with the Inverter, motor vibration is almost the same as when operated with a commercial power supply.
Motor vibration may, however, become greater in the following cases.
Resonance with the Natural Frequency of the Mechanical System
Take special care when a machine that has been operated at a constant speed is to be operated in variable speed mode.
If resonance occurs, install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base or use the frequency jump function to skip any frequency resonating the machine.
J
Imbalanced Rotor
Take special care when the motor is operated at a higher speed (60 Hz or more).
Noise
Noise is almost the same as when the motor is operated with a commercial power supply. Motor noise, however, becomes louder when the motor is operated at a speed higher than the rated speed (60 Hz).
- 4
12.2.2 Using the Inverter for Special Motors
J
J
Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select, therefore, an appropriate Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor to be used.
Before changing the number of poles, always make sure that the motor has stopped. Otherwise, the overvoltage protective or overcurrent protective mechanism will be actuated, resulting in an error.
Submersible Motor
J
J
The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors. Therefore, always select an Inverter by checking its rated output current.
When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long, use a cable thick enough to connect the motor and
Inverter to prevent motor torque reduction.
Explosion-proof Motor
When an explosion-proof motor or increased safety-type motor is to be used, it must be subject to an explosion-proof test in conjunction with the Inverter. This is also applicable when an existing explosion-proof motor is to be operated with the Inverter.
Since the Inverter itself is, however, not explosion-proof, always install it in a safe place.
Gearmotor
J
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer. In particular, continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in burning.
If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 60 Hz, consult with the manufacturer.
Synchronous Motor
A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control.
If a group of synchronous motors is individually turned ON and OFF, synchronism may be lost.
J
Single-phase Motor
Do not use an Inverter for a single-phase motor. The motor should be replaced with a 3-phase motor.
12.2.3 Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains)
If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission mechanism will make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at a speed higher than 60 Hz.
12
- 5
12
Appendix
12.3 Peripheral Device Application Precautions
J
J
J
J
J
J
Selecting and Installing Wiring Breakers
Install a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) on the power supply line to the Inverter to protect the wiring.
Select the MCCB according to the Inverter’s power supply power factor (which changes with the supply voltage, output frequency, and load) . Contact your Yaskawa representative for selection standards. Operating characteristics of completely magnetic MCCBs change with high-frequency currents. Select a model with a large capacity. We recommend using only ground fault interrupters designed for inverters.
Using Magnetic Contactors on the Power Supply Line
The Inverter can be used without a magnetic contactor on the power supply line. Although a magnetic contactor can be installed to protect from accidents that can occur by automatic recovery following power losses during remote operation, do not start and stop operation frequently with a magnetic contactor installed on the power supply line. Doing so can cause the Inverter to malfunction. The motor will not be automatically restarted after power recovery during Digital Operator operation, and starting via a magnetic contactor is thus not possible.
Although operation can be stopped using a magnetic contactor in the power supply line, the regenerative control of the Inverter will not operate and a coast to a stop will occur. If a Braking Unit or Braking Resistor Unit is used, wire a sequence that turns OFF the magnetic contactor with the thermal protector contact of the Braking Resistor Unit.
Using Magnetic Contactors on the Motor Line
As a rule, so not install a magnetic contactor between the Inverter and motor to turn the motor ON and OFF during operation. Supplying power to the motor while the Inverter is operating will cause a large surge current to flow, and the Inverter’s overcurrent protection function will operate. If a magnetic contactor is installed to switch to a commercial power supply, switch the lines only after stopping both the Inverter and the motor. Use the speed search function is switching is required while the motor shaft is rotating.
If a magnetic contactor is required for momentary power losses, use a contactor with delayed operation.
Installing Thermal Overload Relays
The Inverter has a protection function using an electronic thermal to protect the motor from overheating.
However, if more than one motor is operated from one Inverter or if a multi-pole motor is operated, install thermal overload relays or thermal protectors between the Inverter and motors. Set the constant L1-01 to “1” and set the heat-operating thermal overload relay or thermal protector to 1.0 times the value on the motor nameplate at 50 Hz or 1.1 times the value at 60 Hz.
Improving the Power Factor (Eliminating Phase Advancing Capacitors)
Install a DC or AC reactor on the power supply line to the Inverter to improve the power factor. (200 V class
Inverters of 18.5 to 75kW and 400 V class Inverters of 18.5 to 160kW have built-in DC reactors.)
Capacitors or surge suppressors on the output line from the Inverter can overheat or be destroyed by the highfrequency component of the Inverter’s output. They can also cause overcurrents to flow to the Inverter, causing the overcurrent protection function to activate. Do not install capacitors or surge suppressors in the output line.
Electromagnetic Interference
The Inverter’s I/O circuits (main circuits) contain a high-frequency component, which may adversely affect communications devices (e.g., AM radios) located nearby. This interference can be reduced by installing noise filters, or you can install the wiring between the Inverter and motor and the power supply wiring in a metal duct and ground the duct.
- 6
J
Wire Sizes and Distances
Motor torque will be reduced by voltage drop along the cable if the distance between the Inverter and the motor is too long. This is particularly noticeable for low-frequency outputs. Use wires of sufficient size.
Always use the optional extension cables when operating the Digital Operator separated from the Inverter.
For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Analog Operator or operation signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less, and separate the lines from high-power lines (main circuits or relay sequence circuits) to reduce induction from peripheral devices.
When setting frequencies from an external frequency setter (and not from a Digital Operator), used shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to terminal 12, as shown in the following diagram.
12 Shield terminal
2 k
External frequency reference
2k
3 0 to +10 V
1
2
4 to 20 mA
P
0 to +10 V
P
0 V
P
15
13
Speed setting power supply
+15 V 20 mA
Master speed reference
0 to 10 V (20 k )
14 Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250 )
16
17
Multi-function analog input
0 to 10 V (20 k )
0 V
- 7
12
12
Appendix
12.4.1 Using a Braking Resistor Unit
12.4 Wiring Examples
12.4.1 Using a Braking Resistor Unit
CIMR-MC5A20P4 to -MC5A27P5 (200 V class Inverters of 0.4 to 7.5 kW)
CIMR-MC5A40P4 to -MC5A4015 (400 V class Inverters of 0.4 to 15 kW)
A sequence is required to turn
OFF the power supply for the thermal overload relay trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit.
DC Reactor to improve input power factor
(Optional)
Braking Resistor overheating contacts
(Thermal overload relay trip contacts)
1 2
Braking Resistor Unit *3
*2 P B
Short-circuit bar
MCCB
3-phase power
200 to 230 V
50/60 Hz or
380 to 460 V
50/60 Hz
R
S
T
*1 400/200 V
M
C
¨ 1
R (L1)
S (L2)
T (L3)
¨ 2 © B1
VS-626MC5
B2
U (T1)
V (T2)
W (T3)
Motor
IM
THR
X
OFF
ON
MC
Overload relay trip contact of Braking Resistor Unit
1
MC
2
M
C
SA
THR
X
SA
TRX
SA
TRX
20 18
Fault contacts
* 1
(200 V class Inverters: Ground to 100 : max., 400 V class Inverters: Ground to 10 : max.)
A transformer is not required for 200 V class Inverters.
* 2 Remove the short-circuit bar (normally connected) from between terminals
¨ 1 and ¨ 2 when connecting a DC Reactor (Optional).
* 3 Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to “0” or “3” when using a Braking Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.
12.4.2 Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit
CIMR-MC5A2011 -MC5A2015 (200 V class Inverters of 11 kW 15 kW)
3-phase power
200 to 230 V
50/60 Hz
R
S
T
* 1
Remove the short-circuit bar (normally connected) from between terminals ¨ 1 and ¨ 2 when connecting a DC Reactor (Optional).
* 2 Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to “0” or “3” when using a Braking Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.
Forward run command
(forward run when closed)
Reverse run command
(reverse run when closed)
¨
Braking Unit
(Optional)
A sequence is required to turn
OFF the power supply for the thermal overload relay trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit.
DC Reactor to improve input power factor
(Optional)
*1
Short-circuit bar
MCCB
MC
¨ 1 ¨ 2 ¨ 3
R (L1)
S (L2)
T (L3)
VS-626MC5
©
U (T1)
V (T2)
W (T3)
Level
© detector
3
THRX OFF
ON
MC
MC
SA
Overload relay trip contact of Braking Resistor Unit
THRX
1 2
MC
SA
TRX
SA
TRX
20 18
Fault contacts
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
¨
0
©
0
P
B
1
Braking Resistor Unit
(Optional)
*2
4
Braking Resistor overheating contacts
(Thermal protector trip contacts)
Motor
IM
2
(Ground to 100 : max.)
External fault
Braking Unit
3 4
3
- 8
CIMR-MC5A2018 -MC5A2022 (200 V class Inverters of 18.5 kW 22 kW)
A sequence is required to turn
OFF the power supply for the thermal overload relay trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit.
Braking Unit
(Optional)
¨ ¨
0
©
0 B
P
Braking Resistor Unit
(Optional)
©
Level detector 1 2
Short-circuit bar
(standard)
3 4
Braking Resistor overheating contact
(Thermal protector trip contacts)
3-phase power
200 to 230 V
50/60 Hz
R
S
T
MCCB
MC
¨ 1 ¨ 2 ¨ 3
R
S r
T
Cooling fan
M
VS-626MC5
©
U
V
W
Motor
IM
THRX OFF
ON MC
MC
Overload relay trip contact of Braking Resistor Unit
SA
THRX
1 2
SA
MC
TRX
SA
TRX
20 18
Fault contacts
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
External fault
Braking Unit
3 4
1
2
Forward run command
(forward run when closed)
Reverse run command
(reverse run when closed)
3
(Ground to 100 : max.)
18
19
20
External contact output
Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to “0” or “3” when using a Braking Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.
12
- 9
12
Appendix
12.4.2 Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit
CIMR-MC5A4018 to -MC5A4045 (400 V class Inverters of 18.5 to 45 kW)
A sequence is required to turn
OFF the power supply for the thermal overload relay trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit.
Short-circuit bar
(Standard)
Braking Unit
(Optional)
¨
©
Level detector
¨ 0
©
0
Braking Resistor Unit
(Optional)
P
B
1 2
3 4
Braking Resistor overheating contact
(Thermal protector trip contacts)
MCCB
MC
R
3-phase power
380 to 460 V
50/60 Hz
S
T
400/200 V
THRX OFF ON
MC
Overload relay trip contact of Braking Resistor Unit
1 2
MC
SA
THRX
MC
SA
TRX
SA
TRX
20 18
Fault contacts
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
External fault
Braking Unit
3 4
¨ 1 ¨ 2 ¨ 3
R
S r
T
Cooling fan
Voltage setting
460/440/415/
400/380V
M
©
U
V
W
VS-626MC5
1
Forward run command
(forward run when closed)
2
Reverse run command
(reverse run when closed)
Motor
IM
(Ground to 10 : max.)
18
19
20
External contact output
3
Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to “0” or “3” when using a
Braking Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.
- 10
12.4.3 Using Two Braking Units in Parallel
R
3-phase power
200 to 230 V
50/60 Hz
S
T
A sequence is required to turn
OFF the power supply for the thermal overload relay trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit.
MCCB
MC
¨ 3
R
S r
T
VS-626MC5
Cooling fan
M
©
U
V
W
© ¨
Thermal protector
1
¨
0
B
2
Braking
P
©
Resistor Unit
0
© ¨
MASTER
Thermal protector
¨
1
0
B
MASTER
2
Braking
Resistor Unit
©
0
1
2
+15
5 1
P
6 2
SLAVE
Braking Unit 2
5
6
3 4
Thermal switch
3 4
Thermal switch
Motor
IM
THRX OFF
ON MC
MC
SA
Overload relay trip contact of
Braking Resistor Unit
THRX
1 2
SA
MC TRX
SA
TRX
20 18
Forward Run/Stop
Fault contacts
Reverse Run/Stop
External fault
Braking Unit
3 4
Forward run command
(forward run when closed)
Reverse run command
(reverse run when closed)
(Ground to 100 : max.)
18
19
20
External contact output
3
Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to “0” or “3” when using a
Braking Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.
12
- 11
12
Appendix
12.4.4 Using Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel
12.4.4 Using Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel
A sequence is required to turn
OFF the power supply for the thermal overload relay trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit.
MCCB
3-phase power
380 to 460 V
50/60 Hz
R
S
T
400/200V
THRX OFF ON
MC
MC
SA
Overload relay trip contact of
Braking Resistor Unit
THRX
1 2
MC
SA
TRX
SA
TRX
20 18
Fault contacts
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
Braking Unit
3 4
External fault
MC
¨ 3
R
S
VS-626MC5
T
Cooling fan r
Voltage setting
400
460/440/415/
400/380V
M
©
U
V
W
1
Thermal protector
1 2
P B
Braking
Resistor Unit
© ¨ ¨
0 ©
0
MASTER
Thermal protector
1 2
P B
Braking
Resistor Unit
Thermal protector
1 2
P B
Braking
Resistor Unit
SLAVE
Level
+15
5
Braking Unit
2
3 4
Thermal switch
6
Motor
IM
(Ground to 10 : max.)
1 Forward run command
(forward run when closed)
2
Reverse run command
(reverse run when closed)
3
18
19
20
External contact output
Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to “0” or “3” when using a Braking Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.
- 12
12.4.5 Using a JVOP-95-
j
, -96-
j
VS Operator
CIMR-MC5A27P5 (200 V class Inverters of 7.5 kW)
MCCB
R
3-phase power S
T
JVOP-95-96 VS Operator
FWD RUN STOP REV RUN
1
2
MASTER
RESET
AUX 5
4
Short-circuit bar
(Standard)
¨ 1
R (L1)
S (L2)
T (L3)
¨ 2 © B1 B2
VS-626MC5
U (T1)
V (T2)
W (T3)
11
SOURCE
RUN
FAULT
15
FREQ SET 13
17
9
10
18 P
P P
MTR CAL
Frequency meter
F1
FM
F3
E
P
Motor
IM
1
Forward run command
(forward run when closed)
2
Reverse run command
(reverse run when closed)
3
4
5
6
Multi-function contact inputs
7
8
11 Sequence common ( 0 V )
12 Shield terminal
15 Speed setting power ( 15 V , 20 mA )
13 Master speed reference
( 0 to 10 V , 20 k )
14
(
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA , 250 )
16 Multi-function analog input
17
( 0 to 10 V , 20 k )
0 V
33 Speed setting power (-15 V , 20 mA )
9
10
Multi-function contact output
(Default : Running signal)
18
19
20
Fault contact output
25
23 Multi-function analog output
21 Multi-function analog output (Default :
Output frequency)
22
26
27
(Ground to 100 : max.)
Open collector 1
(Default : Zero speed signal)
Open collector 2
(Default : Speed agree signal)
Multi-function output common
Multi-function open-collector output
48 V , 50 mA max.
12
- 13
12
Appendix
12.4.6 Using an Open-collector Transistor for Operation Signals
12.4.6 Using an Open-collector Transistor for Operation Signals
CIMR-MC5A27P5 (200 V class Inverters of 7.5 kW)
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
External fault
Fault reset
Factory presets
Multi-step Speed
Reference 1
Multi-step Speed
Reference 2
Jog Frequency
Reference
EXTERNAL BB command
6
7
1
Forward run command
(forward run when closed)
2 Reverse run command
(reverse run when closed)
3
4
5
Multi-function contact inputs
8
11
Sequence common
(Insulated from 0 V terminal)
12 Shield terminal
12.4.7 Using Open-collector, Contact Outputs
CIMR-MC5A27P5 (200 V class Inverters of 7.5 kW)
Sequencer
18
19
Fault contact output
250 V AC, 1 A max.
30 V DC, 1 A max.
20
9
Multi-function contact output
250 V AC, 1 A max.
30 V DC, 1 A max.
(Default : Running signal)
10
Surge absorber
250 VAC max
30 VDC max
Flywheel diode
25
48 VDC max
Flywheel diode
48 VDC max
Flywheel diode
26
27
Open collector 1
(Default : Zero speed)
48 V, 50 mA max.
Open collector 2
(Default : agree)
Speed
48 V , 50 mA max.
Multi-function output common
- 14
No.
A1-00
A1-01
A1-02
A1-03
A1-04
A1-05
12.5 User Constants
Factory settings are given for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW set to open loop vector control (A1-02 = 2).
Table
12.1
User Constants
Name
(Display)
Factory
Setting
Setting No.
Name
(Display)
Factory
Setting
Setting
1
1 b5--08 -- -4 0.00
Language selection for digital operator display
(Select Language)
Constant access level
(Access Level)
Control method selection
(Control Method)
Initialize
(Init Parameters)
Password 1
(Enter Password)
Password 2
(Select Password)
2
2
1
0
0
0 b6-01 b6-02 b6-03 b6-04 b7-01
-- --
-- -4
-- --
-- --
4
4
4
-- -4
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
A2-01 to
A2-32
User setting constant
(User Pram 1 to 32) b7-02 ---4 0.05
b1-01 b1-02 b1-03 b1-04 b1-05 b1-06 b1-07 b1-08 b2-01 b2-02 b2-03 b2-04 b3-01 b3-02 b3-03 b4-01 b4-02 b5-01 b5-02 b5-03 b5-04 b5-05 b5-06 b5-07
Reference selection
(Reference Source)
Operation method selection
(Run Source)
Stopping method selection
(Stopping Method)
Prohibition of reverse operation
(Reverse Oper)
Operation selection for setting of E1-09 or less
(Zero-Speed Oper)
Read sequence input twice
(Cntl Input Scans)
Operation after switching to remote mode *2
(LOC/REM RUN Sel)
Run command selection for PRG mode (RUN
CMD at PRG)
Zero speed level (DC injection braking start frequency)
(DCInj Start Rreq)
DC injection braking current
(DCinj Current)
DC injection braking time at start
(DCInj Time @ Start)
DC injection braking time at stop
(DCInj Time @ Stop)
Speed search selection at start
(SpdSrch at Start)
Speed search operating current
(SpdSrch Current)
Speed search deceleration time
(SpdSrch Dec Time)
Timer function ON-delay time
(Delay-ON Timer)
Timer function OFF-delay time
(Delay-OFF Timer)
-- -4
-- -4
-- -4
-- -4
-- -4
-- -4
-- -4
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0.5
50
0.00
0.50
0
3
100
3
2.0
0.0
0.0
0
1.00
1.0
100.0
0.00
100.0
0.0
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-05
C1-06
C1-07
C1-08
C1-09
C1-10
C1-11
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
C2-04
C3-01
C3-02
C3-03
C3-04
C3-05
C3--06
C4-01
C4-02
C4--03
Acceleration time 1
(Accel Time 1)
Deceleration time 1
(Decel Time 1)
Acceleration time 2
(Accel Time 2)
Deceleration time 2
(Decel Time 2)
Deceleration time 2
(Decel Time 2)
Acceleration time 3
(Accel Time 3)
Acceleration time 4
(Accel Time 4)
Deceleration time 4
(Decel Time 4)
Emergency stop time
(Fast Stop Time)
Accel/decel time setting unit
(Acc/Dec Units)
Accel/decel time switching frequency
(Acc/Dec SW Freq)
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
(SCrv Acc @ Start)
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
(SCrv Acc @ End)
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start
(SCrv Dec @ Srat)
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end
(SCrv Dec @ End)
Slip compensation gain
(Slip Comp Gain)
Slip compensation primary delay time
(Slip Comp Time)
Slip compensation limit
(Slip Comp Limit)
Slip compensation during regeneration
(Slip Comp Regen)
Flux calculation method
(Flux Select)
Output voltage limited operation selection
(Output V Limit)
Torque compensation gain
(Torq Comp Gain)
Torque compensation time constant
(Torq Comp Time)
Start torque compemsation (forward direction)
(F TorqCmp @ Start)
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
1
0.0
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.00
1.0
3
200
3
200
0V
0
0
1.00
20
3
0.0
* 1. Not initialized. (Japanese standard specifications: A1-01 = 1, A1-02 = 2)
* 2. Not displayed for some models depending on software version No.
* 3. Factory setting depends on the control method (A1-02).
* 4. Constants that cannot be used. (Do not change the settings) 12
- 15
12
Appendix
No.
C4--04
C4--05
C5-01
C5-02
C5-03
C5-04
C5-05
C5-06
C5-07
C5-0
8
C6-01
C7-01
C7-02
C8-08
C8-09
C8-30 d1-01 d1-02 d1-03 d1-04 d1-05 d1-06 d1-07 d1-08 d1-09 d2-01 d2-02 d3-01 d3-02 d3-03
Table 12.1
Name
(Display)
Start torque compensation (reverse direction)
(R TorqCmp @ Start)
Start torque time constant
(TorqCmp Delay T)
ASR proportional (P) gain 1
(ASR P Gain 1)
ASR integral (I) time 1
(ASR I Time 1)
ASR proportional (P) gain 2
(ASR P Gain 2)
ASR integral (I) time 2
(ASR I Time 2)
ASR limit
(ASR Limit)
ASR primary delay time
(ASR Delay Time)
ASR switching frequency
(ASR Gain SW Freq)
2 ASR integral (I) limit
(ASR I Limit)
Carrier frequency upper limit
(Carrier Freq Max)
Hunting prevention selection
(Hunt Prev Select)
Hunting prevention gain
(Hunt Prev Gain)
AFR gain
(AFR Gain)
Speed feedback detection control (AFR) time* 2
(AFR Time)
Carrier frequency during autotuning
(Carrier in tune)
2
Frequency reference 1
(Reference 1)
Frequency reference 2
(Reference 2)
Frequency reference 3
(Reference 3)
Frequency reference 4
(Reference 4)
Frequency reference 5
(Reference 5)
Frequency reference 6
(Reference 6)
Frequency reference 7
(Reference 7)
Frequency reference 8
(Reference 8)
Jog frequency reference
(Jog Reference)
Frequency reference upper limit
(Ref Upper Limit)
Frequency reference lower limit
(Ref Lower Limit)
Jump frequency 1
(Jump Freq 1)
Jump frequency 2
(Jump Freq 2)
Jump frequency 3
(Jump Freq 3)
Factory
Setting
0.0
10
20.00
1
0.500
1
20.00
1
0.500
1
5.0
0.004
0.0
400
15.0
3
1
1.00
1.00
50
2
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
6.00
100.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
User Constants (Continued)
Setting No.
d3-04
Name
(Display)
Jump frequency width
(Jump Bandwidth) d4-01 -- -4 d4-02
E1-01
E1-02
E1-03
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E1-11
E1-12
E1-13
E2-01
E2-02
E2-03
E2-04
E2-05
E2-06
E2-07
E2-08
E2-09
E3-01
E4-01
E4-02
E4-03
E4-04
-- -4
Input voltage setting
(Input Voltage)
Motor selection
(Motor Selection)
V/f pattern selection
(V/F Selection)
Max. output frequency
(Max Frequency)
Max. voltage
(Max Voltage)
Base frequency
(Base Frequency)
Mid. output frequency
(Mid. Frequency A)
Mid. output frequency voltage
(Mid Voltage A)
Min. output frequency
(Min Frequency)
Min. output frequency voltage
(Min Voltage)
Mid. output frequency 2
(Mid Frequency B)
2
Mid. output frequency voltage 2
Mid Voltage B)
Base voltage
(Base Voltage)
2
2
Motor rated current
(Motor Rated FLA)
Motor rated slip
(Motor Rated Slip)
Motor no-load current
(No-Load Current)
Number of motor poles
(Number of Poles)
Motor line-to-line resistance
(Term Resistance)
Motor leak inductance
(Lead Inductance)
Motor iron-core saturation coefficient 1
(Saturation Comp 1)
Motor iron-core saturation coefficient 2
(Saturation Comp 2)
Motor mechanical loss
(Mechanical Loss)
Motor 2 control method selection
(Control Method)
2
Motor 2 max. output frequency
(V/F2 Max Freq)
Motor 2 max. voltage
(V/F2 Max Voltage)
2
2
Motor 2 max. voltage frequency 2
(V/F2 Base Freq)
Motor 2 mid. output frequency 1 2
(V/F2 Mid Freq)
* 1. Factory setting depends on the control method (A1-02).
* 2. Not displayed for some models depending on software version No.
* 3. Setting unit and initial setting depend on Inverter capacity.
* 4. Constants that cannot be used. (Do not change the settings)
* 5. Setting for 200 V class Inverters. For 400 V class Inverters, double the value.
Factory
Setting
1.0
Setting
0.0
0.0
1.90
3
2.90
3
1.20
3
4
9.842
3
18.2
3
0.50
0.75
0.0
0F
60.0
200.0
5
60.0
3.0
1
11.0
1 5
0.5
1
2.0
1 5
0.0
0
25
200
5
0
2
60.0
200.0
5
60.0
3.0
- 16
No.
E4-05
E4-06
E4-07
E5-01
E5-02
E5-03
E5-04
E5-05
E5-06
F1-01
F1-02
F1-03
F1-04
F1-05
F1-06
F1-07
F1-08
F1-09
F1-10
F1-11
F1-12
F1-13
F1-14
F2-01
F3-01
F4-01
F4-02
F4--03
F4-04
F4--05
F4--06
F5-01
Table 12.1
Name
(Display)
Motor 2 mid. output frequency voltage 1
(V/F2 Mid Voltage)
Motor 2 min. output frequency
(V/F2 Min Freq)
1
Motor 2 min. output frequency voltage
(V/F2 Min Voltage)
1 Motor 2 rated current
(Motor 2 rated FLA)
Motor 2 rated slip
(Motor 2 Slip Freq)
1
1
Motor 2 no-load current
(Motor 2 No-load I)
1
Motor 2 number of poles
(Motor 2 # Poles)
1
Motor 2 line-to-line resistance
(Motor 2 term Ohms)
Motor 2 leak inductance
(Motor 2 Leak)
1
1
PG constant
(PG Pulse/Rev)
Operation selection at PG open circuit
(PG Fdbk Loss Sel)
Operation selection at overspeed
(PG Overspeed Sel)
Operation selection at deviation
(PG Deviation Sel)
PG rotation
(PG Rotation Sel)
PG division rate (PG pulse monitor)
(PG output Ratio)
Integral value during accel/decel enable/disable
(PG Ramp PI/I Sel)
Overspeed detection level
(PG Overspd Level)
Overspeed detection delay time
(PG Overspd Time)
Excessive speed deviation detection level
(PG Deviate level)
Excessive speed deviation detection delay time
(PG Deviate Time)
Number of PG gear teeth 1
(PG# Gear Teeth 1)
Number of PG gear teeth 2
(PG# Gear Teeth 2)
PG open-circuit detection time
(PGO Time)
1
Bi-polar or uni-polar input selection
(AI-14 Input Sel)
Digital input option
(DI Input)
Channel 1 monitor selection
(AO Ch1 Select)
Channel I gain
(AO Ch1 Gain)
Channel 2 monitor selection
(AO Ch2 Select)
Channel 2 gain
(AO Ch2 Gain)
Channel 1 output monitor bias
(AO Ch1 Bias)
Channel 2 output monitor bias
(AO Ch2 Bias)
Channel 1 output selection
(DO-02 Ch1 Select)
Factory
Setting
11.0
2
0.5
2.0
2
1.9
3
2.90
3
1.20
3
4 poles
9.842
3
18.2
3
600
1
1
3
0
1
0
115
0.0
4
10
0.5
0
0
2.0
0
0
2
1.00
3
0.50
0.0
0.0
0
* 1. Not displayed for some models depending on software version No.
* 2. Setting for 200 V class Inverters. For 400 V class Inverters, double the value.
* 3. Setting unit and initial setting depend on Inverter capacity.
* 4. Depends on the control method (A1-02).
* 5. Factory setting in the parentheses is for 3-wire sequence.
User Constants (Continued)
Setting No.
F5-02
F6-01
F7-01
F8-01
F9-01
F9-02
F9-03
F9-04
H1-01
H1-02
H1-03
H1-04
H1-05
H1-06
H2-01
Name
(Display)
Channel 2 output selection
(DO-02 Ch2 Select)
Output mode selection
(DO-08 Selection)
Frequency multiple selection
(PO-36F Selection)
Transmission option (SI-F/G)
(E-15 Det Sel)
1
External fault input level from transmissin option (FF0 Selection) 1
External fault detection from transmission option (EF0 Detection) 1
Action for external fault from transmission option (EF0 Fault Act) 1
Transmission option trace sampling time
(Trace Sample Time) 1
Multi-function input (terminal 3)
(Terminal 3 Sel)
Multi-function input (terminal 4)
(Terminal 4 Sel)
Multi-function input (terminal 5)
(Terminal 5 Sel)
Multi-function input (terminal 6)
(Terminal 6 Sel)
Multi-function input (terminal 7)
(Terminal 7 Sel)
Multi-function input (terminal 8)
(Terminal 8 Sel)
Multi-function input (terminal 9-10)
(Terminal 9 Sel)
H2-02
H2-03
H3-01
H3-02
H3-03
H3-04
H3-05
H3-06
H3-07
H3-08
H3-09
H3-10
H3-11
H3-12
H4-01
H4-02
H4-03
Multi-function input (terminal 25-27)
(Terminal 25 Sel)
Multi-function input (terminal 26-27)
(Terminal 26 Sel)
Signal level selection (terminal 13)
(Term 13 Signal)
Gain (terminal 13)
(Terminal 13 Gain)
Bias (terminal 13)
(Terminal 13 Bias)
Signal level selection (terminal 16)
(Term 16 Signal)
Multi-function analog input (terminal 16)
(Terminal 16 Sel)
Gain (terminal 16)
(Terminal 16 Gain)
Bias (terminal 16)
(Terminal 16 Bias)
Signal level selection (terminal 14)
(Term 14 Signal)
Multi-function analog input (terminal 14)
(Terminal 14 Sel)
Gain (terminal 14)
(Terminal 14 Gain)
Bias (terminal 14)
(Terminal 14 Bias)
Analog input filter time constant
(Filter Avg Time)
Monitor selection (terminal 21)
(Terminal 21 Sel)
Gain (terminal 21)
(Terminal 21 Gain)
Bias (terminal 21)
(Terminal 21 Bias)
Factory
Setting
1
Setting
0
1
0
24
14
3 (0)
5
4 (3)
5
6 (4)
5
8 (6)
5
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
100.0
0.0
2
1F
100.0
2
0
100.0
0.0
0
0.0
0.00
5
1.00
0.0
12
- 17
Appendix
12
No.
H4-04
H4-05
H4-06
H4-07
H5-01
H5-02
H5-03
H5-04
H5-05
L1-01
L1-02
L2-01
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L2-05
L2-06
L3-01
L3-02
L3-03
L3-04
L3-05
L3-06
L4-01
L4-02
L4-03
L4-04
L4-05
L5-01
L5-02
L6-01
Table 12.1
Name
(Display)
Monitor selection (terminal 23)
(Terminal 23 Sel)
Gain (terminal 23)
(Terminal 23 Gain)
Bias (terminal 23)
(Terminal 23 Bias)
Analog output signal level selection
(AO Level Select)
Station address
(Serial Comm Adr)
Communication speed selection
(Serial Baud Rate)
Communication parity selection
(Serial Com Sel)
Stopping method after communication error
(Serial Fault Sel)
Communication error detection selection
(Serial Flt Dtct)
1
Motor protection selection
(MOL Fault Select)
Motor protection time constant
(MOL Time Const)
Momentary power loss detection
(PwrL Selection)
Momentary power loss ridethru time
(PwrL Ridethru t)
Min. baseblock time
(PwrL Baseblock t)
Voltage recovery time
(PwrL V/F Ramp t)
Undervoltage detection level
(PUV Det Level)
KEB deceleration rate
(KEB Frequency)
Stall prevention selection during accel
(StallP Accel Sel)
Stall prevention level during accel
(StallP Accel Lvl)
Stall prevention limit during accel
(StallP CHP Lvl)
Stall prevention selection during decel
(StallP Decel Sel)
Stall prevention selection during running
(StallP Run Sel)
Stall prevention level during running
(StallP Run Level)
Factory
Setting
18
0.50
0.0
0
1F
3
0
3
1
1
1.0
0
0.7
2
0.5
2
0.3
2
190
3
0.0
1
150
50
1
1
160
Speed agree detection level
(Spd Agree Level)
Speed agree detection width
(Spd Agree Width)
Speed agree detection level (+/--)
(Spd Agree Lvl + --)
Speed agree detection width (+/--)
(Spd Agree Wdth + --)
Operation when frequency reference is missing
(Ref Loss Sel)
Number of auto restart attempts
(Num of Restarts)
Auto restart operation selection
(Restart Sel)
Torque detection selection 1
(Torq Det 1 Sel)
0.0
2.0
0.0
2.0
0
0
0
0
User Constants (Continued)
Setting No.
L6-02
L6-03
L6-04
L6-05
L6-06
L7-01
L7-02
L7-03
L7-04
L8-01
L8-02
L8-03
L8-05
L8-07
L8--10
L8--17
L8--19 o1-01 o1-02 o1-03 o1-04 o1-05 o2-01 o2-02 o2-03 o2-04 o2-05 o2-06 o2-07 o2-08 o2-09
Name
(Display)
Torque detection level 1
(Torq Det 1 Lvl)
Torque detection time 1
(Torq Det 1 Time)
Torque detection selection 2
(Torq Det 2 Lvl)
Torque detection level 2
(Torq Det 2 Lvl)
Torque detection time 2
(Torq Det 2 time)
Forward torque limit
(Torq Limit Fwd)
Reverse torque limit
(Torq Limit Rev)
Forward regenerative torque limit
(Torq Lmt Fwd Rgn)
Reverse regenerative torque limit
(Torq Lmt Rev Rgn)
Protect selection for internal DB resistor
(DB Resistor Prot)
Overheat pre-alarm level
(OH Pre-Alarm Lvl)
Operation selection after overheat pre-alarm
(OH Pre-Alarm Sel)
Input open-phase protection selection
(Ph Loss In Sel)
Output open-phase protection selection
(Ph Loss Out Sel)
Ground protection selection
(GND Det Sel)
Carrier frequency reduction selection
(L--Spd 1GBT Prict)
OL2 characteristics selection for low speeds
(OL2 Chara @ L--Spd)
Monitor selection
(Monitor Select)
Monitor selection after power up
(Power-On Monitor)
Frequency units of reference setting/monitor
(Display Scaling)
Frequency units of constant setting
(Display Units)
Constant no. display selection
(Address Display)
LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/disable
(Local/Remote Key)
STOP key during control circuit terminal operation
(Oper STOP Key)
User constant initial value
(User Defaults) kVA selection
(Inverter Model #)
Frequency reference setting method
(Operator M.O.P.)
1
Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected
(Oper Detection)
Cumulative operation time setting
(Elapsed Time Set)
Cumulative operation time selection
(Elapsed Time Run)
1 Initialize mode selection
(Init Mode Sel)
* 1. Not displayed for some models depending on software version No.
* 2. Setting unit and initial setting depend on Inverter capacity.
* 3. Setting for 200 V class Inverters. For 400 V class Inverters, double the value.
* 4. Not initialized. (Japanese standard specification is o2-09 = 0.)
1
0
0
2
0
0
Factory
Setting
150
Setting
0
0
200
0
95
3
200
200
200
0.1
0
150
0.1
0
1
0
0
0
6
1
1
1
0
0
4
- 18
No.
P1--01
P1--02
P1--03
P1--04
P1--05
P3--01
P3--02
Table 12.1
Name
(Display)
Winding Change frequency
(Changeover Freq)
Winding change hysteresis
(Frequency Width)
MC Answerback error detection
(Ansback Det Time)
Motor Constant selection
(Wye Winding Sel)
Programming mode valid/invalid during run
(Program Mode @ RUN)
Main Axis Zero Point
(Position Origin)
Position Control Gain (H)
(Position Gain H)
Factory
Setting
0.0
0.5
0.20
1
1
0 pulses
10
User Constants (Continued)
Setting No.
P3--05
P3--06
P3--07
P3--08
P3--11
P3--12
Name
(Display)
Positioning Completion Detection Width
(ORE Set Pulse)
Positioning Completion Cancel Width
(ORE Reset Pulse)
Orientation Speed
(ORT Speed)
Gear Ratio (H)
(Gear Ratio H)
Gear Direction
(Gear Direction)
Dither Level
(Dither Level)
Factory
Setting
5 pulses
10 pulses
400 r/min
1.0000
Setting
0
0
- 19
12
A
AC Reactor 3 - 14 acceleration 6 - 11 6 - 16 acceleration/deceleration ramp hold 7 - 33 access levels 1 - 5 4 - 6 4 - 19 6 - 2
Advanced 1 - 5 4 - 6 setting user constants 4 - 10
AFR
See automatic frequency generator analog input characteristics gain and bias 7 - 45 analog inputs 6 - 5 adjusting gain and bias 6 - 6 switching 6 - 5
Analog Monitor Card settings 7 - 28
Analog Reference Card settings 7 - 27
ASR
See speed loop automatic frequency regulator 7 - 5 autotuning 1 - 4 4 - 29 input voltage setting flux vector control 6 - 27 open-loop vector control 6 - 17 faults 6 - 21 setting user constants 6 - 18
B
Basic 1 - 5 4 - 6 setting user constants 4 - 9 bias analog inputs 6 - 6 braking resistor 3 - 17
Braking Resistor Unit 12 - 8 connecting 3 - 17
Braking Unit 12 - 8 connecting 3 - 17 parallel 3 - 18
BUS (option communications error) 9 - 7
C cables length 3 - 16
CALL (serial communications call) 9 - 7 carrier frequency 7 - 24
CE (MEMOBUS communications error) 9 - 7
CF (out of control) 9 - 4 closed-loop connectors control circuit 3 - 28 main circuit 3 - 8
Index common functions 7 - 17 communications error (CE) 9 - 7 connection diagrams 3 - 4 3 - 12 constants write enable 7 - 36 contact outputs 12 - 14 control fault (CF) 9 - 4 control inputs 6 - 9 responsiveness 6 - 9 control method affects on factory settings 8 - 35 control methods 4 - 20 6 - 3
CPF 9 - 4 cumulative operating time 7 - 63
D
DC injection braking command 7 - 40
DC injection braking function 7 - 18
DDS/SI-B external error detected 9 - 7 deceleration 6 - 11 6 - 16 time switching frequency 6 - 11 times 6 - 16
DEV (speed deviation) 9 - 4 9 - 7
Digital Operator 1 - 5 1 - 8 5 - 9 attaching 2 - 9
Digital Output Card 7 - 29
Digital Reference Card settings 7 - 28 dimensions 2 - 4 display status 5 - 4
E
E-15 (Si-F/G communications error) 9 - 7
EF (external fault) 9 - 4 9 - 6 9 - 7
EF0 (option external fault) 9 - 7
EF0 9 - 4 electromagnetic switch 3 - 15 emergency stop 6 - 10 6 - 16 time setting 6 - 10 time switching frequency 6 - 11 times 6 - 16 enclosed, wall-mounted type 2 - 3 installation conditions 2 - 6
ERR (EEPROM read/write error) 9 - 8 errors operation 9 - 8 excessive speed deviation 9 - 4 9 - 7
Index- 1
external baseblock NC 7 - 32 external baseblock NO 7 - 32 external faults 7 - 37 external speed search 1 7 - 40 external speed search 2 7 - 40
F factory settings 12 - 15 fault reset 7 - 35 fault restart settings 7 - 56 faults 9 - 2 autotuning flux vector control 6 - 31 open-loop vector control 6 - 21 detection functions flux vector control 6 - 23 minor 9 - 6 flux vector control 1 - 4 6 - 22 7 - 10
PG Speed Control Cards 6 - 22 forward/reverse run commands input together (EF) 9 - 6 frequency detection settings 7 - 53 frequency references 1 - 4 6 - 4 6 - 13 7 - 24 function selection 6 - 16 jog 6 - 13 multi-step 6 - 13 presetting 6 - 8 selecting 6 - 4 selecting the source 6 - 7 selecting the units 6 - 7 terminal 13 signal level 6 - 4 terminal 14 signal level 6 - 4 terminal 16 signal level 6 - 5 voltage range 6 - 4 front cover mounting 2 - 9 removing 2 - 8 2 - 9
G gain analog inputs 6 - 6
GF (ground fault) 9 - 2 ground wiring 3 - 16 ground fault (GF) 9 - 2 ground fault interrupter 3 - 13
H hardware protection settings 7 - 57
Index
I
IGBT 1 - 4 inductive noise countermeasures 3 - 15 initial excitation function flux vector control 6 - 26 initialize mode 4 - 18 user constant list 8 - 3 input voltage setting 5 - 5 inrush prevention circuit fault (UV3) 9 - 2 inspection 10 - 3 installation 2 - 7 conditions 2 - 6 enclosed, wall-mounted type 2 - 6 open-chassis type 2 - 6 site 2 - 6 space 2 - 7 insulated gate bipolar transistor
See IGBT inverter capacity affects on factory settings 8 - 36 inverter overheat pre-alarm 7 - 43 inverter overheating pre-alarm (OH2) 9 - 6
J jog 6 - 8 6 - 16 jump frequencies 7 - 25
K key function settings 7 - 61
L language 4 - 19
LF (output phase loss) 9 - 3 load short-circuit (SC) 9 - 2 local/remote selection 7 - 32
M magnetic contactor 3 - 13 3 - 15 main circuit input side wiring 3 - 13 output side wiring 3 - 15 main circuit overvoltage (OV) 9 - 6
Index- 2
main circuit terminals 3 - 6 main circuit undervoltage (UV) 9 - 6 main circuit undervoltage (UV1) 9 - 2 main circuit voltage fault (PF) 9 - 3 maintenance 10 - 3 mass 2 - 5
MEMOBUS communications 7 - 47 modes
Inverter 4 - 4 switching 4 - 5 modified constants mode 4 - 31 molded-case circuit breaker 3 - 13 momentary power loss settings 7 - 49 monitor output adjusting 7 - 46 monitoring startup 4 - 16 motor using the Inverter for a special motor 12 - 5 using the Inverter for a standard motor 12 - 4 motor constants 7 - 5 motor overload OL1 7 - 43 motor protection settings 7 - 48 multi-function analog input selection 7 - 34 multi-function analog input/frequency reference current
7 - 44 multi-function analog output settings 7 - 46 multi-function analog output signal level 7 - 46 multi-function input functions 8 - 21 multi-function input settings 7 - 31 multi-function inputs 6 - 12 multi-function output functions 8 - 22 multi-function output settings 7 - 41
N no-load operation 5 - 8
Digital Operator 5 - 9 frequency reference setting 5 - 8 status checking 5 - 9 noise filter output side 3 - 15
LC/RC 3 - 15 power supply side 3 - 14
O
OC (overcurrent) 9 - 2
Index
OH (heat sink over temperature) 9 - 6
OH OH1 (heat sink over temperature) 9 - 3
OH2 (overheat 2) 9 - 6
OH2 alarm signal 7 - 34
OL1 (motor overloaded) 9 - 3
OL2 (inverter overloaded) 9 - 3
OL3 (overtorque detection 1) 9 - 3 9 - 6
OL4 (overtorque detection 2) 9 - 3 9 - 6
OPE 9 - 8 open-chassis type 2 - 3 openhassis type installation conditions 2 - 6 open-loop vector control 6 - 17 7 - 2 open-loop vector control 1 - 4 operation mode 4 - 11 operator display selection 7 - 60
OPR (operator disconnect) 9 - 4
Option Card transmission error (BUS) 9 - 7 option card/inverter selection 7 - 32
Option Cards settings 7 - 26
OS (overspeed) 9 - 3 9 - 6 output open phase (LF) 9 - 3
OV (overvoltage) 9 - 2 9 - 6 overcurrent (OC) 9 - 2 overspeed 9 - 3 9 - 6 flux vector control 6 - 24 overtorque 1 (OL3) 9 - 6 overtorque 2 (OL4) 9 - 6 overtorque detection settings 7 - 56
P password 4 - 23
PF (input phase loss) 9 - 3
PG constant flux vector control 6 - 22 disconnection stopping method flux vector control 6 - 23 flux vector control 6 - 22 pulse output monitor division rate flux vector control
6 - 23 rotation direction flux vector control 6 - 22 speed deviation flux vector control 6 - 24
PG disconnection detection 9 - 4
PG Speed Control Card 6 - 22 installing 3 - 24
Index- 3
terminal blocks 3 - 25 wiring 3 - 28 wiring 3 - 26
PGO (PG open) 9 - 4 9 - 6 phase advancing capacitor 3 - 15 power supplies 5 - 4 input connecting 3 - 13 power transmission mechanism 12 - 5 programming mode 4 - 26 parameter list 8 - 4
PUF (DC bus fuse open) 9 - 2
Pulse Monitor Card settings 7 - 30
Q
Quick-start 4 - 6 setting user constants 4 - 8
Quick-start 1 - 5
R radio noise countermeasures 3 - 16 reference source 6 - 4 reverse operation 6 - 11
RH (dynamic brake resistor) 9 - 3
RR (dynamic brake transistor) 9 - 3 run 6 - 9 command 6 - 9 source 6 - 9
S
S-curve characteristic function 7 - 21
SC (short circuit) 9 - 2 sequence control 3-wire 6 - 13 sequential operation 4 - 21 settings analog output bias (terminal 21) H4-03 6 - 34 analog output bias (terminal 23) H4-06 6 - 34 analog output gain (terminal 21) H4-02 6 - 34 analog output gain (terminal 23) H4-05 6 - 34 analog output level selection H4-07 6 - 34 analog output selection (terminal 21) H4-01 6 - 34 analog output selection (terminal 23) H4-04 6 - 34
SI-B communications error 9 - 7
SI-F/G communications error detected 9 - 7 slip compensation gain 7 - 15 7 - 22 specifications Inverters 11 - 2
Index speed control flux vector control 6 - 32 integral time flux vector control 6 - 32 low-speed gain 6 - 32 proportional gain flux vector control 6 - 32 low-speed gain 6 - 32 responsiveness flux vector control 6 - 33 speed control gain flux vector control 6 - 34 fine adjustments 6 - 34 speed control integral reset 7 - 34 speed control proportional gain 7 - 41 speed feedback 7 - 5 speed search function 7 - 20 stall prevention function settings 7 - 51
Status Monitor 4 - 12 stopping method 6 - 12 deceleration 6 - 12 flux vector control 6 - 25 surge absorber 3 - 14
T temperature 2 - 6 terminal block 3 - 5 torque compensation function 7 - 23 torque limits 7 - 3 7 - 11 analog inputs 7 - 4 7 - 11
Transmission Option Card DPRAM error (CPF23) 9 - 5
Transmission Option Card model code error (CPF22) 9 - 5
Transmission Option Card self diagnostic error (CPF21) 9 - 5 trim control increase and decrease 7 - 36 troubleshooting 9 - 1 9 - 9
U up and down commands 7 - 34 user constants 4 - 23 application constants 8 - 4 autotuning acceleration/deceleration 8 - 7 carrier frequency 8 - 10 factory tuning 8 - 11 motor slip compensation 8 - 8
S-curve acceleration/deceleration 8 - 8 speed control 8 - 10 torque compensation 8 - 9 autotuning constants 8 - 7
Index- 4
Index constants with factory settings dependent on control method 8 - 35 constants with factory settings dependent on inverter capacity 8 - 36
DC braking 8 - 5 factory settings 12 - 15 initializing 4 - 21 lists initialize mode 8 - 3 programming mode 8 - 4 motor constants 8 - 14 motor 2 control method 8 - 16 motor 2 setup 8 - 17 motor 2 V/f pattern 8 - 16 motor setup 8 - 15
V/f pattern 8 - 14 operation mode selections 8 - 4 operator constants 8 - 32 monitor selections 8 - 32 multi-function selections 8 - 33 options 8 - 18 other option setup 8 - 19
PG option setup 8 - 18 protection constants 8 - 26 fault restart 8 - 29 hardware protection 8 - 30 motor overload 8 - 26 power loss ridethrough 8 - 26 reference directions 8 - 28 stall prevention 8 - 27 torque detection 8 - 29 torque limits 8 - 30 reference constants 8 - 12 jump frequencies 8 - 13 preset references 8 - 12 reference limits 8 - 12 search speed 8 - 6 setting
Advanced 4 - 10
Basic 4 - 9
Quick-start 4 - 8 terminal constants 8 - 21 analog inputs 8 - 23 analog outputs 8 - 25
MEMOBUS communications 8 - 25 multi-function inputs 8 - 21 multi-function outputs 8 - 22
UV (DC bus undervoltage) 9 - 6
UV1 (DC bus undervoltage) 9 - 2
UV2 (CTL PS undervoltage) 9 - 2
UV3 (MC answerback) 9 - 2
V motor constants 7 - 13 vector control 1 - 4 flux 1 - 4 open-loop 1 - 4 ventilation 2 - 6 voltage 5 - 5 6 - 27 input 5 - 5 autotuning in flux vector control 6 - 27 voltage range 6 - 4 frequency reference 6 - 4
VS Operator 12 - 13
W warning label v viii wire sizes 3 - 6 control circuits 3 - 20 wiring connection diagrams 3 - 12 control circuit 3 - 20 write-protect 4 - 23
Z zero-speed 7 - 43 zero-speed operation flux vector control 6 - 25
Index- 5
Atsisiųsti
Vieša nuoroda atnaujinta
Vieša nuoroda į jūsų pokalbį buvo atnaujinta. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Dokumento vieša nuoroda
Reklama